JP7417687B2 - Electronic unit management method and electronic unit management system - Google Patents

Description

Embodiments of the present invention relate to an electronic unit management method and an electronic unit management system, and include an M2M system that collects information using various sensors installed in public facilities, homes, etc., and performs control based on the information. (Machine to Machine) applied technology or IoT (Internet of Things) applied technology.

As shown in Non-Patent Document 1 in the field of M2M or IoT applied technology, worldwide standardization work is progressing. Here, we aim to comprehensively integrate and manage information obtained from a wide variety of sensors, and to formulate general-purpose standards to apply the results to a variety of services.

D. Boswarthick et. al.: M2M Communications: A Systems Approach (2012, John Wiley & Sons Ltd.)

As shown in Non-Patent Document 1, standardization activities to date have been based on the premise of collecting information from "sensor-embedded devices" and using that information in an integrated manner to provide services. Additionally, due to the versatility requirements of standardization, it is necessary to be able to comprehensively handle information obtained from all kinds of sensors. Furthermore, in order to maintain the utility value of the established standards over a long period of time, it is necessary to be able to respond to future technological advances in sensor-embedded devices and to accommodate the expandability of the types of sensors that can be incorporated into the devices. In this way, it is not only extremely difficult to ensure consistency between diversity (of sensors) and versatility (of standards), which are contradictory to each other; The essential contradiction of standardization activities lies in ensuring flexibility and extensibility (accommodating the diversity of standards).

There are four specific current technical issues listed below. First of all, the accuracy of information collection that should be utilized for service provision largely depends on whether the power is turned on or off for each sensor-embedded device. That is, in order to select the optimal service content, it is necessary to integrate information obtained from various sensors and estimate/judge the state within a given system or the user's behavior or state. However, when most of the devices in the network system are powered off, the amount of information to be collected is too small, causing a problem in which the accuracy of the estimation/judgment is significantly reduced.

Next, there is the difficulty of responding to future changes in the functions of sensor-embedded devices. For example, since the function of a television was previously limited to receiving broadcast waves and displaying images, consider the case where a communication standard was established that would allow only the television display status to be determined. In contrast, high-end Japanese TVs now have a built-in recording function. Furthermore, there are high-end televisions that have a data communication function using a network line. Although it is not so widespread at present, it is now possible to detect the positional information of the viewing user using naked-eye 3DTV (3 Dimensional Television). Furthermore, in the future, it is possible that televisions will have built-in light sensors (to optimally control the brightness of the display screen). In this way, if the standards are updated every time the TV functions improve, there is a problem in that it takes too much time to study the standards, resulting in a delay in response. On the other hand, if the number of supported items within the standard is increased in advance in anticipation of future expansion of TV functions, the standard itself becomes redundant and the control of support within the device becomes complicated.

The third technical issue is that current communication standards, which aim for versatility and expandability, are finely layered (see Figure 32 for details), which creates duplication and redundancy in communication information. By layering communication standards, it is possible to correspond to various technical areas by replacing specific layers, but on the other hand, it leads to an increase in the amount of communication information and complexity of processing. As long as communication was carried out using computers or smartphones equipped with processors with high processing power, the increase in the amount of communication information and the complexity of processing were not a problem. However, these are not suitable for demands for power saving and processing simplification.

The final technical challenge is to make communication information more versatile, which requires a large amount of processing power, leading to higher prices and higher power consumption. For example, there is a communication method that allows communication information to be described in an XML (Extensible Markup Language) format to provide flexibility and expandability of the communication information. However, in this case, an XML decoding function (parser) is required on the receiving side, which complicates the functions of the receiving side. On the other hand, there is also a communication method that accommodates the diversity of devices by providing different standard tables for each type of device as communication information. However, even in this case, the standard table that can accommodate up to high-end devices of the same type becomes complicated, increasing the burden of communication processing on single-function devices.

The purpose of the present embodiment is to provide an electronic unit management method and management in which the electronic unit acquires information from surrounding devices in which it is located at the position it moves to, and performs its own operations according to the acquired information content. The goal is to provide a system.

According to one embodiment, a first system controller and a second system controller located in a first local network and a second local network, respectively;
A server located in a wide area network,
The electronic unit management method allows the server, the first system controller, and the second system controller to communicate with each other via the first local network, the second local network, and the wide area network. hand,
The first system controller and the second system controller are
Each section is set in each local area network, and the first section information at the first time of the electronic units existing in the section is written for each memory, and the describing second section information of the electronic unit at a time of 2;
The first system controller and the second system controller share information in the memory by mutual communication or communication via the server,
The electronic unit includes a communication function, an application storage section, and a software storage section for changing the application,
The software storage section stores an application to be executed that is sent from the first system controller or the second system controller in response to movement of the electronic unit,
The electronic unit acquires information representing the operating status of this equipment from surrounding equipment placed in the section to which it has moved, and controls the operation of the electronic unit itself according to the content of the information. An electronic unit management method is provided, characterized in that:

The electronic unit is defined as a common/generalized unit such as a composite module, a device, or a mixed form thereof, and can be managed and controlled on a unit-by-unit basis.

The unit and the system controller constitute a network system, and the system controller controls the entire network system. Furthermore, the system controller is capable of communicating with the outside of this network system.

FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a wide area network structure within the system of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a local network structure within the system of this embodiment. Embodiment explanatory diagram (1) of a unit. Embodiment explanatory diagram (2) of the unit. Embodiment explanatory diagram (1) of a composite module. Embodiment explanatory diagram (2) of a composite module. Embodiment explanatory diagram (3) of a composite module. Embodiment explanatory diagram (4) of a composite module. Embodiment explanatory diagram (5) of a composite module. Embodiment explanatory diagram (6) of a composite module. An explanatory diagram of a specific structure inside a sensor/communication module. 1 is a first embodiment showing a specific structure within a drive/communication module; A second embodiment showing a specific structure within the drive/communication module. A third embodiment showing a specific structure within the drive/communication module. A fourth embodiment showing a specific structure within the drive/communication module. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a specific structure within the communication module. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of another embodiment of a specific structure within a communication module. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of another embodiment regarding a local network structure. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of another embodiment regarding a local network structure. Application examples related to local network structure. An explanatory diagram of the basic application/communication layer structure of the system of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic explanatory diagram of information communicated in a communication middleware layer. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of the structure of transmission data within a network line in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of data structures in a physical layer header and a MAC layer header. FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of an IEEE extended address in this embodiment. An explanatory diagram of a data structure in an IPV6 header. An explanatory diagram of communication middleware data structure in C-format. An explanatory diagram of communication middleware data structure in E-format. An explanatory diagram of communication middleware data structure in A-format. An explanatory diagram of an application example regarding the basic application/communication layer structure. Another example (1) explanatory diagram regarding the application/communication layer structure. Another example (2) explanatory diagram regarding the application/communication layer structure. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of the periphery of a device driver in a computer system. An explanatory diagram around the management/control area of a unit in the system. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of another embodiment of the management/control relationship of units within the system. An explanatory diagram of a method of managing/controlling units within the system from a software perspective. FIG. 3 is a comparison diagram between an existing file system and a unit management method according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a display example of the internal structure of a unit management pseudo drive. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a display example of a structure within a folder corresponding to a composite module. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a display example of the internal structure of a sensor/communication module compatible folder. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an example of displaying sensor information in a sensor/communication module. An explanatory diagram of a routine for managing the position of devices and various modules in a section. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an example of an address table managed by the system of this embodiment. An explanatory diagram of an example of section division. An explanatory diagram of spatial unit sections related to sensing and services. An explanatory diagram of the basic processing flow within the system controller. An explanatory diagram of information collection and estimation/judgment methods from devices and composite modules fixedly placed within a section. An explanatory diagram of an estimation/determination method in this embodiment. An explanatory diagram of an example of time-series changes in communication information. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a method of providing services in sections. An explanatory diagram of information gathering and estimation/judgment methods from devices and composite modules that can be moved between sections. An explanatory diagram of a method for monitoring the position of devices and various modules. FIG. 3 is a structural explanatory diagram of a direction detection unit of a radio wave source in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a structural explanatory diagram of a stealth plate in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of the principle of detecting the direction of a radio wave source in this embodiment. An explanatory diagram of an example of section division in the field of social infrastructure. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of application of a composite module between different middleware layers. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a composite module is applied between different systems. An explanatory diagram showing an example to which a composite module is applied. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing another example to which a composite module is applied. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing yet another example to which a composite module is applied. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing yet another example to which a composite module is applied. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing yet another example to which a composite module is applied. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing yet another example to which a composite module is applied. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing yet another example to which a composite module is applied. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing yet another example to which a composite module is applied. An explanatory diagram showing network connections within a home client system. An explanatory diagram of a control method for automatic control compatible smart home appliances. Example of robot cleaner control condition setting screen display. An explanatory diagram of exchange information between air conditioners based on the E-format. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of information exchanged with a television based on the E-format. An explanatory diagram of the relationship between status information for each related device and user behavior and status. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a detailed control example of each device related to the robot cleaner. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of another embodiment showing a method of automatically determining the optimal operating state of a robot cleaner based on collected information.

Embodiments will be described below with reference to the drawings. First of all, the structure of chapters and sections related to the explanation content of this embodiment is shown in the table of contents below.

Chapter 1 Overview of the entire system in this embodiment Section 1.1 Overview of the entire system of this embodiment Section 1.2 Explanation of unit form Section 1.3 Explanation of the configuration inside the composite module Section 1.4 Structure inside the sensor/communication module Explanation Section 1.5 Structure explanation inside the drive/communication module Section 1.6
Explanation of a structural example within the communication module Section 1.7 Explanation of the overall structure of the wide area network system in this embodiment Section 1.8 Explanation of the local network system structure in this embodiment Section 1.9 Complex within the local network system Module usage examples Chapter 2
Section 2.1 Overview of the hierarchical structure and data structure of communication information Section 2.2 Hierarchical structure of network communication-related functions in this embodiment Section 2.3 Relationship between the hierarchical structure of communication-related functions and communication information on network lines Physical Z-Format Data Structures at the Internet Protocol Version 6 Layer and Media Access Layer Section 2.4 Internet Protocol Version 6 Layer Data Structures Section 2.5 C-Format Data Structures at the Communication Middleware Layer Section 2.6 Communication Middleware Layer Section 2.7 Data structure of E-format in communication middleware layer Section 2.8 Data structure of A-format in communication middleware layer Address table used in this embodiment system and its usage example Chapter 3 Management/display for each unit Method Section 3.1 Overview of basic unit management methods Section 3.2
Unit management means Section 3.3 Specific unit management examples and display examples Chapter 4 Overview of sections within the system of this embodiment Section 4.1 Positioning of sections within the system of this embodiment Section 4.2 Various modules and various Section 4.3 How to manage the location of equipment within a section Section 4.4 Processing methods from information collection to service provision for each section Section 4.5 How to track the movement of various modules and devices between sections Section 4.5 ) Compatibility between different systems Chapter 5 Application examples for each application field Section 5.1 Application examples in the civil sector Section 5.1.1 Application examples in the civil sector of wide area network systems Section 5.1.2 Example of application of composite module to civil sector Section 5.1.3 Example of application of section division method to civil sector Section 5.2 Example of application to social infrastructure sector Section 5.2.1 Application of wide area network system to social infrastructure field Example Section 5.2.2 Application example of composite module to social infrastructure field Section 5.2.3 Application example of section division method to social infrastructure field Section 5.3 Application example to healthcare field 5.3.1 Section 5.3.2 Example of application of wide area network system to healthcare field Section 5.3.3 Example of application of composite module to healthcare field Chapter 6 Example of application of section division method to healthcare field Automatic control method Section 6.1 Relationship between automatic control compatible smart home appliances and smart home appliance related devices Section 6.2 Overview of control method of automatic control compatible smart home appliances Section 6.3 Communication information between smart home appliance related devices 6 Section 4: Method for estimating/determining user behavior and status Section 6.5: Other embodiments regarding automatic control between smart home appliances Next, according to the table of contents above, each chapter/section will be explained below.

Chapter 1 Overview of the entire system of this embodiment Section 1.1 Overview of the entire system of this embodiment First, an overview of the entire system of this embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 shows the overall structure of a wide area network system in the entire system of this embodiment, and FIG. 2 shows the structure of a local network system forming a part of the wide area network system. Further, the embodiment, service contents, and newly generated effects described in FIG. 1 are also applied to the embodiment system shown in FIG. 2 in their entirety. Similarly, the embodiments, service contents, and new effects described using FIG. 2 (or described later using FIGS. 8A to 8B and FIG. 9) are also applied to the entire wide area network system in FIG. 1. Ru.

In FIG. 1, the governing bodies and organizations that handle predetermined products and information are called wholesalers A_1102 and B1/2_1104-1/2. Further, organizations or groups that provide predetermined services are called service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3. Here, each of the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 has one or more servers 1 to n_1116-1 to n. Further, in the system of this embodiment, the servers 1 to n_1116-1 to n are also referred to as cloud servers or clouds. These service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 obtain products (or information) from wholesaler B1_1104-1 and/or wholesaler B2_1104-2, which handle similar products (or information), and -Provide services for 1 to 3. Here, domains 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 indicate predetermined network spaces, and one domain 2_1122-2 is composed of one or more systems α_1132 and β_1134. In the following explanation, the systems α_1132 and β_1134 may be called a network system or a client system as another name. Therefore, the names "network system" or "client system" that appear in the explanation that follows are synonymous with the above-mentioned "systems α_1132, β_1134." Further, as described above, one domain 2_1122-2 may be configured from a plurality of different systems α_1132 and β_1134. Therefore, in the following description, the domain 2_1122-2 may be referred to as a composite client system. Therefore, the term "composite client" that will appear in the following explanations will be synonymous with "domain 2_1122-2".

Meanwhile, wholesalers A_1102 and B1/2_1104-1/2 and service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 and domains 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 are connected to each other via a network. In addition, the respective service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 are also connected to each other via a network, allowing them to share information or collaborate and accommodate resources 1114 with each other.

The system α_1132 shown in FIG. 1 means the smallest network system unit whose internal parts are connected to each other via a network. Furthermore, one system controller α_1126 is often installed within the system α_1132. This system controller α_1126 manages or operates the (network) system. However, one system β_1134, which is the smallest network system unit, may be composed of only one system controller β_1128. Furthermore, system α_1132 and system β_1134, which constitute the same domain 2_1122-2, may exist in locations that are physically separated from each other. Furthermore, cooperative processing is also possible between different systems α_1132 and β_1134 within the same domain 2_1122-2.

In the system of this embodiment, predetermined service units provided to users within the same system α_1132 are defined as sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m. Furthermore, the unit is not limited to this, and units related to the integration, management, and control of information collected within the same system α_1132 may be defined as sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m. Of course, the same sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m may serve both as a unit of service to users and as a unit of information integration/management/control. Providing services and collecting/managing information in units of sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m in this way has the effect of increasing the efficiency of providing services and collecting/managing information and improving convenience for users.

FIG. 2 shows the structure of the local network system formed by the system α_1132 in FIG. 1. A processor 1230 and a memory unit 1232 are built into the system controller α_1126, and network communication within the system α_1132 is performed via a communication module 1202-3. In parallel, the system controller α_1126 is also capable of network communication with the outside via the same communication module 1202-3.

In the system of this embodiment, basic units having network communication functions other than the system controller α_1126 in the network system α_1132 are defined as units 1 to 7_1290-1 to 7. In this embodiment, various predetermined functions scattered within the network system α_1132 are managed or controlled on a unit-by-unit basis. This facilitates integrated management/control of various functions within the same network system α_1132, regardless of the physical form of the unit. By the way, as a form for realizing the network communication function in each of the units 1 to 7_1290-1 to 7, FIG. 2 shows an example in which each of the units 1 to 7_1290-1 to 7 has a built-in communication module 1202-4 to 1202-10. However, the means for realizing the network communication function is not limited to this, and for example, a part of a predetermined module or a part of a device may have a network communication function. Alternatively, the network communication function may be implemented as part of the functions within specific software.

In the system of this embodiment, the system controller α_1126 is basically responsible for managing/operating/controlling network communication within the network system α_1132. This system controller α_1126 is often physically installed within the network system α_1132, as shown in FIG. In this case, each of the units 1 to 7_1290-1 to 7 in FIG. 2 can individually and directly communicate information with the system controller α_1126. However, the system controller β_1128 physically installed outside the network system α_1132 may manage/operate/control network communication within the network system α_1132 as described later with reference to FIG. 9. Furthermore, the system controller α_1126 or the system controller β_1128 manages independent information communication between different units 1 to 7_1290-1 to 7.

Section 1.2 Description of unit configuration The feature that various predetermined functions scattered within the system α_1132 are managed or controlled on a unit-by-unit basis by the system controller α_1126 has already been explained in the previous section. That is, as shown in FIG. 2, a large number of means for realizing various functions are scattered within the same network system α_1132, and conventionally, integrated management and control thereof has been accompanied by great complexity. Furthermore, the physical forms of units that implement various functions are diverse, such as a device 1250, a composite module 1295 (description of this composite module will be described later in Section 1.3), a sensor module 1260, and a drive module 1270. Therefore, the complexity of integrated management and control increases further.

As a measure against the increase in complexity, in the system of this embodiment, the network communication function is used as the standard for the various function implementation means scattered within the network system α_1132 (the implementation means of each network communication function is It is characterized by the fact that it is managed/controlled as a unit. In other words, a single function or a collection of various functions that can be realized in conjunction with a minimum network communication function is grouped into a common and generalized concept called a unit. Further, as described above, each individual unit can take various physical forms, but management, control, or information collection is performed using a common/generalized unit that does not depend on a specific physical form as a basic unit. In this way, by defining a unit that does not depend on individual functions or physical form as a management unit (or control/information collection unit) within network system α_1132, management within network system α_1132 by system controller α_1126 or system controller β_1128 or This has the effect of greatly simplifying control/information collection. (Specific examples of management/control using units will be discussed later in Chapter 3.)
By the way, as a specific physical form example of the unit, as shown in FIG. 2, the entire device (Device) 1_1250-1 may correspond to the unit 4_1290-4, or the composite module 1_1295-1, 7_1295 that exists independently -7 as a whole may correspond to units 1_1290-1 and 7_1290-7. In addition, the composite modules 6_1295-6, 2_1295-2, and 3_1295-3 that constitute a part of equipment 2_1250-2 and equipment 5_1250-5 correspond to units 6_1290-6, 2_1290-2, and 3_1290-3, respectively. You can let me. However, in FIG. 2, unit 2_1290-2 and unit 3_1290-3 overlap at the communication module 1202-10. In this way, in this embodiment, some overlap between different units 2_1290-2 and 3_1290-3 is allowed. Furthermore, there may be an inclusion relationship between different units (a state in which one unit is completely included in another unit).

Although a specific example is shown in FIG. 2, a general form that the unit can take will be explained using FIG. 3A. In the unit form shown in FIG. 3A(a), the entire device 1250 having a network communication function corresponds to one unit 1290. Here, if this device 1250 has complex multi-functions, the unit 1290 is similarly managed or controlled/information collected within the network system α_1132 as a basic unit having complex multi-functions.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3A(b), a composite module 1295 (specific details will be described later in Section 1.3) that exists independently in the network system α_1132 may be made to correspond to one unit 1290. Furthermore, as another management form (or control/information collection unit form), a predetermined composite module 1295 can be added or connected to a specific device 1250 (which may or may not have a network communication function by itself) to expand the equipment. The entire process may be regarded as one unit 1290 as shown in FIG. 3A(c).

The unit form defined in the device 5_1250-5 shown in FIG. 2 will be explained in an easy-to-understand manner using FIG. 3B. As shown in FIG. 3B, within the device 5_1250-5, there is one sensor module 1260-9 having a sensor function, and two drive modules 1_1270-5 and 2_1270-6 having mutually different driving or operating functions. Built-in. Furthermore, a communication module 1202-10 having a network communication function with the system controller α_1126 is also incorporated within the network system α_1132. The device 5_1250-5 includes a device controller 1240-3 that integrally controls the operations of these modules and also integrally collects and manages status information of these modules and sensor information obtained therefrom. Information acquired or uniquely generated by the device controller 1240-3 can be stored in the memory section 1246.

As described above, as a reference unit for optimal management or control/information collection within the network system α_1132, the system controller α_1126 or the system controller β_1128 can appropriately set (define) the unit form. For example, if the system controller α_1126 or the system controller β_1128 wants to control/collect information on the individual sensor functions and drive (operation) functions in the device 5_1250-5 in detail via the network (that is, via the communication module 1202-10), , unit 2_1290-2 is set as shown in FIG. 3B(a). In this case, unit 2_1290-2 includes a sensor module 1260-9, two drive modules 1_1270-5 and 2_1270-6, and a communication module 1202-10. The system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) can perform detailed control over each module within the unit 2_1290-2.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3B(b), unit 3_1290-3 is comprised only of communication module 1202-10 and device controller 1240-3. Therefore, when the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) communicates information with the unit 3_1290-3, it is possible to perform advanced control that integrates the entire device 5_1250-5 or to collect information in an integrated manner. In order to communicate information with unit 3_1290-3, there is no need for detailed information communication processing for each module, unlike when communicating information with unit 2_1290-2. Therefore, setting (defining) unit 3_1290-3 greatly simplifies processing within system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) and improves processing efficiency. When the form (configuration) of the unit 1290 changes as described above, the content of communication information between the unit 1290 and the unit 1290 as seen from the system controller α_1126 (system controller β_1128) changes.

By the way, as mentioned above, the unit takes the form of a predetermined function realized in cooperation with a minimum network communication function. Therefore, there is a minimum network communication function within the unit. If the communication module 1202-10 is configured as shown in FIG. 3B as an example of the implementation form of this network communication function, the communication module 1202-10 will be included in the unit. As a result, as shown in FIG. 3B(c), there is an overlap between unit 2_1290-2 and unit 3_1290-3 with communication module 1202-10 as a common part.

If the specific form of the unit 1290 can be set flexibly within the network system α_1132, such as by making it possible to set multiple different units that overlap in the same functional unit as described above, the management of the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) ( This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom (control/information gathering).

Section 1.3 Configuration Description As one form of the unit 1295 in the composite module, FIG. 3A(b) shows the configuration of the composite module 1295. In this embodiment, a composite module is defined as a functional module that can implement a communication function and other functions other than the communication function. A particular feature is that communication functions are involved in realizing the other functions. Information communication with the outside (outside the composite module 1295) regarding the other functions is performed via this communication function. That is, by using the communication function within the composite module 1295, it becomes possible to collect information obtained as a result of executing a specific function of the composite module 1295 from the outside (outside the composite module 1295). On the other hand, a communication function within the composite module 1295 may be used to control a specific function of the composite module 1295 from the outside (outside the composite module 1295).

Here, specific examples of the other functions include a sensor function, a drive (or operation) function, a control (process) function, a memory function, a display function, and the like. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the composite module may have any function other than the communication function. In particular, a composite module having a sensor function is referred to as a sensor/communication module 1460, and a composite module having a drive (or operating) function is referred to as a drive/communication module 1470. Further, a composite module having a control (process) function is referred to as a processor/communication module 1465, a composite module having a memory function is referred to as a memory/communication module 1475, and a composite module having a display function is referred to as a display/communication module 1478.

Next, the difference between the composite module described here and the unit described in Section 1.2 will be explained. The composite module 1295 can constitute a part of the device 1290 as a predetermined module. Furthermore, the composite module 1295 may exist alone within the network system. On the other hand, the unit 1290 means a basic unit of management/control/information collection within a network system in which various forms such as the device 1290, the composite module 1295, or a combination thereof are common and generalized. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3A(b), there is an inclusive relationship in which one or more composite modules 1295 can be included in one unit 1290. As a specific example, the device 1290 corresponds to one form of the unit 1290, whereas the composite module 1295 constitutes only a part of the device 1290. Here, in the above-mentioned inclusion relationship, the means for realizing the above-described communication function is commonly owned within the unit 1290 and within the composite module 1295. By the way, in Section 1.2, it was explained that the system controller α_1126 is not included in the unit 1290. On the other hand, there is a major difference from the unit 1290 in that a part of the system controller α_1126 can be set as a composite module 1295.

Communication functions and other functions within a composite module can be realized by either software (programs) or hardware (circuits), or can be realized by a combination of software and hardware (partially realized by hardware and the rest by software). ) may be done. In addition, there is no need for the above communication function and other functions to be separated in either software or hardware, and means for realizing both functions may coexist on software or hardware, or there may be some overlap or inclusion relationship. . Furthermore, it is not necessary that the means for realizing both functions be directly combined on software or hardware. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which the communication function implementation means and the other function implementation means are arranged at widely separated locations on the hardware or program, and the implementation means for both functions can perform cooperative processing using some kind of link means.

For convenience of explanation, the configuration within the composite module is shown in a block structure in FIGS. 4A to 4F. This block may be a predetermined circuit (hardware) or a program (software) having a predetermined grouping. Further, each block does not necessarily have to be separated on the software or hardware, and as described above, there may be a mixed/distributed scattering/partial overlap (common use)/inclusion relationship among the blocks.

The configuration of a basic composite module 1295 is shown in FIG. 4A. A communication module 1660 is provided as a means for realizing the communication function within the composite module 1295. However, FIG. 4A(a) shows a configuration in which an antenna 1480 for transmitting and receiving wireless signals is placed separately and connected to a communication module 1660. On the other hand, in FIG. 4A(b), an antenna for transmitting and receiving wireless signals is built into the communication module to constitute an antenna-embedded communication module 1666. Furthermore, this antenna built-in communication module 1666 has a structure in which it is functionally connected to another function module (function other than communication) 1440 that realizes functions other than communication functions (both functions in cooperation with each other). However, as shown in FIG. 4A(b), it is not always necessary that the antenna built-in communication module 1666 and the other function module 1440 are directly connected, but as long as a link is formed between the two functions in some way. good. As an example of the link formation, as shown in FIG. 4A(a), a communication module 1660 and another function module (functions other than communication) 1440, which are separated from each other at a remote distance, can be connected by a long-distance cable or the like. They may also have remote cooperation 1444. (For example, if a composite module is configured with software, and the program that configures the communication module 1660 and the program that configures the other function module 1440 are placed on servers in remote locations, the link data corresponding to the remote collaboration 1444 ( Both programs may perform cooperative processing via a URL (Uniform Resource Locator, etc.). ) For example, other function modules (functions other than communication) may be used in special environments where wireless transmission and reception (communication function realized by communication module 1660 using antenna 1480) is impossible, such as underground, deep underwater, or deep inside a steel building. 1440, the remote cooperation 1444 has the effect of allowing the composite module 1295 to function stably even under special environments. In addition, configurations other than those shown in FIG. 4A are not prohibited as the configuration of the composite module; for example, a communication module with a built-in antenna 1666 and another function module (functions other than communication) 1440 are located remotely, and the two are connected remotely using a long-distance cable or the like. Cooperation 1444 may also be performed.

FIG. 4B shows a configuration example in which a sensor/communication module 1460 is used as an example of the composite module 1295. The other function module (functions other than communication) 1440 in FIG. 4A is the sensor module 1260 in FIG. 4B. This sensor module 1260 refers to a sensor function unit having a quantitative or qualitative information gathering function or signal detection function within the predetermined system α_1132. This sensor module 1260 has an attribute that can be installed or moved (portable) within a predetermined system α_1132, and can contribute to state measurement and observation within the corresponding system α_1132.

Examples of specific objects to be sensed include information common to the human body such as body temperature, pulse rate, heart rate, and breathing rate, human facial expressions, individual face shape and appearance, identifiable information such as size information such as height and width, and illuminance. Physical information such as (brightness), acceleration, temperature, humidity, power/current/voltage, flow rate (of water, gas, etc.), number of people in a predetermined section 1142, congestion status or human presence detection information, Examples include movement information such as traffic conditions, and structure information such as the temperature, strain, shape, number of cracks, and internal cavity volume of the structure, but are not limited to these, and may correspond to any sensing target.

FIG. 4C shows a configuration example using a drive/communication module 1470 as the next example of the composite module 1295. The other function module (functions other than communication) 1440 in FIG. 4A is the drive module 1670 in FIG. 4C. Further, the external antenna 1480 and the communication module 1660 may be connectable (FIG. 4C(b)), or may be configured with a built-in antenna communication module 1666 that includes an antenna for transmitting and receiving wireless signals (FIG. 4C(a)). Also good. Furthermore, in the embodiment of FIG. 4C(a), the communication module 1666 with a built-in antenna and the drive module 1670 are located at remote locations from each other, and the two companies are configured to be able to collaborate remotely 1444 via a remote cable or the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a communication module 1660 connectable to an external antenna 1480 and a drive module 1670 are remotely linked 1444 may be used.

The drive module 1670 defined here means a service provision-related function unit for providing a specific service or a state change control function unit used to control a predetermined state change within the system α_1132. The word "actuator" used here in the terminology of drive module is easily misunderstood as being limited to only movable parts or operating parts that involve actual movement, but it is by no means necessary to involve movement. Therefore, examples of specific functions of the drive module described above include a display function for audio and images, a function to maintain or change the illuminance of lights and odor intensity, and a function to control the information transmission path. A predetermined information transmission function (such as a remote control function), an information communication relay function, or a remote control function (of the predetermined device 1250) that plays a part may also be made to correspond.

The sensor/communication module 1460 and the drive/communication module 1470 described so far often communicate information relatively passively in response to control from the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128). In contrast, the processor/communications module 1465 shown in FIG. 4D performs a relatively spontaneous or active function. In this embodiment, the control (process) function implementation means within the processor/communication module 1465 includes not only the device controller 1240 within the device 1250 but also the processor 1230 (FIG. 2) within the system controller α_1126 and the processor within the system controller β_1128. 1734 (FIGS. 17A/B) may be included. In particular, the communication module 1202-3 in the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128 enables information communication with devices installed outside the system α_1132 and the system β_1134 (for example, the server α_1116-n). Here, the composite module 1295 is required to have at least an information communication function within the system α_1132 (or system β_1134). Therefore, in FIG. 4D, the communication module 1202-3 is functionally separated into a communication module 1752 corresponding to the same system and a communication module 1758 corresponding to outside the system, and only this communication module 1752 corresponding to the same system constitutes the processor/communication module 1465. take shape. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and an external communication module 1758 may be included in the processor/communication module 1465. Further, when the configured (defined) processor/communication module 1465 exists in the device 1250, the above-mentioned external communication module 1758 is often not originally included in the device 1250.

When the processor/communication module 1465 performs a relatively spontaneous or active function within the network system α_1132 (or β_1134), management information (table) related information, which will be described later using FIGS. 10A/B, Information recorded in the recording area 1740 is often utilized. Therefore, when the processor/communications module 1465 is required to perform spontaneous/active functions, the processor/communications module 1465 may contain some of the memory sections 1242 and 1246 in the device 1250 or the memory in the system controller α_1126. A portion of the memory section 1232 (FIG. 2) or a portion of the memory section 1248 within the system controller β_1128 (FIGS. 17A/B) may be included.

For example, when the system controller α_1126 reads information recorded in the memory unit 1242 in the device 1_1250-1 in FIG. This requires the exchange of advanced communication information. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 4E, a memory/communication module 1475 is composed only of a recording area 1740 of management information (table) related information in memory units 1242, 1246, 1232, and 1248 and a corresponding communication module 1752 within the same system. By having the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128), it is possible to directly communicate information with the memory/communication module 1475 using a very simplified communication protocol. Therefore, the memory/communication module 1475 has the effect of simplifying communication of information recorded in the management information (table) related information recording area 1740 therein.

As for the functions realized by the other function module 1440 in FIG. 4A, only single function examples have been described in FIGS. 4B to 4E. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a plurality of different functions may be implemented within one composite module 1295, as shown in FIG. 4F. For example, within the composite module 1295, there are multiple different sense functions (compatible with sensor modules 1_1260-1 and 2_1260-2), multiple different drive (operation) functions (compatible with drive modules 1_1670-1 and 21670-2), and control ( Process function (corresponding to processors 1230, 1734 or device controller 1240), memory function (corresponding to memory units 1232, 1248), and display function (display module 1226) may be simultaneously implemented. Further, as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4F, the sensor module 1_1260-1 and the drive module 1670-2 are individually arranged in a place far away from the place where the antenna 1480 and the communication module 1660 are connected, and the long-distance cable etc. A structure that allows remote collaboration 1444 using .

Note that in FIG. 4F, each of the other function modules having functions other than communication is individually wired from the communication module 1660. However, instead of being connected to each other functional module, the communication module 1660 and a large number of other functional modules may be connected to a common bus line. In this case, other functional modules directly connected to the communication module 1660 are switched over time depending on the selector action or address designation.

Section 1.4 Explanation of Structure within Sensor/Communication Module A more specific and detailed structural example within the sensor/communication module 1460 outlined in FIG. 4B is shown in FIG. As a basic structure, the sensor signal or detection information obtained by the sensor module 1260 is transferred to the communication module 1660. This sensor signal or detection information is transmitted via communication module 1660 to communication module 1202-3 (FIG. 2) in system controller α_1126. Processing of information communicated in the communication middleware layer APL02 conforming to the C-format, etc., which will be described later in Chapter 2 using FIGS. 10A and 10B, is also executed within the communication module 1660 in FIG. 5.

On the other hand, power supplied to the sensor module 1260 and the communication module 1660 is obtained from the power storage module (battery) 1554. Furthermore, the sensor/communication module 1460 in FIG. 5 has a built-in (solar) power generation module (solar cell) 1552 that has a photoelectric conversion function. Electric power generated within 1552 is stored within power storage module (battery) 1554. Although FIG. 5 shows a (solar) power generation module (solar cell) 1552 having a photoelectric conversion function as a power generation means, some other energy conversion means may be used instead. As an energy conversion means other than the above-mentioned photoelectric conversion element, for example, thermo-electrical conversion means such as a thermocouple may be used. An end user may wear a sensor/communication module 1460 incorporating such a thermo-electric conversion means, and operate the sensor/communication module 1460 by generating electricity using the end user's body temperature. Furthermore, as another example, the wireless energy received by the communication module 1660 from the communication module 1202-3 in the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 2 may be converted into electric power and stored. The near-field energy received from the sensor may be converted into electric power and stored. By incorporating the energy conversion means such as the (solar) power generation module 1552 and the power storage module (battery) 1554 in the sensor/communication module 1460 in this way, the sensor/communication module 1460 can be operated for a long time without external power supply. operation becomes possible.

When the sensor module 1260 is used to measure light, ambient temperature, or ambient humidity, or when the sensor module 1260 corresponds to a human sensor, etc., the sensor module 1260 is used as a device 1_1250-1, 2_1250-2, 5_1250-5 (Figure 2). At the same time, the (solar) power generation module (solar cell) 1552 is also mounted so as to be exposed on the surfaces of the devices 1_1250-1, 2_1250-2, and 5_1250-5.

However, if the sensor/communication module 1460 is left in a dark place for a long period of time, the amount of power stored in the power storage module (battery) 1554 decreases, and there is a risk that a sufficient amount of power cannot be supplied to the sensor module 1260 and the communication module 1660. On the other hand, when the output voltage of the power storage module (battery) 1554 or the amount of stored power in the power storage module (battery) 1554 falls below a predetermined reference value, the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 2 is notified via the communication module 1660 as appropriate. . Specifically, as will be explained in detail in Chapter 2 with reference to FIG. 14, the information that "remaining battery level is low" is transmitted from a specific sensor/communication module 1460 to the system controller α_1126 in the form of an "alarm notification." will be notified. When the processor 1230 in the system controller α_1126 detects a decrease in the amount of stored power in the power storage module (battery) 1554 built in the specific sensor/communication module 1460, it notifies the end user via the user I/F unit 1234. By appropriately notifying the system controller α_1126 of the output voltage or amount of stored power of the power storage module (battery) 1554 in this way, it is possible to prevent the operation of a specific sensor/communication module 1460 due to a decrease in the amount of stored power, and the system of this embodiment This has the effect of ensuring overall operational stability.

The sensor/communication module 1460 shown in FIG. 5 also includes a near-field communication module 1560 capable of near-field wireless communication. As the proximity wireless transfer technology used here, for example, TransferJet or the contactless IC card standard FeliCa (registered trademark) (a coined word combining Felicity and Card) may be applied. In addition to the external power supply described above, the near-field communication module 1560 may be used to detect the installation location of the sensor/communication module 1460 during initial settings as described below. Specifically, when the composite module 7_1295-7 corresponding to the sensor/communication module is installed alone in the system of this embodiment shown in FIG. 2_1250-2), a portable external device (not shown) with a built-in GPS (Global Positioning System) function is brought close to communicate with the near-field communication module 1560. The GPS position information at this time is notified to the system controller α_1126 via the communication module 1202-3. As a result, the location information where the combined module 7_1295-7 that is compatible with the sensor/communication module (or the device 2_1250-2 that incorporates the combined module 6_1295-6 that is compatible with the sensor/communication module) is installed is registered in the system controller α_1126. be done. This registration information is stored in the memory unit 1232 (FIG. 2) in the system controller α_1126, for example, as information in the format shown in FIG. 23, which will be explained in Chapter 2. As described above, by incorporating the GPS function and performing initial settings using near-field communication using a portable external device, the installation position of the sensor/communication module 1460 can be determined, which has the effect of making it possible to provide detailed services to end users.

Section 1.5 Explanation of Structure within Drive/Communication Module More specific and detailed structural examples within the drive/communication module 1470 outlined in FIG. 4C are shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D. When the externally controllable drive/communication module 1470 is used as part of the circuit (in-circuit component) in the device 1250, the circuit component function is "ON/OFF switch", "predetermined voltage output", or "variable voltage output". In many cases, the function ``resistance value'' is used. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned standard functions (most often used in the circuit) are provided in the specific device 1250 as modules. As a result, the compatible device 1250 is characterized by lower cost and improved ease of assembly. Among the functions mentioned above as an example, FIG. 6A shows the internal structure of the drive/communication module 1470 that provides the "variable resistance value" function, and the internal structure of the drive/communication module 1470 that provides the "ON/OFF switch" function. The structure is shown in FIG. 6B, and the internal structure of the drive/communication module 1470 that provides the "predetermined voltage output" function is shown in FIG. 6C. Among these, an input terminal 1602 and an output terminal 1604 are required to provide the "variable resistance value" function and the "ON/OFF switch" function. FIG. 6A shows a structure in which a variable resistance section 1610 is disposed between both terminals so that variable resistance values between the two companies can be set. On the other hand, in FIG. 6B, a conduction/disconnection switching section 1614 is installed between both terminals to configure an ON/OFF switch between them. As a specific circuit element of the variable resistance section 1610 and the conduction/disconnection switching section 1614, a CMOS (Complementary Metal-oxide-Semiconductor) type FET (Field-effect Transistor) element may be used. Here, the gamma characteristic (the resistance value characteristic between the input terminal 1602 and the output terminal 1604 with respect to the input voltage applied to the variable resistance section 1610 or the conduction/disconnection switching section 1614) is smooth (even if the applied input voltage value is changed greatly). An element with a steep gamma characteristic (an element whose resistance value changes slowly) is used for the variable resistance section 1610, and an element whose resistance value changes from a conductive state where the resistance value is close to "0" with a slight change in input voltage around a predetermined threshold value. An element in which the current value changes rapidly to a "very large" disconnected state) can be used in the conduction/disconnection switching section 1614. However, in this embodiment, the circuit element is not limited to the above-mentioned CMOS type FET element, but any circuit element that provides a function of providing a variable resistance value or an ON/OFF switch function through some kind of control may be used. On the other hand, the terminal that outputs the "predetermined voltage" may be a single voltage output terminal 1606, as shown in FIG. 6C. The output voltage output from this terminal is connected to the output of a predetermined voltage generator 1618 in the drive module 1670. In this embodiment, as a specific example of a circuit inside this predetermined voltage generation section 1618, a ground line (earth line ), and extracts the intermediate voltage from a variable resistor connected between the A method is adopted in which the system is maintained using a circuit (circuit). However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and any method or circuit capable of generating and maintaining a predetermined voltage may be used.

In all of FIGS. 6A to 6C, the set values are provided from a communication module 1660 located outside the drive module 1670. A feature of this embodiment is that a storage portion for setting values is provided internally so that the setting values do not change even if the drive/communication module 1470 is powered off. The locations corresponding to this storage portion are the set resistance value storage section 1620 in FIG. 6A, the set state storage section 1624 in FIG. 6B, and the set voltage storage section 1628 in FIG. 6C. All of these are configured with nonvolatile semiconductor memories such as NAND (Not And) memories, for example. However, the storage section is not limited to this, and the storage section may be formed of any nonvolatile memory. In other words, in any of FIGS. 6A to 6C, the set value notified from the communication module 1660 is once notified to the set resistance value storage section 1620, the set state storage section 1624, and the set voltage storage section 1628, and is stored in those storage sections in a non-volatile manner. is memorized. At the same time, the stored setting values are output from those storage sections to control the operation of variable resistance section 1610, conduction/disconnection switching section 1614, or predetermined voltage generation section 1618.

By the way, when drive modules 1270-1 and 1270-6 are used to control or change the setting state of devices 1_1250-1 and 5_1250-5 in FIG. Alternatively, an extended form of the existing remote control using infrared communication may be adopted. In other words, the drive module 1270-1 and the communication module 1202-4 in the device 1_1250-1 constitute a drive/communication module 1470 (a type of composite module 1295), and the drive/communication module 1470 (a type of composite module 1295) is used as a “new type remote control” to connect the device 1_1250-1 to an external remote control. It can be placed in any position. Similarly, the drive module 1270-5 and part of the communication module 1202-10 in the device 5_1250-5 constitute a drive/communication module 1470 (a type of composite module 1295), and the device 5_1250-5 is used as a "new type remote control". It may also be possible to arrange it at a remote location outside of 5. As a concrete example, this "new remote control" may be used as an extension (replacement product) of the conventional remote control that uses infrared communication that comes with air conditioners, televisions, lighting equipment, etc.

The internal structure of drive/communication module 1470 adapted to this usage method is shown in FIG. 6D. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 6D, both control of transition between binary states such as "ON/OFF switching" (change of state settings) and control of "change of detailed state settings using multi-value information" are performed. This makes it possible to respond to Further, control of transition between binary states (change of state settings) from the communication module 1660 that has received communication information exchanged within the network system α_1132 is stored or updated in the setting state storage unit 1624. On the other hand, control information related to "detailed state setting changes using multi-value information" sent from the communication module 1660 is stored or updated in the set voltage storage section 1628.

The information stored or updated in the setting state storage section 1624 and the setting voltage storage section 1628 is format-converted by the format conversion section 1644, and then emitted by the infrared light emitting element 1608 via the infrared light emission drive circuit 1648. , reaches the remote control compatible infrared receiver in device 1_1250-1 or 5_1250-5. Accordingly, the existing infrared communication remote control can be replaced with the drive/communication module 1470 shown in FIG. 6D without replacing the main body of many existing devices 1_1250-1 or 5_1250-5 such as air conditioners, televisions, and lighting equipment. This has the effect of allowing the existing device 1250 to be easily and inexpensively incorporated into the network system α_1132.

Here, the minimum required functions required for existing remote controllers do not necessarily need to store the state when controlling the device 1250. However, since the setting state storage section 1624 and the setting voltage storage section 1628 are built into the drive module 1670 in the drive/communication module 1460, there is an effect that the system controller α_1126 can check the control history later via the communication module 1660. . Note that a NAND (Not And) memory or other nonvolatile memory may be used for the setting state storage section 1624 and the setting voltage storage section 1628 as described above.

Here, as the communication information transmitted between the system controller α_1126 and the drive/communication module 1470, the C-format, which will be described in detail later in Chapter 2, may be used. A method of transferring communication information exchanged with the system controller α_1126 of FIG. 2 within the drive/communication module 1470 based on the C-format will be described below. However, the information communication processing with the system controller α_1126 may be performed in A-format, E-format, or any other format.

First, when issuing a command (issuing a command) from the system controller α_1126 to an existing device 1250 to start operation (turn on the power), the system controller α_1126 sends communication information ( The communication access control information 1830 in FIG. 14(d) is set to [111] (reset instruction), the multilevel transmission data section CTMDT is set to [0000], and the value of the binary transmission data section CT2DT is set to [1] ( ON). When the communication module 1660 receives the information, the information [1] (power ON) is transferred/stored in the setting state storage section 1624 in the drive module 1670. Further, the information passes through the setting state storage section 1624 and is notified to the format conversion section 1644, where it is converted into information indicating power ON of the existing remote control. The converted information is then transferred to the infrared light emitting drive circuit 1648, and the light emission of the infrared light emitting element 1608 is controlled. The converted information is then transmitted to the existing device 1250, and the device 1250 is turned on.

By the way, in the C-format shown in FIG. 14(d), it is also possible to change and set (reset) multi-valued information corresponding to, for example, changing the set temperature of an air conditioner or changing the illuminance of lighting equipment. In this case, the communication access control information 1830 in the communication information (FIG. 14(d)) from the system controller α_1126 to the drive/communication module 1470 is set to [111] (reset instruction), and the multilevel transmission data section CTMDT is set to [111] (reset instruction). 0000]. In this case, in the combined 5-bit information of the multilevel transmission data section CTMDT and the binary transmission data section CT2DT, values between 0% and 100% are assigned to values [00010] to [11111], respectively. When communication module 1660 then receives the information, the changed settings are converted into percentages. The information after the percentage conversion is then transferred/stored in the set voltage storage section 1628. Further, the information passes through the setting voltage storage section 1628 and is notified to the format conversion section 1644, where it is converted into information indicating a state setting change value in the existing remote control. The converted information then operates the infrared light emitting drive circuit 1648 to control the light emission of the infrared light emitting element 1608, and the setting state of the existing device 1250 is changed.

Next, a method for confirming the state already set in the drive/communication module 1470 by the system controller α_1126 will be described. In this case, communication information with communication access control information 1830 set to [011] (response (data) request) is first communicated from system controller α_1126 to drive/communication module 1470. When the communication module 1660 in FIG. 6D receives a response (data) request from the system controller α_1126, it reads information already stored in the setting state storage unit 1624 and the setting voltage storage unit 1628. The result is then set in the binary transmission data section CT2DT or the multilevel transmission data section CTMDT in FIG. 14(d). Here, the communication access control information 1830 in the communication information communicated from the drive/communication module 1470 to the system controller α_1126 is set to [010] (response answer).

Considering the ease of explaining the operation of the drive/communication module 1470 in this embodiment, the operation of the drive/communication module 1470 has been disclosed in the form of hardware (electrical circuit). However, the invention is not limited thereto, and in the system of this embodiment, the drive/communication module 1470 may be formed as a software module. However, even when the drive/communication module 1470 is formed of a software module in this way, the input/output terminals 1602, 1604, the voltage output terminal 1606, or the infrared light emitting element 1608 as shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D are installed. Below is an explanation of how to use the software module. As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the communication modules 1202-4 to 10 in FIG. 2 and the communication module 1660 in FIGS. 6A to 6D have built-in processors 1960 and 1736, and perform communication control processing according to a predetermined communication control program. It is carried out. Any program language executable within the processors 1960 and 1736 corresponds to this communication control program.

Hereinafter, the entire communication control program will be referred to as a "main program", and a predetermined set of small programs called from this main program will be referred to as a "subprogram module". However, the explanation is not limited thereto, and will also include terms used in Java, taking into consideration Java (registered trademark) scripts that do not depend on the OS (Operation System) or Java applets that are compatible with HTML/HTML5. In the main program (Class) that causes the processor built in the communication module 1660 in FIGS. 6A to 6D to process, processing is performed according to a subprogram module (predetermined method) corresponding to the drive module 1670. is executed. Within this subprogram module (predetermined method), corresponding processing for the input/output terminals 1602 and 1604 or the voltage output terminal 1606 is executed based on the setting values set in advance in the subprogram module (predetermined method (Method)). be done. When a setting change command is notified (command issued) from the system controller α_1126 in FIG. Calls a subprogram module (separate method) to perform setting value change processing. Thereafter, corresponding processing for the input/output terminals 1602, 1604 or the voltage output terminal 1606 is executed based on the changed setting value.

By the way, in the above description, the drive/communication module 1470 included in one type of the composite module 1295 was explained as an example. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and any composite module 1295 such as the sensor/communication module 1460, processor/communication module 1465, memory/communication module 1475, etc. may be realized by the above-mentioned software module.

Further, although the description in FIGS. 6A to 6D is omitted for simplicity of explanation, a (solar) power generation module 1552 is included in the drive/communication module 1470 shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D as in FIG. 5. An energy conversion means such as, a power storage module (battery) 1554, and a near-field communication module 1560 may be incorporated.

Section 1.6 Explanation of Example of Structure Inside Communication Module FIGS. 7A and 7B show examples of the structure inside the communication module 1660 externally attached to the antenna 1480 that constitute the composite module shown in FIGS. 4A to 4F. Note that in the structure examples of the communication module 1666 with a built-in antenna and the communication module 1752 with a built-in antenna in FIGS. An antenna 1480 is built-in.

By the way, the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) in FIG. 2, the device controllers 1240-1 and 1240-3 in device 1_1250-1 or device 5_1250-5, and the composite modules 1_1295-1 and 7_1295-7 that exist independently A major feature of this embodiment is that it has a structure in which the same communication module 1660 can be used in common. In this way, by sharing the communication module 1660 with the same structure among many constituent members (system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) and unit 1290) in the same network system α_1132, the communication module 1660 can be It has the effect of lowering the cost.

As a specific method for realizing the above feature, the communication module 1660 is provided with a function that is common to all the composite modules 1295 shown in FIGS. 4B to 4F. Here, the functions common to all the composite modules 1295 shown in FIGS. 4B to 4F are: 1) Supporting a common communication protocol used within the same network system α_1132 2) Related to other functions other than the communication function Two points can be raised: responding to information communication of all kinds of information. By the way, as explained in Sections 1.2 and 1.3, in the unit 1290 and the composite module 1295, the communication module 1660 is always connected to other functional modules having functions other than communication. functions are important.

The communication module 1660 has the functions to realize the above [1] and [2]. Specifically, the function [1] above is mainly realized by the communication control unit 1700 in FIG. 7A. Further, the function [2] above is mainly realized within the interface unit 1710 in FIG. 7A. In FIG. 7A, for ease of understanding, the areas are shown as communication control unit 1700/interface unit 1710 for each function. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and circuits that implement the above two points may be mixed together, or the same circuit may share some functions.

In addition, as a method for making the communication module 1660 versatile so that it can be shared by many composite modules 1295, this embodiment also features features in the structure of the interface section (I/F section) between it and other functional modules 1440. It is made to have. Specifically, the connection section between the other function module 1440 is separated into the content information I/F section 1950 and the address information I/F section 1940, and the connection method is determined depending on the type of the other function module 1440 to be connected. It is variable. This improves the versatility with respect to many types of other functional modules 1440, and produces the effect that it can be applied to multi-purpose (various) composite modules 1295.

The above features will be explained in detail below. When the composite module 1295 takes the form of the single-function sensor/communication module 1460 shown in FIGS. 4B and 5, or the single-function drive/communication module 1670 shown in FIGS. 4C and 6A to 6D, the composite module If only the address information specific to 1295 and the address information of system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) are stored, information communication within network system α_1132 is established. Therefore, when connecting only one sensor module 1260 (FIG. 4B) or only one drive module 1670 (FIG. 4C) as the other function module 1440 (FIG. 4A), the address information I/F section 1940 of FIG. is not used.

On the other hand, when used in the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) as a part of the processor/communication module 1465 as shown in FIG. 4D, the unit 1290 ( Alternatively, the address information differs for each composite module 1295). Therefore, the address information of the communication partner is notified from the processors 1230 and 1734 in FIG. 4D to the corresponding communication module 1752 in the same system via the bus line 1490. At this time, the address information I/F section 1940 is used as the address information transmission means (information transmission input/output terminal).

In addition, when used in the memory/communication module 1475 as shown in FIG. It must be specified from the corresponding communication module 1752 within the same system via line 1490. In this way, in the processor/communication module 1465 shown in FIG. 4D and the memory/communication module 1475 shown in FIG. 4E, both the content information I/F unit 1950 and the address information I/F unit 1940 in FIG. connected to.

On the other hand, at the end of Section 1.3, a method of connecting to a plurality of other functional modules using a common bus line instead of the one shown in FIG. 4F was explained. In this case, a part of the address information I/F section 1940 specifies the corresponding address of another functional module that is directly connected to the communication module 1660. This allows time-varying switching of other functional modules directly connected to the communication module 1660.

When wireless is used as a communication medium for network communication within the network system α_1132, a current flows through the antenna 1480 on the transmitting side to transmit radio waves, and on the receiving side, the current flows through the antenna 1480. Detects signals by detecting weak currents. Both current supply and signal detection corresponding to the antenna 1480 are performed within the information communication execution unit 3016.

On the other hand, communication information exchanged from the information communication execution unit 3016 to another communication module 1660 via the antenna 1480 has the structure shown in FIG. 11(a). (A detailed explanation regarding the communication information shown in FIG. 11 will be described later in Section 2.2.) Among them, the communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) shown in FIG. 11(b) is the interface of FIG. The information is processed within section 1710. That is, the communication middleware data APLDT (and extended data EXDT) is analyzed within the content extraction section 1938, and necessary information is transmitted to the other functional module 1440 via the content information I/F section 1950. As a specific example, if the communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) in FIG. The contents of the content are decoded in the content extracting section 1938, and the decoding result is notified to the driving module 1670 via the content information I/F section 1950. Then, the operation (or state setting change) of the drive module 1670 is started in response to the content of the notification.

Information input from the other functional module 1440 via the content information I/F section 1950 is format-converted within the content setting section 1934 to generate communication middleware data APLDT (and extended data EXDT). As a specific example, when the content information I/F 1950 is connected to the sensor module 1260, the sensor information obtained in the sensor module 1260 is converted into communication middleware data APLDT (and extended data EXDT) in the content setting unit 1934. be done. The communication information is then communicated to the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) via the information communication execution unit 3016 and the antenna 1480.

The information in FIGS. 11(c) to 11(f) within the structure in FIG. 11(a) is processed within the communication control unit 1700 in FIG. 7A. That is, the physical layer frame generation unit 1914 generates the information shown in FIGS. 11(c) to 11(f), combines it with the information shown in FIG. 11(b) generated in the content setting unit 1934, and sends the information to the information communication execution unit. 3016, and the communication information is transmitted. On the other hand, when receiving communication information, the physical layer frame analysis unit 1918 analyzes the communication information having the structure shown in FIG. 11(a), and the extracted information shown in FIG. Sent.

Further, if the address information I/F section 1940 is connected at the time of transmission, the address information of the destination party is notified via the address information I/F section 1940. Then, address information conforming to the format shown in FIG. 11(a) is generated within the address information generating section 1924, and communication information shown in FIG. 11(a) is generated within the physical layer frame generating section 1914.

If the address information I/F unit 1940 is connected at the time of reception, the information shown in FIGS. 11(c) to 11(f) is selected in the physical layer frame analysis unit 1918, and the information in will be forwarded to. Then, only predetermined address information is extracted within the address information extraction section 1928 and passed to the address information I/F section 1940.

When this communication module 1660 is used within a single-function sensor/communication module 1460, instead of using the address information I/F unit 1940, the address information generation unit 1924 uses the system controller α_1126 (system The address information of the controller β_1128) is stored in advance. As a result, sense information can be automatically communicated to system controller α_1126 (system controller β_1128).

Furthermore, when this communication module 1660 is used within the single-function drive/communication module 1470, instead of using the address information I/F section 1940, its own address information is stored in advance in the address information extraction section 1928. I remember it. That is, all of the wireless information detected within the information communication execution section 3016 is transferred to the content extraction section 1938 and the address information extraction section 1928 via the physical layer frame analysis section 1918 with corresponding information. Then, it is sequentially determined whether the receiving side address information extracted within this address information extraction unit 1928 matches its own address information. Here, if the receiving side address information does not match the own address information, the information temporarily stored in the content extraction unit 1938 is appropriately discarded. Then, only when the recipient address information matches its own address information, it is determined that the communication information is for the corresponding composite module 1295, and the information temporarily stored in the content extraction unit 1938 is transferred to the content information I/F 1950. .

The series of processes described above are controlled by processor 1960. By the way, although the connection line of the processor 1960 is omitted in FIG. 7A, the wiring shown in FIG. 7B may be used in which the processor 1736 is directly connected to the bus line BUS, or the processor 1960 and each part may be directly connected individually. .

Another embodiment within communication module 1660 is shown in FIG. 7B. A major feature of FIG. 7B is that a memory section 1790 is built into the communication module 1660. As a result, when the unit 1290 incorporating the communication module 1660 is moved into another system (for example, when moved from system α_1132 to system β_1134), it is possible to seamlessly adapt it to a different system. to be born.

The external module connection section 1778 in FIG. 7B corresponds to the content information I/F section 1950 and address information I/F section 1940 in FIG. 7A. Further, the signal processing section 1780 in FIG. 7B corresponds to the content extraction section 1938 and the content setting section 1934 in FIG. 7A. Furthermore, the signal processing unit 1780 in FIG. 7B may further include the address information extraction unit 1928 and address information generation unit 1924 in FIG. 7A, and may further include the information communication execution unit 3016 and the physical layer frame analysis 1918 and the physical layer frame generation section 1914 may also be included.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the communication module 1660 shown in FIG. 7B is used by being attached to, embedded in, glued to, or attached to the other functional module 1440 having functions other than communication. A composite module 1295 is constructed by attaching, embedding, gluing, or mounting the communication module 1660. As shown in FIG. 3A(b) or (c), a unit 1290 including this composite module 1295 is configured. This unit 1290 can take various forms such as parts, products, merchandise, devices, materials, and merchandise. Therefore, the communication module 1660 is used by attaching, embedding, gluing, or attaching it to any part, product, product, device, material, product, etc. (unit 1290) to be integrated.

Specifically, the communication module 1660 described above has various functional blocks constructed using integration technology on an insulating substrate 1660-1. The communication module 1660 includes an antenna connection section 1774 for connecting an antenna ANT_1772 for transmitting and receiving radio waves 1770. Here, the antenna ANT_1772 may be configured on the insulating substrate 1660-1 of the communication module 1660. The communication module 1660 is provided with an external module connection section 1778, and can be connected to, for example, a plurality of other functional modules 1766-1, 1766-2, . . . 1766-n via this external module connection section 1778. . Examples of the other functional modules 1766-1, 1766-2, .

There are various sensors as the sensor module 1260 used in the other functional modules 1766-1-1766-n. Sensors include temperature detection, humidity detection, pressure detection, strain detection, water quality detection (those that use scientific reactions, those that use filtration, etc.), gas detection (those that use scientific reactions), light and dark detection, and There are sensors that detect sound waves, colors, pulses, etc., and one or more of them are selectively set depending on the environment in which the communication module 1660 is used. Also, depending on the order, different types of sensors may be combined and prepared. Some sensors are connected to external module connections 1778 via wireless (radio waves, infrared, ultrasound, etc.).

Further, specific forms of the drive module 1670 used in the other functional modules 1766-1-1766-n include an electrical switch, a mechanical switch, a light emitting body, a heating element, a displacement object (shape memory medium), and an elastic body (rubber). ) etc. are selected arbitrarily depending on the purpose of use.

Here, one or more of the other functional modules 1766-1, 1766-2, . . . 1766-n may be configured on the insulating substrate 1660-1. Additionally, some other functional modules may optionally be additionally connected via the external module connection section 1778.

The communication module 1660 also includes a power supply section 1776 and can be connected to a power source via the power supply section 1776. The power source may be located remotely from the communication module 1660. Further, a power supply mounting portion may be provided on the insulating substrate 1660-1, and the power supply may be integrated with the communication module 1660.

By the way, various methods described below are possible for storing power in a power source (not shown). One example of this method is a method in which a storage section is charged with current from a power generation element that generates electricity using sunlight. This method corresponds to the combination of the (solar) power generation module 1552 and the power storage module (battery) 1554 in FIG. 5. As another method, there is a method in which a current induced in a coil due to the influence of electromagnetic waves is charged to a power storage unit. This method corresponds to the combination of near-field communication module 1560 and power storage module (battery) 1554 in FIG. 5. Furthermore, there is a method in which mechanical vibration is applied to the piezoelectric element, thereby converting the voltage generated in the piezoelectric element into a current and charging the power storage unit. As the mechanical vibration, for example, pressure and vibration caused by sound, pressure and vibration caused by gas (wind, gas, etc.), pressure and vibration caused by liquid (water, oil), etc. can be selectively used. Depending on the environment in which the communication module 1660 is used, one method or a combination of a plurality of methods is selected.

The antenna connection section 1774, external module connection section 1778, and power supply section are connected to a signal processing section 1780. Inside the communication module 1660, a processor 1736, a memory section 1790, and a signal processing section 1780 are connected via a bus BUS so that they can communicate with each other. Here, the processor 1736 controls the overall operation of the communication module 1660 based on the application stored in the application storage section 1792 of the memory section 1790.

The processor 1736 and signal processing unit 1780 operate based on the application, take in output from the sensor module 1260, output control signals to the drive module 1670 and display module 1226, perform cooperative control processing with the processor module 1666, and perform memory It executes processing for inputting and outputting recorded information to the module 1690, supplying a transmission signal to the antenna ANT_1772, taking in a received signal from the antenna ANT_, processing for writing data to the memory section 1790, processing for reading data from the memory section 1790, and the like.

The inside of the memory section 1790 includes an application change software storage section 1791 and a security target data storage section 1799. Furthermore, the inside of the memory section 1790 includes a drive module management data storage section 1792, a sensor module management data storage section 1796, a self-attribute data storage section 1793, a life management data storage section 1794, and an operating period management data storage section 1795.

A drive module management data storage section 1792 inside the memory section 1790 stores management data of the drive module 1670 connected via the external module connection section 1778. Further, the sensor module management data storage section 1796 stores management data of the sensor module 1260 connected via the external module connection section 1778.

For example, the communication module 1660 may be inspected at the time of inspection or at the time of factory shipment. When an inspection device (not shown) gives a predetermined command to the communication module 1660 via the antenna ANT_1772 during inspection, the management data of the drive module 1670 stored in the drive module management data storage section 1792 and/or Alternatively, the management data of the sensor module 1260 stored in the sensor module management data storage section 1796 is read. The read management data is transmitted to the inspection device via the antenna ANT_1772. This allows the inspection device to know the sensing ability and driving ability of the communication module 1660.

Although not shown in FIG. 7B, a processor module management data storage section that stores management data of the processor module 1680 inside the memory section 1790, a memory module management data storage section that stores management data of the memory module 1690, Alternatively, a display module management data storage section that stores management data of the display module 1226 may be set.

In the system of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of different systems (system α_1132 and system β_1134) are formed within the same domain 2_1122-2. Similarly, one or more systems (often multiple systems) are formed in each of domain 1_1122-1 and domain 3_1122-3. Furthermore, differences in application target fields and differences in system usage purposes for each system are also allowed, such as for example in the civil sector, social infrastructure sector, and healthcare sector. Even if the composite module 1295 or unit 1290 incorporating the communication module 1660 in FIG. 7B moves across multiple systems with different application fields and purposes, it is possible to operate optimally according to each individual system. There is. That is, when the composite module 1295 or unit 1290 moves between different systems α_1132 and system β_1134 in the same domain 2_1122-2, or between different systems in different domains 1_1122-1, 2_1122-2, 3_1122-3, A major feature of this embodiment is that the operation of the composite module 1295 or unit 1290 is appropriately switched so that it can be optimized according to the field of application and purpose of use of the system α_1132 (or system β_1134) to which the system α_1132 (or system β_1134) belongs. In order to enable this feature, the memory unit 1790 includes an application storage unit 1792, an application change software storage unit (application change software) 1791, a security target data storage unit 1799 or self-attribute data storage unit 1793, and a lifespan management data storage unit. 1794 and an operating period management data storage section 1795. This has the effect that the composite module 1295 or unit 1290 in this embodiment can be used for flexible system adaptability and general purpose use.

As already explained above, the communication modules 1660 and 1202 shown in FIG. 7B are incorporated to form the composite module 1295 (see FIG. 4) or the device 1250 (see FIG. 2) to form the unit 1290 (FIG. 3A). When this unit 1290 is installed, the application storage section 1792, the security target data storage section 1799, the self-attribute data storage section 1793, the life management data storage section 1794, and the operating period management data storage section are stored using wireless radio waves from the outside. Information may be recorded in at least one of the sections 1795 in advance. However, the system controller α_1126 may write the above information during check-in processing or plug-in processing (described later in Section 4.2) that is executed after the user purchases the unit 1290.

The application change software storage section 1791 is used when it is necessary to modify or change the application that controls the operation of the communication module 1660. For example, if the composite module 1295 or unit 1290 that incorporates this communication module 1660 is moved into a system different from the previous one (for example, if it is moved from system β_1134 to system α_1132), the belonging “Plug-in processing” is executed every time the system changes. If the application field or purpose of use is significantly different between the system β_1134 before the move and the system α_1132 after the move, a system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) that manages/controls/operates the system α_1132 after the move Software for executing a new application is sent from the communication module 1202-3 in FIG. 2. Then, software for executing this new application is appropriately stored in the aforementioned application change software storage section (application change software) 1791. Since the processing of the processor 1736 is executed based on the software that executes the new application, when the composite module 1295 or unit 1290 is moved to the system α_1132 whose field of application or purpose of use is completely different, it is optimal for that system α_1132. operations are possible.

Here, the communication module 1660 may request a new application, or an application change command may be given from the outside (eg, system controller α_1126). The application change timing is determined when the communication module 1660 is manufactured and shipped from the factory, when it becomes necessary to switch the operation mode during use, or when the usage environment of the communication module 1660 is changed (system There are many possible cases, such as movement between α_1132 and β_1134), or when the period of use of the communication module 1660 has expired. By providing the application change software storage section (application change software) 1791 inside the memory section 1790, the communication module 1660 can freely change, add, or add applications according to the above-mentioned changes in the usage environment or purpose of use. Can be updated.

On the other hand, an application storage section 1792 in the memory section 1790 in FIG. 7B contains common application software that does not depend on system changes. Therefore, even if the composite module 1295 or unit 1290 incorporating the communication module 1660 is moved between different systems, the common application software pre-stored in the application storage section 1792 will be saved/continued to be used without being changed. Ru.

Note that the application software stored in the above application change software storage section (application change software) 1791 and application storage section 1792 is written in a predetermined programming language or script language (including machine language). The application software 3050 may include an API command 3045 (or a predetermined) corresponding to a predetermined OS_3030, as will be described later using FIG. 18B. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be written in Java script, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 19A and 19B, or may be written in machine language or a similar language. Furthermore, it may be written in a web-related language such as HTML (Hyper-text Markup Language) or XML (Extensible Markup Language).

The security target data storage unit 1799 can be used to store highly important personal information, for example. Further, the security target data storage section 1799 may be used as a section for personally storing arbitrary data.

For example, the communication module 1660 may be used in a hospital where the communication module 1660 is embedded in a personal chart holder. In such a case, personal information (name, age, disease name, medical history), etc. may be stored in the security target data storage section 1799. However, the medical record holder is not necessarily used forever and may be discarded. In addition, the medical record holder is not limited to this, and may be replaced with a new medical record holder. In such a case, the security target data in the communication module of the old medical record holder needs to be erased.

Various methods are possible for erasing security target data. For example, the communication module 1660 may not communicate with the system controller α_1126 for a certain period of time or more. In this case, the communication module 1660 is independently determined to have been discarded or replaced, and the security target data is deleted. Furthermore, the system controller α_1126 may actively request the communication module 1660 to erase the security target data. Furthermore, when the sensor module 1260 connected to the communication module 1660 detects a specific atmosphere and/or detection element (for example, pressure, heat, humidity, liquid, etc.), the process of erasing the security target data may be performed. . That is, when the sensor module 1260 detects a specific atmosphere and/or detection element (e.g., pressure, heat, humidity, liquid, etc.), the processor 1736 automatically determines that the environment has changed from the normal environment of use. After the determination, the security target data is erased. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and the security target data deletion process may be executed when various predetermined conditions are satisfied.

On the other hand, for example, when an old medical record holder is replaced with a new medical record holder and it becomes necessary to move the security target data of the old medical record holder to the new medical record holder, the system controller α_1126 controls the inheritance or transfer of the security target data. You can go.

In the self-attribute data storage section 1793, attribute data related to handling of a unit (product, part, material, merchandise, etc.) to which the communication module 1660 is attached, bonded, mounted, or buried is stored. The specific attribute data may include identification data of the corresponding unit (product name, part name, product name, etc.), and identification data such as its manufacturing location and manufacturer.

For example, a composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) including a communication module 1660 may be bonded to or embedded in an aluminum beverage can. After use, aluminum beverage cans are discarded and transported to recycling plants. If the attribute data indicates that the material of the object being glued or buried is aluminum, the beverage cans can be automatically sorted into the aluminum processing department at the recycling plant. . In this case, the entire recycling factory corresponds to the system α_1132, and the sorting device within the recycling factory corresponds to the system controller α_1126. The classification device corresponding to the system controller α_1126 then sends a specific command to the communication module 1660 to read the self-attribute data. Based on the self-attribute data, it is possible to determine what type of beverage can the beverage can is made of.

On the other hand, a composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) including the communication module 1660 may be embedded in a plastic beverage bottle. In this case, the classification device sends a specific command to the communication module 1660 to read the self-attribution data and detect that the beverage can is made of plastic. Thereby, the sorting device can easily and automatically sort the beverage cans to the plastic processing section. By the way, this is not limited to the above example, and any integrated object (part, product, commodity, device, material, (products, etc.) may also be used.

However, when the composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) including the communication module 1660 is moved between different systems, the environment in which it is placed may change. The contents of the self-attribute data may also change progressively in response to changes in the environment. For example, when the beverage can is displayed at a store, the selling price of the beverage can, the display location in the store, or the product category may be stored in the memory unit 1790 as the self-attribute data. In this case, the system controller α_1126 that manages the inside of the store may use the self-attribute data to perform inventory management and settlement processing for customers.

As another example, a case will be described in which a composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) is used as a tag attached to a fish. Fish lifted at sea are transported to the port by fishing boat, purchased by traders at the auction market at the port, transported by car, displayed at supermarkets, and purchased by consumers.

A case will be described in which a temperature sensor and a humidity sensor for quality control are installed as the sensor module 1260 in the tag (composite module 1295/unit 1290) integrated with the fish. At this time, the self-attribute data includes appropriate temperature range data, appropriate humidity range data, and best-before date data. Here, the crew of the fishing boat and the market manager input the self-attribute data.

If the temperature or humidity of the surrounding environment exceeds an appropriate range during transport or storage of fish, the communication module 1660 outputs a first warning signal to the system controller α_1126 installed in the fishing boat or transport truck. I can do it. Also, when the best-before period approaches or the best-before period has passed, the second warning signal and the third warning signal can be outputted via the antenna 1772.

Furthermore, when displayed in a store, selling price, display location in the store, product category, etc. are added as self-attribute data. In this case, the self-attribute data described above is automatically stored in the memory unit 1790 from another system controller α_1126 installed in the store. Using this self-attribute data, inventory management and settlement processing for customers can be performed.

As described above, depending on the movement of the system in which the composite module 1295/unit 1290 is placed (to which it belongs), the system controller α_1126 that manages/controls/operates the system α_1132 automatically adds the self-attribute data 1793 or Another feature of the system of this embodiment is that it can be updated. This has the effect of greatly improving the flexibility and versatility of utilizing the corresponding composite module 1295 and unit 1290. That is, by using the above additionally added/updated self-attribute data, the system controller α_1126 can execute the optimal process for the system α_1132.

Furthermore, the self-attribute data may be used as data for the communication module 1660 to respond to a specific command (request signal) and output a response signal indicating that the communication module 1660 exists. For example, the communication module 1660 may be embedded within a surgical instrument or an aircraft or train service tool. In this case, the work site is regarded as a specific system α_1132, and the system controller α_1126 installed at the work site requests a response from the communication module 1660. Based on the presence or absence of a response at the work site (system α_1132), it becomes clear whether surgical instruments, inspection tools, or other items have been left behind at the work site. In this way, by using information communication processing related to self-attribute data, it is possible to determine whether something is left behind after surgery or inspection.

As an example of using the self-attribute data 1793 other than the above, owner information of the corresponding unit 1290 (or composite module 1295 or device 1250) may be recorded in this area. When the unit 1290 (or composite module 1295 or device 1250) in which this self-attribute data 1793 is recorded is sold, it is displayed at a store as described above. At this time, the displayed store interior corresponds to one system β_1134. When the user purchases the unit 1290 (or composite module 1295 or device 1250), he or she moves it to his or her home. Then, the home of the user who purchased the product corresponds to the system α_1132 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, the system in which this unit 1290 is arranged changes before and after purchasing the unit 1290 (or composite module 1295 or device 1250). When this unit 1290 is placed in the user's home, the system controller α_1126, which manages/operates/collects information within the new system α_1132, performs a check-in process to be described later in Section 4.2. At this time, the system controller α_1126 records user information regarding the owner in part of the self-attribute data 1793. This user information is not limited to the owner's name, but may be any of the user's ID information, user's address information, telephone number information, email address information, etc. Recording the user information recorded as part of the self-attribute data 1793 in this way has the effect of making it easier to find the corresponding unit 1290 when it is left behind outside.

The above-mentioned owner is not limited to the direct owner of the unit 1290. In other words, it includes people, organizations, and companies related to the use of the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295 or the device 1250). It may also be a person, organization, or company related to the use of products, parts, or materials into which the composite module 1295 in which the self-attribute data 1793 is recorded is installed, inserted, or mixed.

As an example, a tablet or powdered medicine into which the composite module 1295 in which the self-attribute data 1793 is recorded is inserted or mixed will be explained. For example, when the above medicine is taken at a hospital, facility, or home, the system controller α_1126 records the name of the person taking the medicine and the date and time of taking the medicine in the self-attribute data 1793. Further, in this self-attribute data 1793, the name of the medicine is also recorded in advance. Then, even when the user who has taken this medicine is away from home, the system controller β_1134 installed at the outside location can manage who took what medicine at what time. Regular medication is very important for people with chronic illnesses, but it is easy to forget. If the system controller β_1134 constantly manages the medication status as described above, there will be an effect that it will be difficult to forget to take the medication.

By recording multiple pieces of mutually related information as self-attribute data 1793 as described above, the effect of making it easier to manage the usage status with high precision in the composite module 1295 (unit 1290) in which the self-attribute data 1793 is recorded is created. .

Life management data for managing the life of the composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) in which the communication module 1660 is incorporated can be stored in the life management data storage section 1794. This lifespan management data indicates the lifespan of the composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) in which the communication module 1660 is built-in. When this lifetime period has elapsed, the communication module 1660 automatically stops operating. This prevents unnecessary radio waves from being emitted after the life span.

For example, for the above-mentioned discarded beverage cans and cooked fish, there is no need to use the corresponding tags (composite module 1295/unit 1290). As described above, by having the lifespan management data storage part 1794 in the memory part 1790 and automatically stopping the activity after the lifespan period, unnecessary radio waves can be prevented from being generated in the system α_1132. By preventing the generation of unnecessary radio waves, the efficiency of information communication within the system α_1132 is improved.

Data for setting the operating period of the communication module 1660 can be stored in the operating period management data storage section 1795. Setting the operating period and sleep period of the communication module 1660 according to the usage environment and usage conditions increases the power saving effect and prevents interference with surrounding devices. As the operating period management data, for example, the operating period and the sleep period can be set in units of hours, or the operating period and the sleep period can be set according to the sensor output.

Section 1.7 Description of the overall structure of the wide area network system in this embodiment The system of this embodiment has already been outlined in Section 1.1. In contrast, in this section, the structure of the entire wide area network system in this embodiment will be explained in detail using FIG. 1. As shown in Figure 1, service provider B_1112-2 obtains products (or information) from wholesaler B1_1104-1 and/or wholesaler B2_1104-2, which handle similar products (or information), and provides services. .

Here, the wholesalers A_1102 and B1/2_1104-1/2 refer to regulatory agencies and organizations that handle predetermined products and information. Specific examples of the above-mentioned institutions and organizations include not only businesses related to private profit-making organizations such as foundations and business corporations, but also public organizations such as national and local governments, public corporations, and public interest corporations. Therefore, the position of the wholesaler from the perspective of service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 is not limited to a ``commercial partner,'' but may also include a ``designated service outsourcee,'' or a ``designated service guidance and licensing partner.'' good. For example, if the wholesaler corresponds to a commercial partner of service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3, the products handled by the wholesaler are not limited to public consumption goods such as electricity, gas, water, and gasoline, but also general consumption goods and currency. , current assets such as bonds and precious metals, and fixed assets such as real estate, as well as information with commercial value that is difficult to obtain on the regular Internet (market research information, specialized for specific individuals or specific regions). (weather information, traffic information, etc. limited to a very narrow area)) may be targeted.

Next, service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 in the system of this embodiment mean organizations or groups that provide predetermined services. In particular, these service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 have the characteristic of performing "integrated management regarding predetermined services." Further, the service provided by the service provider may include all kinds of services using information obtained from the sensor module 1260, which will be described later. In particular, information obtained via the network from sensor modules in domains 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3, which will be described later, and some of its related information are transmitted to server n_1116-n in service provider B_1112-2, and based on the The feature is that the service provider B_1112-2 can provide a predetermined service. In this way, in the system of this embodiment, service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 can perform operations to download products and information from domains 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3. Furthermore, this service provider B_1112-2 owns a plurality of servers 1 to n_1116-1 to n, and manages databases 1118-1 to n for each server 1 to n_1116-1 to n. Further, distributed processing is performed in cooperation among the servers 1 to n_1116-1 to n to speed up the processing. Although not shown in FIG. 1, servers and corresponding databases are similarly installed within service provider A_1112-1 and service provider C_1112-3.

One of the specific activities of the service provider is to distribute products and information wholesaled from wholesaler A_1102 or wholesaler B1/2_1104-1/2 within domains 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 (both inflow and outflow). include) A specific example of this service is shown below.

α] Retail service for end users of products and information handled by wholesaler A_1102 and wholesaler B1/2_1104-1/2 β] Independently sell products and information handled by wholesaler A_1102 and wholesaler B1/2_1104-1/2 Services that are processed and provided to end users using the processing results γ] Provide services that are determined to be optimal based on information obtained from the sensor module δ] Combination of the above [α] to [γ] Here The products handled by service providers are not limited to the retail of public consumption goods such as electricity, gas, water, and gasoline, but may also include the retail of general consumption goods, the retail of current assets and fixed assets, etc. In addition, the information (products) handled is not limited to this, but includes information with commercial value that is difficult to obtain on the regular Internet (market research information, information specialized for a specific individual or region (weather information limited to a very small area), etc.) transportation information, etc.)) may be handled as a product.

On the other hand, service provider A_1112-1 obtains different products (or information) from wholesaler A_1102 than wholesaler B1/2_1104-1/2 and provides a different type of service. Here, service provider A_1112-1 and service provider B_1112-2, or service provider B_1112-2 and service provider C_1112-3 mutually share information or cooperate and accommodate resources 1114 to improve the efficiency and sophistication of services. ing. Furthermore, a predetermined product storage section 1154 is installed in the service provider A_1112-1 to store products obtained from the wholesaler A_1102. The predetermined product generation unit 1152 in the service provider A_1112-1 shown in FIG. information) to create new products (or new information). Although not shown in FIG. 1, a predetermined product storage section 1154 and a predetermined product generation section 1152 are also installed in service provider B_1112-2 and service provider C_1112-3.

The predetermined product generation unit 1152 shown in FIG. 1 means a place that generates unique products with unique added value. A specific example of the production of unique products is the processing of raw materials purchased from wholesaler A_1102. For example, in the manufacturing industry, a product manufacturing factory or the like corresponds to the predetermined product generation section 1152. In addition, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and may correspond to, for example, an electric power plant that has solar cells, wind power generators, thermal power generators, geothermal power generators, etc., or substations and power transmission stations as related peripheral equipment. . Further, the system of the present embodiment is not limited to the above, and other production locations of public consumption materials such as gasoline refineries and water storage facilities can also be made to correspond to the example of the form of the predetermined product generation section 1152. Furthermore, as another product format other than that, the location where "unique information created within service provider A" is generated may correspond to the predetermined product generation section 1152. For example, market trend information, weather forecast information, and the like newly obtained analytical information as a result of analyzing various information published on the Internet correspond to one form of the above-mentioned product.

The predetermined product storage section 1154 shown in FIG. 1 temporarily stores any of the following products (including information).

α] Products and information wholesaled from wholesaler A_1102 or wholesaler B1/2_1104-1/2 β] Products and information generated by the above-mentioned prescribed product generation unit 1152 γ] Products sucked from domains 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 and information δ] A combination of the above [α] to [γ] For example, if the product to be temporarily stored is electricity, the predetermined product storage unit 1154 is a storage battery and a charge/discharge amount monitor unit (smart meter in system α_1132). 1124) and a charge/discharge amount control section. On the other hand, if the product to be temporarily stored is tap water or city gas, it is comprised of a water or gas tank, a storage/release amount monitor section, and a storage/release amount control section.

The side receiving services from the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 described above is the domain 2_1122-2 described later or the system α_1132 therein (details will be described later). The system is such that the fees for providing the services are paid directly to the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3. Here, as shown in FIG. 1, the server n_1116-n in service provider B_1112-2 and the predetermined product storage unit 1154 in service provider A_1112-1 are connected to the smart meter 1124 installed in domain 2_1122-2 and system α_1132. It is directly connected to the network and the system controller α_1126, which will be described later. Further, as indicated by the broken line in FIG. 1, the smart meter 1124 is also network-connected to the wholesaler A_1102, and can directly communicate information. In FIG. 1, the parties to which the measured values of the smart meter 1124 are communicated are the server n_1116-n in the service provider B_1112-2, the system controller α_1126 in the same system α_1132, or the wholesaler A_1102. However, the measurement value of this smart meter 1124 may be communicated and transmitted to the system controller β_1134 that exists in the same domain 2_1122-2 but belongs to a different system β_1134 or to other devices in the same domain 2_1122-2. Also good.

This smart meter 1124 is a device that measures the amount of each (similar) product going in and out between the inside and outside of domain 2_1122-2 (or system α_1126) at predetermined time intervals. do. Mainly refers to the measurement of the amount in and out of public consumption items such as electricity meters, gas meters, water meters, sewage meters, etc., especially the amount that flows from the outside into the inside (or is consumed inside) and the amount that flows out from the inside to the outside. Quantities (eg, sold externally) also have the characteristic of being collectible as measurements. However, in the system of this embodiment, the smart meter 1124 measures not only the amount of public consumption goods mentioned above, but also the amount of general consumption goods purchased through mail order, liquid assets, or specific information, and the results are measured. may be communicated.

In particular, in the system of this embodiment, a communication module 1202-1 is built into the smart meter 1124 (FIG. 8A), and has a function of communicating and transmitting the measured values of the smart meter at predetermined intervals. Furthermore, the time interval for transmitting the communication can be changed as appropriate by the server n_1116-n, the system controller α_1126, the wholesaler A_1102, or the like. Furthermore, the timing of communicating the measured value obtained from the smart meter 1124 is not limited to the predetermined time interval, but may be communicated as appropriate in response to a request from the system controller α_1126, the server n_1116-n, or the wholesaler A_1102. Furthermore, the communication is not limited to this, and the communication may be transmitted when the smart meter 1124 spontaneously determines that it is necessary to transmit the communication to the outside.

An example of a service format provided by service provider A 1102 using this smart meter 1124 will be described below. In this embodiment, the predetermined products and predetermined information stored in advance in the predetermined product storage unit 1154 in the service provider A 1102 are transferred to the domain 2_1122-2 (or within the system α_1132) via the system controller α_1126 or the smart meter 1124. is supplied to Conversely, surplus products remaining in domain 2_1122-2 (or in system α_1132) may be returned to predetermined product storage section 1154 via smart meter 1124. In this case, the difference value between the amount of products supplied from the predetermined product storage unit 1154 into domain 2_1122-2 (or system α_1132) and the amount of products returned to the predetermined product storage unit 1154 via the smart meter 1124 is The service provider A_1112-1 charges a fee for the amount of product used.

In parallel, the products (or information) may be directly received using infrastructure or delivery systems owned or managed by wholesaler A_1102 or wholesaler B1/2_1104-1/2. In other words, according to the broken line connecting wholesaler A_1102 to smart meter 1124 in FIG. You can also receive it directly. In this case, at the same time, the smart meter 1124 sequentially notifies the server n_1116-n in the service provider B_1112-2 of information regarding the content and quantity of the product (or information) supplied within the domain 2_1122-2. Based on the notification information, the service provider B_1112-2 periodically charges the user. Here, there are multiple product supply routes from wholesaler A_1102 to smart meter 1124, which serves as a window for supplying predetermined products within domain 2_1122-2 or system α_1132 (from wholesaler A_1102 to smart meter 1124). The system of this embodiment shown in FIG. 1 is characterized by the existence of the "direct route indicated by the dashed line" and the route via the service provider A_1112-1), thereby making it possible to provide a new unique service based on the service provider A_1112-1. . Note that the unique effects produced by taking advantage of this feature will be explained in detail in Section 5.2.1.

Next, the domain 2_1122-2 or the system α_1132 within the domain 2_1122-2, which can receive services from the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 via the wide area network, will be explained. As shown in FIG. 1, one domain 2_1122-2 is composed of one or more systems α/β_1132/1134, and each system α/β_1132/1134 has a system controller α/β_1126/1128 installed. ing. In addition, the system controllers α/β_1126/1128 or the smart meter 1124 are connected to a network directly or via a server n_1116-n, allowing mutual information communication. The system α_1132 is allowed to be divided into a plurality of sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m (sections will be explained in detail in Chapter 4).

As described above, the system of this embodiment is characterized in that it allows a plurality of different systems (client systems) to coexist at the same time. In other words, if the contents described in FIG. 2 are also taken into account, the system includes a unit 1290 that has a function of acquiring or creating information and communicating, and a system controller α_1126 (and β_1128) that acquires and manages the information from the unit 1290. A composite client system (corresponding to domain 2_1122-2 in FIG. 1) including a plurality of client systems α_1132 (and β_1134) (a plurality of client systems α_1126 and client systems β_1134), wherein the composite client system (domain 2_1122-2) The system controller α_1126 that manages the included client system α_1132 manages a plurality of units 1295-1 to -7 (sections 1_1142-1, 2_1142-1, and section m_1142-m in FIG. 2). It holds information regarding the section to which each unit belongs (section information in FIG. 23).

By the way, the above-mentioned domains 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 mean a network space composed of one system or a plurality of systems that cooperate with each other. In particular, the domain in the system of this embodiment corresponds to "a network space that is the target of various state observations" or "a network space that is the target of predetermined operations or execution or the target of operation execution (related to a specific service)" do. In order to participate and operate within a specific domain, identification information ID (Identification Information) unique to the domain and a unique password may be required. However, if one system α/β_1132/1134 corresponds to a specific area that is physically or geographically close to each other, one domain 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 corresponds to the physical or geographical space. It corresponds to a predetermined area on a network that is managed/used by members of a specific group beyond the network.

Next, the above-mentioned system α_1132 means the smallest network system unit whose internal parts are connected to each other via a network and in which one system controller α_1126 is installed. Further, this network system is managed or operated by the aforementioned system controller α_1126. In particular, one system α_1132 is a specific area that is physically or geographically close to one or more specific users (for example, an area defined within the action range of one or more specific users within a predetermined time). The physical or geographical extent of the area may be located. In addition, one system α_1132 in the system of this embodiment is specifically identified by a PAN (Personal Area Network), LAN (Local Area Network), MAN (Metropolitan Area Network), WAN (Wide Area Network), etc. using predetermined identification information. It can be associated with the specified network unit. For example, IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers) 802.15.4 stipulates the setting of individual identification information PANID (Personal Area Network Identifier) for each PAN. One PAN may be associated with one system in this embodiment. As another specific example, one system may be associated with one home, one car interior, one mobile terminal surrounding space, one work station area, etc.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned system controller α/β_1126/1128 is a device that is installed at least one in one system and controls communication within the network system corresponding to the above-mentioned system α/β_1132/1134, and manages and operates the communication state. refers to As mentioned above, it is also connected to a wide area network outside the system α/β_1132/1134 (the network used for information communication with service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3) via the system controller α/β_1126/1128. There is. The system controller α/β_1126/1128 also collects signals and information obtained from one or more sensor modules (sensor module 1260, which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 8A and 9) within the same system α/β_1132/1134. It has a built-in processor to perform proper processing. Specific examples of system controllers include a PC (Personal Computer), a mobile terminal such as a smart phone, tablet, or mobile phone, a power distribution board with a built-in processor, a refrigerator with a built-in processor, or a TV or recorder that can record or audio only. It is also possible to use a recorder or the like to record the information. Furthermore, a processor may be built into the smart meter 1124 so that the smart meter 1124 itself has the function of the system controller α_1126, or a processor and a communication module (Fig. 8A, A communication module 1202), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 9, may be incorporated and used as a system controller. However, this embodiment is not limited to this, and in this embodiment, any machine with a built-in processor configured with a program for collecting signals and information obtained from sensor modules in the system and providing appropriate services to users is made compatible with the system controller. Also good. Further, one system controller may be configured by physically combining/cooperating a plurality of devices.

In particular, if a remote controller with a built-in processor and communication module is used as a system controller and is temporarily placed on a wall or shelf in a fixed or movable manner, it is possible to use it in unique ways (and effect) is produced. However, in this case, it is necessary to fix or place it in a location where infrared communication is possible with main equipment such as air conditioners, televisions, and lighting equipment. Furthermore, sensor/communication modules related to temperature sensors, wind sensors, short-range human sensors, etc. (described later using Figure 8B) are installed throughout the room, and are connected to the remote controller (system controller α_1126). Enables intra-system α_1132 communication between users. This makes it more efficient for users, such as preferentially and accurately controlling the temperature only in areas where multiple users are in the room, or controlling the display method on naked-eye television so that multiple users can see the display in three dimensions at the same time. can provide good service. This allows you to operate more efficiently than before by simply replacing your existing remote control with one with the system controller function, without having to replace the existing equipment (air conditioners, TVs, lighting equipment, etc.) that has already been installed. The effect of

In conventional technology called M2M (Machine to Machine) or IoT (Internet of Things), a cloud server (equivalent to server n_1116-n in Figure 1) collects all signals and information obtained from sensor modules in each home. However, in many cases, services were provided directly to end users from cloud servers. In this case, the system controller α_1126 had the function of simply relaying the transmission of signals and information on the network as a gateway or router shown in FIG. With such conventional technology, (1) the user's personal information is easily transmitted to the relatively public server n_1116-n, so there is a problem from the perspective of protecting the user's personal information; (2) the system controller α_1126 or There was a problem in that the system as a whole had a vulnerability in that if a problem occurred in the communication line between the smart meter 1124 and the server n_1116-n, the service to the end user would be disrupted. In this embodiment, the system controller α_1126 functions not only as a gateway or router for transmitting and relaying signals and information on the network, but also for determining, integrating, and processing signals and information collected from sensor modules by a built-in processor. Its distinctive feature is that it performs specific processing, including unique services for the underlying users. Therefore, in this embodiment (1)
Since the system controller α_1126 independently determines whether or not to send individual signals or information to the server n_1116-n, the protection of the user's personal information is maintained. (2) Based on the signals and information collected from the sensor module, the system It is possible to provide a unique service to the user based on the judgment of the controller α_1126, and since this service can be executed regardless of whether there is a communication line problem with the server n_1116-n, the robustness of the entire system is improved. In particular, the system controller α_1126 in this embodiment integrates information obtained from the sensor module 1260 to determine the user's behavior (the presence or absence of the user, behavior such as sleep/wakefulness) and the situation (for example, whether the user is a child or an adult). The feature is that it has the ability to judge/estimate and even estimate the user's request. As a result, even in the absence of server n_1116-n, it is possible to independently provide comfortable services to users within domain 2_1122-2.

Further, the system of this embodiment has a major feature in that a plurality of system controllers α/β_1126/8 can perform cooperative work within the same domain 2_1122-2. Therefore, one system controller α_1126 can collect signals and information obtained from all sensor modules existing in the same domain 2_1122-2 (including sensor modules located in system β_1134, although not shown). It is possible. As a result, the system controller α_1126 can provide the user with the optimal service within the system α_1132 by making integrated use of information within the same domain 2_1122-2.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the system of this embodiment, the system controllers α/β_1126/8 utilize wireless communication, etc., to emphasize work between the multiple system controllers α/β_1126/8 within the same domain 2_1122-2. There are two network paths: one is a network path where information is exchanged directly between the system controllers α/β_1126/8, and the other is a network path where information is exchanged indirectly between the system controllers α/β_1126/8 via the server n_1116-n using the Internet route, for example. has characteristics. This creates the effect that users can receive a variety of services. For example, if the system controller α_1126, which is a home PC, and the system controller β_1128, which corresponds to a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or tablet, are physically close to each other, it is possible to ), information can be exchanged quickly. On the other hand, using an Internet line, including wired lines, has the effect of guaranteeing mutual information exchange no matter how far apart the two parties are physically. On the other hand, by directly exchanging information between the two parties, a unique and private service can be obtained without involving the server n_1116-n, so personal confidential information may be leaked to the relatively public server n_1116-n. Can prevent danger. On the other hand, server n_1116-n can obtain information that cannot be obtained within domain 2_1122-2, such as local weather forecast information and traffic congestion information, by using another network route. Therefore, by indirectly exchanging information between the system controllers α/β_1126/8 via the server n_1116-n, it is possible to provide users with a variety of services that utilize information unique to the server n_1116-n. By appropriately switching the network communication path in this way, it is possible to provide a wider variety of services desired by the user. As mentioned above, since the system controller α_1126 itself can estimate the user's behavior and state or estimate the user's desires/requirements, the connection path between the system controllers α/β_1126/8 can be switched based on the system controller α_1126's own judgment. .

Section 1.8 Description of local network system structure in this embodiment Section 1.1 has already explained the structure within the local network system configured within system α_1132 included in domain 2_1122-2 described in FIG. An example has been outlined using FIG. In this Section 1.8, application examples of the system of the embodiment other than that shown in FIG. 2 will be explained using FIGS. 8A to 9.

Each device 1250-1 to 1250-3 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8A has a built-in communication module 1202-4 to 1202-6, and can communicate information within the same system α_1132. Further, sensor modules 1260-1 to 5 or actuator module 1270-1 are built in devices 1250-1 to 3. In contrast, in FIG. 8B, the related states between communication modules 1202-4 to 6 and sensor modules 1260-1 to 5 are grasped or managed using the concept of sensor/communication modules 1460-1 to 1460-5. Similarly, the related state between the communication module 1202 and the drive module 1270 is grasped or managed using the concept of drive/communication modules 1470-1 and 1470-2. In addition, as explained in Section 1.3, it is not limited to this, and as explained in Section 1.3, it is managed in an integrated manner based on the concept of composite module 1295, which collectively includes concepts such as processor/communication module 1465, memory/communication module 1475, and display/communication module 1478. Ru. However, one composite module may exist alone, like the sensor/communication module 1460-5 in FIG. 8B.

In the system of this embodiment, the usage amount (or cumulative amount) of public consumption materials such as electricity, gas, water supply/sewerage, etc. used in total within one system (for example, within system α_1132) is automatically measured every predetermined time, A smart meter 1124 is installed that automatically transmits the measurement data periodically. In reality, different smart meters 1124 are installed for each public consumption product such as electricity, gas, water supply/sewerage, etc., but only one smart meter 1124 is shown as a representative in FIGS. 8A/B. Furthermore, the method is not limited to the above, and the usage amount (or cumulative amount) of the public consumption materials for each section 1_1142-1 and 2_1142-2, which will be described later, may be automatically measured/transmitted.

As shown in FIGS. 8A and 9, the detailed structure of the smart meter 1124 includes a discharge amount monitor section 1206 (for example, an electricity sales amount measurement section) installed separately from an inflow amount monitor section 1208 (for example, an electricity purchase amount measurement section). ing. Then, using this discharge amount monitoring unit 1206, the amount of surplus public consumption goods released (power sold) to the wholesaler A_1102 within the system α_1132 is measured. Each measured value (or integrated value) obtained within the smart meter 1124 is periodically reported to the server n_1116-n via the communication module 1202-1. At the same time, it is also reported to wholesaler A_1102.

The communication module 1202 shown in FIG. 8A or FIG. 9 indicates a communication function unit capable of communicating information using wired or wireless communication. The wired communication supported by this communication function unit includes all communication methods, from local video signal transmission lines and audio signal transmission lines to telephone lines and Ethernet (registered trademark) communication related to the Internet. It's okay to be involved. In addition, the wireless communication supported by the communication function unit includes short-range wireless systems such as ZigBee (registered trademark), Bluetooth (registered trademark), UWB (Ultra Wide Band), and Z-Wave, Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity), Medium-range wireless systems such as EnOcean, 2G/PDC, GSM (registered trademark) (Second Generation / Personal Digital Cellular, Global System for Mobile Communications), 3G/CDMA (Third Generation / Code Division Multiple Access), WiMAX (World wide Interoperability) Any long-distance wireless communication method such as (for Microwave Access) may be involved.

In particular, the system of this embodiment has the function of executing the minimum necessary process processing within the communication modules 1202 and 1660, as will be described later using FIG. 10A. As a result, processing and execution of communication protocols (communication information) having the structures shown in FIGS. 11 to 15B as described later in Chapter 2 are processed within the communication modules 1202 and 1660. As this process processing, for example, process processing based on a general-purpose basic (standard) application such as a Java script that does not require a specific OS may be supported. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include process processing compatible with ECMA Script, a decoding function of HTML (Hyper-text Markup Language) or HTML5, or execution of a Java applet compatible with it. Furthermore, in addition to the existing general-purpose script described above, an original process method may be adopted.

In FIGS. 8A and 9, the communication module 1202 is commonly built in the system controller α_1126, the smart meter 1124, and various devices 1250, so that they can communicate information with each other. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 9, a sensor module 1260 or an actuator module 1270 is built into the various devices 1250.

In the system of this embodiment shown in FIG. 8A, a plurality of devices (Devices) 1250-1 to 3 installed in the same system α_1132 are connected via built-in communication modules 1202-4 to 6 and communication module 1202-3, respectively. and communicates information with system controller α_1126. Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, devices 1250-2 to 3 that incorporate only one or more (plural) sensor modules 1260-3 to 5, and one or more (plural) sensor modules 1260-1 to 2 are driven. The existence of a device 1250-1 that incorporates both the module 1270-1 and a device 1250 that incorporates only the drive module 1270 (not shown) is allowed. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8A, a device 1250- that has a built-in device controller 1240-1 and a memory section 1242 that can sequentially store/manage history information regarding sensor modules 1260-1 and 1260-2 and drive module 1270-1 1 and devices 1250-2 and 1250-3 that do not own them can be arranged together.

By the way, similarly to the service provider A_1112-1 explained in Section 1.7 with reference to FIG. It becomes possible to secure and temporarily retain the surplus of the above public consumption goods. FIGS. 8A/B show an example of the use of a (car) battery 1220 as an example of a function corresponding to the predetermined product storage section 1154. However, the system of this embodiment is not limited thereto, and any device having the function of the predetermined product generation section 1152 or the predetermined product storage section 1154 may be installed in the system α_1132. For example, a battery center or a water storage tank (storage equipment) may be installed in each building or region to temporarily store surplus public consumption materials generated within the building or region.

In FIGS. 8A/B, a usage example of the (car) battery 1220 will be described as a specific example for convenience. Further, here, one vehicle interior space is made to correspond to one section 1_1142-1, which will be described later. Therefore, all kinds of information detected inside the car (for example, gasoline consumption, engine speed, temperature inside the car, human body information of each passenger, etc.) is detected by the sensor module 1222, and the results are sent to the communication module 1202-2. The information is transmitted to the system controller α_1126 via the . Similarly, in this section 1_1142-1 (inside the car), there is an inflow amount monitor unit 1218 that measures the amount of charge to the (car) battery 1220, and an inflow amount monitor unit 1218 that measures the amount of electric power released (power sold) from the (car) battery 1220 to the outside. A release amount monitor unit 1216 is installed, and each measured value is transmitted to the system controller α_1126 via the communication module 1202-2. In particular, in the system of this embodiment, a discharge amount control unit 1212 that can accurately control the amount of electric power discharged (power sold) from the (car) battery 1220 to the outside and an amount of electric power charged to the (car) battery 1220 can be precisely controlled. An inflow control unit 1214 that can control the flow rate is installed. Both are connected to the system controller α_1126 via communication modules 1202-2 and 1202-3. Therefore, the system controller α_1126 feeds back the amount of emitted (power sold) power sequentially measured by the emitted amount monitor section 1216 to the emitted amount control section 1212, and can accurately control the amount of power released (power sold) to the outside. . Similarly, the system controller feeds back the inflow (purchased) power amount sequentially measured by the inflow amount monitor section 1218 to the inflow amount control section 1214 to accurately control the amount of power charged to the (car) battery 1220. .

It has already been explained in Section 1.7 that the system controller α_1126 controls communication within the corresponding system α_1132 (network system) and manages and operates the communication state. As shown in FIG. 8A, this system controller α_1126 includes a processor 1230. This processor 1230 collects information from all the sensor modules 1222, 1260-1 to 5 in the same domain 2_1122-2, and sequentially stores it in the memory unit 1232 as history information. Additionally, command information for the drive module 1270-1 is similarly stored as history information. Furthermore, this system controller α_1126 has a user I/F unit 1234, which allows direct input of requests from the user and display of the current progress status to the user. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the user I/F unit 1234 may be installed outside the system controller α_1126 and connected via the communication module 1202-3.

In particular, in the system of this embodiment, instead of automatically transferring all information regarding all sensor modules 1222, 1260-1 to 5 and drive module 1270-1 in domain 2_1122-2 to server n_1116-n, system controller α_1126 (internal A major feature is that the processor 1230) autonomously selects and transmits only necessary information to the server n_1116-n. This has the effect of protecting the user's personal information. In addition to the selection of information as described above, it is also possible to perform some processing or analysis on the above information and notify only the results to the server n_1116-n. This allows the server n_1116-n to collect only the minimum necessary information, which also has the effect of increasing the efficiency of integrated management processing performed within the service provider B_1116-1.

Furthermore, in the system of this embodiment, the system controller α_1126 (processor 1230 therein) can collect unique information from the server n_1116-n via the communication module 1202-3 and store it in the memory unit 1232. This unique information means information that cannot be obtained from within the domain 2_1122-2, such as traffic congestion information, local weather forecast information, and time-varying price information for public consumption goods. The system controller α_1126 (processor 1230 therein) analyzes/analyzes the information thus accumulated in the memory unit 1232 and estimates/determines the end user's behavior, state, or request. Based on this estimated/determined content, the system controller α_1126 (processor 1230 therein) controls the system α_1132 (or domain 2_1122-1) and provides optimal service to the end user. As an example of this service providing method, the drive module 1270-1 in FIG. 8A may be remotely operated. In this way, the system controller α_1126 (processor 1230 therein) integrally analyzes the information collected from the sensor modules 1222, 1260-1 to 1260-1 to 5 and the server n_1116-n and the command history to the drive module 1270-1. Because of the analysis, it has the effect of being able to provide unique services such as providing detailed services to users within domain 2_1122-2, which was difficult to do in the past. Furthermore, such a unique service within the domain 2_1122-2 can be stably provided even in a state where communication with the server n_1116-n is unavailable due to system trouble, so the robustness of the service provided to the end user can be ensured.

FIG. 9 shows an application example of the system of this embodiment shown in FIG. 8A. In FIG. 9, all devices 1250-1 & 4 in domain 2_1122-2 except the smart meter 1124 and the router (gateway) 1300 have a built-in processor 1330 or device controllers 1240-1 and 1240-2, and the router (gateway) 1300 has a built-in battery. It is possible to directly exchange information with the server n_1116-n via the server n_1116-n.

Here, the processor 1330 built in the section 1_1142-1 (inside one car) is not limited to controlling the amount of electric power charged/discharged from the (car) battery 1220, but also controls the air conditioning inside the car and is efficient in terms of fuel consumption. It performs all kinds of controls such as engine combustion control, and can send related information to the server n_1116-n via the router (gateway) 1300 (or directly). Furthermore, all communication modules 1202-1 to 1202-7 are connected via a router (gateway) 1300 to a server n_1116-n via a network. In the application example shown in FIG. 9, the router (gateway) 1300 does not perform any discrimination or selection, and the system shown in FIG. 8A automatically transfers all information from the device 1250-1/4 to the server n_1116-n. There is a major functional difference from controller α_1126.

On the other hand, in the application example shown in FIG. 9, memory units 1244 and 1246 are built in all the devices 1250-1/4 in domain 2_1122-2. Signals and information detected moment by moment by the sensor modules 1260-1 to 1260-7 are sequentially stored in memory units 1244 and 1246 in time series. In addition, command information issued from the device controllers 1240-1 to 1240-2 to the drive modules 1270-1 to 3 as appropriate is also sequentially stored in the memory units 1244 and 1246. Using the information stored in the memory units 1244 and 1246, the device controllers 1240-1 and 1240-2 can provide unique services for each device 1250-1 to 1250-4 to end users. When providing this service, the history of detection signals and measurement information from the sensor modules 1260-1 to 1260-7 that change from moment to moment, which are stored in the memory units 1244 and 1246, is used to The user's behavior, state, or request is estimated/judged, and the drive modules 1270-1 to 1270-3 are controlled (details will be described later in sections 4.2 to 4.4).

The characteristic of the application example shown in FIG. 9 is that ``the entire corresponding network communication system α_1132 is managed or controlled from outside (the physical space area formed by) the network communication system α_1132'' or ``the network communication system α_1132 (physical spatial area formed by) and does not have a system controller α_1126 that manages or controls the entire corresponding network communication system α_1132. Seen from this perspective, information communication within the same system network line 1782 formed between the devices 1250-1 and 4 in the system α_1132 via the router (gateway) 1300 with a built-in battery, and Instead of the server n_1116-n, the system controller β_1128 installed at a location physically distant from the system α_1132 may perform the operation.

As a further application, a "mixed form" between the embodiment system shown in FIG. 2 or FIGS. 8A/B and the embodiment system of FIG. 9 may be adopted. In this case, both the system controller α_1126 and the router (gateway) 1300 with a built-in battery may be provided as relay means between the inside and outside of the system α_1132. Further, the management, operation, or control of the entire network communication system α_1132 may be performed by both the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128 in cooperation, or normally only by the system controller α_1126. This system controller α_1126 and this system controller β_1128 frequently exchange information, and all information necessary for collecting information for each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m and providing services to users is shared between the two companies. In this case, the related files stored in the memory unit 1232 in the system controller α_1126 are appropriately copied to and from the corresponding memory unit 1248 in the system controller β_1128 by mirroring. By the way, the address table in FIG. 23, the estimation/judgment collation table in FIG. 27, and the time series information in FIG. The tracking table will be explained later. In this way, by appropriately sharing information between the system controllers α_1126 and β_1128, processing within the system α_1132 can be stabilized without any interference even if the management/operation or control entity is replaced (or even if they are mixed). continues. Furthermore, the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n may cooperate to manage, operate, or control the entire network communication system α_1132. In this case, in the same way as above (using mirroring, etc.), all the information necessary for collecting information for each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m and providing services to users is transferred between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116- It may be shared among n. By managing, operating, or controlling the entire network communication system α_1132 with multiple devices placed in different locations in this way, it is possible to respond flexibly to emergencies, improving the stability and reliability of the network communication system α_1132. It has the effect of For example, if the system controller α_1126 shuts down due to some unexpected situation, or even if all the information stored in the memory unit 1232 is destroyed due to a head crash, etc., the system controller β_1128 or server n_1116-n is automatically restored as an emergency response. As a result, the processing of system α_1132 can continue stably without causing any stress to the user. In addition, the user's convenience is improved because, for example, the user can operate the system controller β_1128 from a remote location to collect information from the network communication system α_1132 and control the network communication system α_1132. In this case, the system α_1132 includes devices 1250-1 and 1250-4 that have a built-in device controller 1240 and a memory section 1242, devices 1250-2 and 3 that do not have a device controller 1240 and a memory section 1242, and sensors/communication devices described later. Composite modules that collectively refer to module 1460 and drive/communication module 1470 may be mixed.

A supplementary explanation regarding the above-mentioned "mixed form" will be provided. As shown in FIG. 5, a composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) arranged in network system α_1132 often has a power storage module (battery) 1554. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs within system α_1132, many of the composite modules 1295 (or units 1290) continue to operate without being affected. Furthermore, in the embodiment system of FIG. 9, since the router (gateway) 1300 that relays information communication inside and outside the system α_1132 has a built-in battery, it is not affected by a power outage within the network system α_1132. Therefore, if you set up a means to back up the management/control within network system α_1132 in the event of an unforeseen event such as a power outage or failure, information communication within system α_1132 will continue without a hitch without being affected by the unforeseen event such as a power outage or failure. do.

As already explained in Section 1.1 that "the only system controller α_1126 manages/controls/operates/collects information within network system α_1132", information communication within network system α_1132 during normal times. Management/control/operation/information collection is performed by system controller α_1126. However, in the event of an unexpected occurrence such as a power outage or failure, the system controller β_1128 performs temporary management/control/operation/information collection of information communication within the network system α_1132. However, in normal times, the system controller β_1128 may be treated as one unit 1290 belonging to the network system α_1132.

Furthermore, as already explained using FIGS. 1 and 2 in Section 1.1, the system controller α_1126, which manages/controls/operates/collects information of the information communication within the network system α_1132, is responsible for each unit within the network system α_1132. 1290 within the network system, and also performs information communication outside the system with a server n_1116-n (cloud or cloud server) existing outside the network system α_1132. When the system controller β_1128 performs temporary operation of the system controller α_1126 in the event of an unexpected occurrence such as a power outage or failure, it is desirable to communicate information between each unit 1290 and the server n_1116-n in the same communication information format as before the temporary operation. . This is because temporary processing can be performed smoothly and seamlessly by using the same communication information format.

As described later in Section 2.1 using FIG. 10A, communication information in the communication middleware layer APL02 between the system controller α_1126 and the composite module 1295 can use the C-format. On the other hand, the communication information in the communication middleware layer APL06 between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n (cloud or cloud server) may use A-format, E-format, W-format, or the like. Therefore, when the system controller β_1128 performs proxy processing in place of the system controller α_1126, it is desirable to perform similar information communication. That is, the communication information in the communication middleware layer APL02 between the system controller β_1128 and the composite module 1295 uses the C-format, and the communication information with the server n_1116-n (cloud or cloud server) uses the A-format, E-format, or W. - Use formats, etc.

In this way, the features of the client system generated by combining the content described later in Section 2.1 using FIGS. 10A and 17A and the system of this embodiment described above are summarized below. In other words, this client system (system α_1132) can be connected to an external cloud (server n_1116-1 in FIG. 1) (via the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 10A or the router (gateway) 1300 or system controller β_1128 in FIG. 17A). In addition, this client system (system α_1132) has a first system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the unit 1290 (or composite module 1295) that has the function of communicating independently acquired or created information, and the a second system controller β_1128 different from the first system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the unit 1290 (or composite module 1295); Alternatively, the composite module 1295) is managed by dividing it into sections 1142 (FIG. 1), and information regarding the section to which each unit belongs (address table in FIG. 23 or time-series information tracking table in FIG. 28, which will be described later in Section 4.3). 17A, wherein communication between the second system controller β_1128 and the plurality of units 1290 (or composite module 1295) uses a first data format (C-format in FIG. 17A). In addition, communication between the second system controller β_1128 and the cloud (server n_1116-1 in FIG. 1) is characterized by using a second data format (A/E/W-format in FIG. 17B).

By the way, it has already been explained that normally, the system controller β_1134 may be treated as one unit 1290 belonging to the network system α_1132, which is managed/controlled/operated/information collected by the system controller α_1126. Furthermore, in the system of this embodiment, information communication between different units 1290 within the same network system 1132 is possible via (via) the network system α_1132. As described above, when information is communicated between the system controller α_1126 and the unit 1290, the C-format can be used for the communication information in the communication middleware layer APL02. Therefore, when information is communicated between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128, using the C-format for communication information in the communication middleware layer APL02 has the effect that management/control/operation/information collection of the system controller α_1126 is easier. is born.

On the other hand, even when the system controller β_1134 normally communicates information with the server n_1116-n (cloud or cloud server), A-format, E-format, or W-format is used for communication information in the communication middleware layer APL06. It is desirable to do so. As a result, even if system controller α_1126 becomes unavailable due to a power outage or failure, temporary processing related to management/control/operation/information collection of network system α_1132 can be carried out smoothly and seamlessly.

This content can be expressed as follows. In other words, this client system (system α_1132) can be connected to an external cloud (server n_1116-1 in FIG. 1) (via the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 10A or the router (gateway) 1300 or system controller β_1128 in FIG. 17A). A first system controller α_1126 and the unit 1290 (or composite module 1295) that acquires and manages the information from the unit 1290 (or composite module 1295) that has a function of communicating independently acquired or created information. a second system controller β_1128 different from the first system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the plurality of systems via the first system controller α_1126. 1290 using a first data format (such as C-format), and communication between the second system controller β_1128 and the cloud (server n_1116-n in FIG. 1). It has a feature of using the second data format (A/E/W-format in FIG. 17B) for communication.

By the way, in the paraphrase so far, there have been relatively many cases where consideration has been given to cooperative processing or alternative processing between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the characteristics of the embodiment system shown in FIG. 9 alone, in which the system controller α_1126 does not exist from the beginning, can also be described as follows. In other words, this client system (system α_1132) can be connected to an external cloud (server n_1116-1 in FIG. 1) (via the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 10A or the router (gateway) 1300 or system controller β_1128 in FIG. 17A). A unit 1290 (or composite module 1295) that has a function of communicating independently acquired or created information, a system controller β_1128 that acquires and manages the information from the unit 1290 (device 1250 in FIG. 9), and the A gateway 1300 has a function of communicating between a unit 1290 (device 1250 in FIG. 9) and the system controller β_1128, and the system controller β_1128 connects a plurality of units 1290 (device 1250 in FIG. 9) to section 1_1142-1. , 2_1142-2 and information regarding the sections 1_1142-1 and 2_1142-2 to which each unit 1290 (equipment 1250 in FIG. 9) belongs (the address table in FIG. 23 or FIG. 28 described later in Section 4.3). an electronic equipment system that maintains a time-series information tracking table (chronological information tracking table of ), and a second data format (A/E/W-format in FIG. 17B) is used for communication between the system controller β_1128 and the cloud (server n_1116-n in FIG. 1). .

Section 1.9 Example of Utilization of Composite Module in a Local Network System In the embodiment shown in FIG. 8A or FIG. 9, the basic communication partner of the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 8A or the server n_1116-n in FIG. 1250-1 to 4. Conventionally, the basic functions were determined in advance for each device, so the contents of network communication information (communication protocol or exchange information 1810 in the communication middleware layer APL explained in Chapter 2) that matched the basic functions of each device were standardized. It was previously specified above. However, as each device evolves, develops, and diversifies with the changing times, it becomes difficult to quickly adapt standards to the ever-changing equipment functions of each device. For example, the basic function of a television is to "receive broadcast waves and display the content to the user." However, today's high-end Japanese TVs are not limited to the above-mentioned basic functions, but also have built-in data communication functions or recording functions using network lines. Furthermore, although it is not so popular at present, autostereoscopic 3DTV (3 Dimensional Television) also has a built-in function to detect positional information of the viewing user. Furthermore, in the future, it is possible that televisions will have built-in light sensors (to optimally control the brightness of the display screen). Considering such diversification and expandability for each device, if the communication information format (exchange information 1810) or communication protocol between devices and 1250-1 to 1250-4 is made versatile, it will be possible to decode the communication information. This has the disadvantage of increasing the price of the devices 1250-1 to 4 that incorporate the high-performance device controllers 1240-1 to 1240-2. In other words, it is difficult for the device 1250-2 or the device 1250-3 in FIG. 8A to decipher general-purpose and complex communication information, and the device 1250-2 or 1250-3 in FIG. A built-in controller 1240 is required.

As a countermeasure, in FIG. 8B, the sensor/communication modules 1460-1 to 5 or the drive/communication modules 1470-1 to 2 belonging to the composite module 1295 can be installed inside the devices 1450-1 to 4 or separately outside the device. There is.

For convenience of explanation, all the devices 1450-1 to 4 in FIG. 8B have a structure in which sensor/communication modules 1460-1 to 4 belonging to the composite module 1295 and drive/communication modules 1470-1 to 2 are built-in. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the embodiment shown in FIG. 3A(c) may be adopted. That is, for example, the above-mentioned composite module 1295 (sensor/communication module 1460 or drive/communication module 1470) may be additionally built into the devices 1250-1 to 1250-4 shown in FIGS. 8A and 9. In this case, information communication regarding the basic functions of each device (for example, the function of "receiving broadcast waves and displaying the contents to the user" in the previous example) is carried out within the devices 1250-1 to 1250-4 shown in FIGS. 8A and 9. Correspond with this. Information communication regarding newly developed, diversified, and added new functions is directly handled by newly additionally built-in composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470. The entire functions possessed by the highly diversified/evolved equipment 1250 are managed/understood and controlled in an integrated manner within the system controller α_1126. This creates a new effect that facilitates expandability (expandability of built-in sensors/drive types) when adding new functions to conventional existing equipment. Furthermore, since the functions of each of the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 are very limited and simplified, the communication information that the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 exchange with the outside can be greatly simplified. It also produces effects. If communication information exchanged with the outside world is greatly simplified in this way, it becomes unnecessary to have built-in high-performance device controllers 1240-1 and 1240-2 to decipher/control complex communication information, and the above-mentioned complex The modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 can be easily reduced in cost and size.

In the example of FIG. 8B, device 1450-1 and device 1450-2 are arranged in section 2_1142-2, and devices 1450-3 and 1450-4 are arranged in section m_1142-m. However, the installation location of each device 1450-1 to 4 does not necessarily have to be fixed, and the end user may transport any of the specific devices 1450-1 to 4 and move it into another section.

Similarly, in the embodiment system of FIG. 8B, sensor modules and drive modules are individually integrated with communication modules within the smart meter 1124 and within section 1_1142-1 (corresponding to the entire interior of one vehicle, for example). As a result, as shown in the smart meter 1124 in FIG. 8B, a discharge amount monitor/communication module 1406 and an inflow amount monitor/communication module 1408 are configured, and are individually connected to the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n through a network. There is. Similarly, section 1_1142-1 is composed of a discharge amount monitor/communication module 1416, an inflow amount monitor/communication module 1418, a discharge amount control/communication module 1412, and an inflow amount control/communication module 1414, each of which has an individual communication module 1202. -3 to the system controller α_1126 (processor 1230 therein). Here, the discharge amount monitor/communication module 1406, the inflow amount monitor/communication module 1408, the discharge amount monitor/communication module 1416, and the inflow amount monitor/communication module 1418 correspond to the sensor/communication module 1460. Further, the discharge amount control/communication module 1412 and the inflow amount control/communication module 1414 correspond to the drive/communication module 1470. In this case, all detection signals and measurement information obtained from the sensor/communication modules 1460-1 to 1460-5 in the system Controller α_1126 collects (and stores in memory unit 1232) all at once. In addition, the system controller α_1126 collectively controls (issues commands) all the drive/communication modules 1470-1 to 2, the discharge amount control/communication module 1412, and the inflow amount control/communication module 1414 in the system α_1132. As a result, a single system controller α_1126 enables efficient integrated management and control of all devices 1450-1 to 1450-5 in the system α_1132 and provision of high-quality services to end users.

Furthermore, the embodiment system example shown in FIG. 8B has the advantage that the devices 1450-1 to 1450-5 can be manufactured at a very low cost. That is, by mass-producing standard composite modules 1460 and 1470 with general versatility, these composite modules 1460 and 1470 can be manufactured at a significantly lower cost. There is no need for any new interface unit to connect the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470, and it can be incorporated into the corresponding devices 1450-1 to 1450-5 very easily and inexpensively at the mere physical layout level. If drive/communication modules 1470-1 to 2 can be supplied at low cost, the number of drive/communication modules 1470-1 to 2 to be incorporated into devices 1450-1 to 5 can be increased compared to the example in FIG. 8B. Furthermore, the method of assembling the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 into the devices 1450-1 to 1450-5 is not limited to fixing with screws, but may be temporarily fixed using double-sided tape or adhesive tape by the end user, for example. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 8B, device 1450-1 and device 1450-3 each include one sensor/communication module 1460-4 to 5, and device 1450-2 includes multiple sensor/communication modules 1460- 2-3 are built-in. However, using the method described above, it becomes easy for an end user to reattach a particular sensor/communications module 1460-2-5 to another device 1450.

However, in the system of this embodiment shown in FIG. 8B, the sensor/communication module 1460-5 is not built into the device 1450, but instead is installed independently at an arbitrary location within the specific section 1142 (or within the domain 1122). . As a method for installing such sensor/communication module 1460-5 (or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) alone, for example, the user can install sensor/communication module 1460 (or The composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) may be fixed to a wall, roof, or floor, or may be mixed with paint and applied to the wall, roof, or floor. Further, although not shown, a drive/communication module 1470 (eg, in the form of a remote control for controlling an air conditioner, a television, or a lighting equipment) may be installed independently at any location within the specific section 1142 (or within the domain 1122). Also good.

In addition, as another example of the system of this embodiment, the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 are made movable with the user, and the position change history of the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 is measured to collect user behavior history information. Also good. Additionally (not shown), the drive/communications module 1470 can be moved with the user and can be used to control air conditioning, televisions, lighting equipment, etc. from any user's location within a particular section 1142 (or domain 1122). It is also possible to control state changes (for example, changes in air conditioning or brightness) within the section 1142 (for example, changes in air conditioning or brightness). Here, as a method for making the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 movable with the user, for example, they may be temporarily fixed with tape or adhesive to personal items that the user carries on a daily basis, such as glasses, tie pins, shoes, and wallets. Make it adhere. Alternatively, it may be firmly fixed with screws or the like, or it may be incorporated inside a portable item.

Chapter 2 Overview of Hierarchical Structure and Data Structure of Communication Information In Chapter 1, the structure of the entire system of this embodiment was explained using FIGS. 1 to 9. In this second chapter, the characteristics and detailed contents of the data structure (communication protocol contents) of the communication information mutually communicated within the present embodiment described in the first chapter will be explained.

Section 2.1 Hierarchical structure of network communication related functions in this embodiment Network communication used in this embodiment has a hierarchical structure for each function as shown in FIGS. 10A/B and 16 to 17B. It has great characteristics. In this hierarchical structure, the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 corresponding to the physical functions of the lowest layer shown in FIGS. 10A/B and 16 to 17B provide physical communication media necessary for network communication. Make provisions regarding. When using cabled or wired Ethernet as a specific example of this physical communication medium, use cables and connectors that have the shape and characteristics specified in the physical layer PHY06 standard. do. On the other hand, when wireless is used as this physical communication medium, it is adapted to the frequency, channel, modulation method, basic communication frame structure, etc. specified in the standard of the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06.

The media access layers MAC02 and MAC06, which correspond to access functions on communication media located above the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06, are connected to nodes connected to the network (equipment 1250 in FIG. 8A or device 1250 in FIG. 8B). It defines information necessary for correctly transmitting communication information to and from the composite modules 1460, 1470). Furthermore, the top-level extended application layer EXL06 and communication middleware layers APL06 and APL02 define various service provision using network communication (corresponding to various service provision functions using communication).

By providing a hierarchical structure corresponding to each function in this way, it becomes possible to select/combine the optimal format for each layer according to the characteristics and performance of the communication partner. As a result, the entire system of this embodiment has the effect of being able to lower the price (of the composite modules 1460 and 1470 shown in FIG. 8B) and at the same time improve the functionality of communication information (with the device 1250 shown in FIG. 8A). . A specific example of this effect will be explained below. First, the physical layer PHY02 and the media access layer MAC02 can adopt the Z-format (details will be described later in Section 2.3) that supports short-range wireless, which is optimal for the "power saving" required for the composite modules 1460 and 1470. . Furthermore, in order to optimize the "low price" required for the composite modules 1460 and 1470, the communication middleware layer APL02 adopts the C-format (details will be described later in Section 2.5) with "simplified communication information". You may do so. On the other hand, in order to meet the high functionality of communication required between the server n_1116-n and the device 1250-1, the A-format allows communication of multiple pieces of information simultaneously to the communication middleware layer APL06 (see Section 2.7 for details). ), E-format (details will be described later in Section 2.6), or W-format, and communication information from the extended application layer EXL06 may also be used.

In addition, it supports the Internet communication (internet protocol) function as an intermediate layer of communication information having the above hierarchical structure (a layer higher than the media access layer MAC02 and MAC06, and a layer lower than the communication middleware layer APL02 and APL06). The following feature of this embodiment is that information specified by the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 can be "commonly" communicated. Here, "commonly communicable" refers to all nodes connected to the network in all the systems of this embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 8B (communication targets corresponding to the communication source and communication destination of network communication). In this embodiment, the Internet protocol is commonly used when communicating with the device 1250, the server n_1116-n, the wholesaler A_1102 in FIG. 8A, or the composite modules 1460 and 1470 in FIG. This means that communication information specified by version 6 layer IPv6 (details will be described later in Section 2.4) may be communicated. Another way to explain this situation is as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 10A, the communication information used (transmitted) by an outside-system network line 1788 and an in-system network line 1782 (details will be described later) includes the same Internet protocol. It may also include information specified by the standard compatible with version 6 layer IPv6. Here, the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 defines a communication protocol on the Internet, and performs address management and communication route management on the Internet. Therefore, the standard specified by this Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 does not depend on the type of node such as wholesaler A_1102, server n_1116-n, system controller α_1126, device 1250-1, composite module 1460, 1470, etc. , it is possible to set unique IP addresses (Internet Protocol Addresses) for every node (communication object). In this way, when communicating between different systems within the same domain 2_1122-2 in the system of this embodiment (when communicating between system α_1132 and system β_1134 in FIG. 1), by using the above IP address, the communication partner can This has the effect of greatly simplifying management (details will be discussed later in Section 2.8). As a specific example of this effect, for example, you can use a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or tablet (corresponding to system controller β_1128 in Figure 1) from a business trip overseas (corresponding to the location of system β_1134 in Figure 1) to at home (corresponding to the location of system controller β_1128 in Figure 1). It becomes possible to collect necessary information from the sensor/communication module 1460 of the system α_1132 (corresponding to the location of system α_1132) or operate the drive/communication module 1470, greatly improving user convenience. Also, at this time, the business trip (system β_1134) and the home (system α_1132) are protected within the same domain 2_1122-2, which prevents intrusion from other outsiders, so there is a sufficiently strong security protection. There is.

First, using the embodiment system model shown in FIG. 8B, the hierarchical structure (architecture) of each function related to network communication is shown in FIG. 10A. By the way, in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the composite modules 1460 and 1470 are described as the rightmost network nodes because the system model of the embodiment shown in FIG. 8B is taken into consideration. Furthermore, instead of the composite modules 1460 and 1470 as the rightmost network nodes arranged in the network line 1782 within the same system, communication within the devices 1250-2 and 3 that do not include the device controller 1240-1 described in FIG. 8A is performed. Modules 1202-5 and 1202-6 (and sensor modules 1260-3 to 1260-5) may be made to correspond.

Here, the left side of FIG. 10A shows a hierarchical structure (architecture) for each function related to communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 8B. Further, the right side of FIG. 10A shows a hierarchical structure (architecture) for each function related to communication between the system controller α_1126 of FIG. 8B and each composite module 1460, 1470.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the system of this embodiment, the server n_1116-n can be installed in a location physically outside the area where the system α_1132 to which the system controller α_1126 belongs exists. Therefore, as shown on the left side of FIG. 10A, communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 uses the external network line 1788. The out-of-system network line 1788 may be a cabled or wired internet line or a wireless internet line. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to use a network line that is used within a relatively narrow range, such as a LAN (Local Area Network).

Fiberoptic cables may also be used as the physical communication media using wires. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and any signal transmission means such as electric cords, telephone wires, or power lines may be used as other physical media corresponding to the above-mentioned wires. Further, as the signal format to be transmitted, either an analog signal or a digital signal may be used. Communication standards at the physical layer PHY06 differ not only due to differences in the physical form of the communication medium and the form of signals transmitted therein, but also depending on the communication line management company and the country or region that manages/supervises communication. . Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, all communication standards in the physical layer PHY06 via an existing line are collectively called "L-format". On the other hand, when wireless is used in the physical layer PHY06 as the network line 1788 outside the system, communication standards such as 2G (Second Generation), 3G (Third Generation), or WiMAX (World Wide Interoperability for Microwave Access), which are long-distance wireless systems, are used. It's okay. Furthermore, the present embodiment system is not limited to this, and can use communication information compliant with all wireless communication standards including medium-range wireless systems. All wireless communication standards, including these long-distance wireless systems to medium-range wireless systems, are collectively referred to as the "G-format" herein.

By comparison, all composite modules 1460, 1470 shown in FIG. 8B are commonly located within system α_1132 managed by system controller α_1126. The physical range of this system α_1132 is limited to a relatively narrow area. Therefore, information communication between the system controller α_1126 and the composite modules 1460 and 1470 is performed using the intra-system network line 1782 in FIG. 10A. In order to distinguish it from the "G-format" and "L-format" communication standards used in the above-mentioned outside-system network line 1788, it is used in the physical layer PHY02 of information communicated within the same system-internal network line 1782. The communication standards are collectively called "Z-format." In the system of this embodiment, either wireless or wired (or a mixture thereof) may be used as the same-system network line 1782.

On the other hand, the standards used in the media access layer MAC02/06 shown in FIG. 10A are often studied/proposed by the same standards development organization as the physical layer PHY02/06. Therefore, in the media access layer MAC06 transmitted on the external network line 1788 between the server n_1116-2 and the system controller α_1126, "L-format" or "G-format" can be used in accordance with the physical layer PHY06. Similarly, "Z-format" can be used within the media access layer MAC02 transmitted on the same intra-system network line 1782 between the system controller α_1126 and the composite modules 1460 and 1470. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, the Z-format may be used for the physical layer PHY02, and the L-format or G-format may be used for the media access layer MAC02. Alternatively, the L-format or G-format may be used for the physical layer PHY06, and the Z-format may be used for the media access layer MAC06.

By the way, the processing of information (mainly communication control processing) related to each function from the physical layer PHY06 to the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 described above is carried out by the communication modules 1768 and 1202 in the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126. -3 is executed. By the way, the communication module 1660 in the composite modules 1460 and 1470 whose internal structures are explained in FIG. 5 and FIG. . In this communication control unit 1700, information processing (mainly communication control processing) related to each function from the physical layer PHY02 to the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 is performed.

Until now, the information related to each function from the physical layer PHY06 to the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 was mainly related to communication control, and had little relation to the function, operation, or performance of the device 1450, for example. On the other hand, the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 and the extended application layer EXL06 in FIG. 10A are related to various service providing functions using network communication. Processing of communication information related to the functions of the communication middleware layer APL06 and the extended application layer EXL06 (mainly processing related to providing services to users) is executed by the processors 1738 and 1230 in the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126. . On the other hand, information related to the functions of the communication middleware layer APL02 that is communicated via the same system network line 1782 is processed in the interface section 1710 in the communication module 1660 within the composite modules 1460 and 1470. The system of this embodiment is characterized in that the composite modules 1460 and 1470 do not use expensive processors, and all communication information communicated via the same system network line 1782 can be processed within the communication module 1660. There is. By eliminating the need for an expensive built-in processor, the composite modules 1460 and 1470 can be provided at low cost.

However, among the information communicated via the external network line 1788, unique information that can only be used on specific application software installed on both the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 is stored in the extended application layer EXL06. A major feature of the system of this embodiment is that it can be stored and communicated. This allows differentiation between application software installed on both server n_1116-n and system controller α_1126. As a result, competitive development among application software of each company based on the principle of competition is promoted, which not only promotes the advancement of application software technology but also improves user convenience. Furthermore, by using the unique information stored in the extended application layer EXL06, there is an effect that the quality of the service provided to the user by the application software is improved. However, if the performance and additional expansion functions possessed by the devices 1250-1 and 2 shown in FIG. 8A and FIG. There will be a need to update format standards one by one. However, since upgrading the standard requires extremely complicated work, a problem arises in that it is difficult for the standard upgrading to keep up with improvements in performance and addition and expansion of functions of the devices 1250-1 and 1250-2. On the other hand, by utilizing the extended application layer EXL06, the application software vendor has the advantage of being able to easily respond to improvements in performance and addition and expansion of functions of the devices 1250-1 and 2 without waiting for standard version upgrades. In this way, the information stored and communicated in the extended application layer EXL06 can be freely set depending on the specific software vendor, so there is no need to predefine the description format of the communication information here as a world standard.

In comparison, communication information related to the service provision function of the communication middleware layer APL02/APL06 may use information that conforms to a standardized format such as A-, E-, W-, or C-format. . In this way, if the communication information related to the service provision function of the communication middleware layer APL02/APL06 conforms to a predetermined standard format, mutual compatibility between the server 1116 and the system controllers 1126/1128, and between the composite modules 1460 and 1470 is ensured. This has the effect of making it easier to take.

As shown in FIG. 25, both the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 have a large-capacity memory unit 1232 (and database 1118-n), and can have high-speed and powerful processors 1738/1230. Therefore, a large amount of diverse communication information corresponding to the provision of various services can be set in the communication middleware layer APL06 that is transmitted between the two. In comparison, it is difficult to incorporate a processor capable of providing various services in the composite modules 1460 and 1470. Therefore, in response to the above situation, the system of this embodiment uses a format different from that used in the communication middleware layer APL06 (A-format, E-format, W-format, etc.) for information communication with the composite modules 1460 and 1470. A format (such as C-format) may be used within the communication middleware layer APL02. In particular, by relatively simplifying the C-format used within the communication middleware layer APL02 (details will be described later in Section 2.5), the processing burden within the composite modules 1460 and 1470 can be reduced, resulting in lower prices. In addition, by increasing the relative processing speed and shortening the processing time, the consumption of the built-in power storage module (battery) 1554 can be reduced. However, the system of this embodiment is not limited to this, and may use A-format, E-format, W-format, etc. for information communication with composite modules 1460 and 1470.

Here, information used within the communication middleware layer APL02 included in communication information using the same system network line 1782 and information used within the communication middleware layer APL06 included in communication information using the outside system network line 1788. The switching (conversion) process between the two is handled within the system controller α_1126. However, within the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 of the system of this embodiment, the communication information used within the same system internal network line 1782 and the communication information used within the external system network line 1788 do not necessarily have to completely match. There may be no difference between the two pieces of communication information. This processing method will be explained below. As already explained in Sections 1.1 and 1.7, and as shown in FIG. 8B, the system controller α_1126 manages and operates network communication within the network system α_1132. Information detected by all the sensor/communication modules 1460 and information on all the states controlled (set) by the drive/communication module 1470, which are sequentially obtained in real time through the network line 1782 within the same system, are stored as management information 1744. It is appropriately saved in the memory unit 1232 in the system controller α_1126. Here, the above management information 1744 may be stored in a table format as a management table. Furthermore, in the case where FIGS. 8A and 8B are mixed, the system controller α_1126 simultaneously stores information (detection information, current status information, etc.) on all devices 1250 as part of the management information 1744. . Then, the system controller α_1126 extracts only the specific information in the range in which the user's personal information is protected from the management information 1744, and communicates the information to the server n_1116-n via the intra-system network line 1788. The information communicated to the server n_1116-n is stored in the database 1118-n as management information 1748 (which may be in a table format) managed by the server n_1116. In this way, the system controller α_1126 converts (switches information) between the communication information used in the communication middleware layer APL02 and the communication information used in APL06, which not only protects user security but also By receiving the minimum necessary information after being selected in advance, the processing of the server n_1116-n is also simplified.

A client system that combines the contents described above and the overview contents of the entire system of this embodiment already described in Section 1.1 has the following characteristics. That is, a system controller α_1126 that can be connected to an external cloud (server n_1116-n in FIG. 1) and manages information, and a unit (that has a function of acquiring or creating and transmitting information to be provided to the system controller α_1126). This system controller α_1126 divides the plurality of units into managed sections (sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m in FIG. 1). , an electronic equipment system that maintains information regarding the section to which each unit belongs, wherein communication between the system controller and the plurality of units (compound modules 1295, 1460, 1470, which are one type of units) is performed by a first communication between the system controller α_1126 and the cloud (server n_1116-n in FIG. 10A) is performed using a second data format (A /E/W-format or L/G format is supported). In particular, the first data format and the second data format are different data formats.

As described later in Section 2.2, the first data format includes a header (corresponding to the physical layer header PHYHD in FIG. 11) and the first data (from the MAC layer header MACHD to the TCP header TCPHD in FIG. 11). data), and second data (communication middleware data APLDT) in addition to the first data.

Further, when the communication processing of the communication information having the above-mentioned characteristics is executed with the above-mentioned system controller α_1126 in between, the following characteristics are present. That is, the system controller α_1126 converts the communication information obtained from the unit (a type of composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) into the second data format (A/E/W-format or L/G format in FIG. 10A). ) and transmits it to the cloud (server n_1116-n), and also changes the information communicated from the cloud (server n_1116-n) to the first data format (C-format or Z-format). and transmits it to the unit (combined modules 1295, 1460, and 1470, which are a type of unit).

Here, the unit has a function of transmitting information to be provided to the system controller (responsible to the communication module 1660 shown in FIG. 4A), and a function of detecting external environmental information "for example, temperature, illuminance, etc." as the information (responsible for the communication module 1660 shown in FIG. 4B) or a state change function (played by the drive module 1670 in FIG. 4C) for changing the state of the unit itself, which is the basis of the information to be transmitted. Accordingly, the unit obtains or creates information in the first data format as part of the communicating function.

For convenience of explanation, the communication module 1660, sensor module 1260, and drive module 1670 are illustrated separately in FIGS. 4A to 4C. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and in the present embodiment, the functions may be used for the same purpose or some functions may overlap. In that case, the detecting function or the state change function within the unit and the communicating function will be used together.

Further, when the communication module 1660 has the structure shown in FIG. 7A, the functions of the communication module 1660 may be realized by a combination of all functional circuits without using the processor 1960 shown in FIG. 7A. In this case, the unit does not have a CPU (Central Processing Unit) that processes the information.

Next, a comparison of characteristics between communication information used (transmitted) within the same system internal network line 1782 and external system network line 1788 within the same communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 will be explained using FIG. 10B. Communication information conforming to A-format or E-format may be used for communication between system controller α_1126 and server n_1116-n via external network circuit 1788. In the system of this embodiment, the A-format includes all formats that are "described in a text format in a broad sense as communication information related to the communication middleware layer APL." On the other hand, as described later in Section 2.6, the E-format uses a format that ``stores the configuration code in a predefined area'' within the communication middleware data APLDT area (see Section 2.2). Includes all formats. In particular, the A-format and E-format have the characteristic that "information including plural items can be communicated (transmitted) at once." However, there is a risk that the network circuit outside the system 1788 used for this information communication may become temporarily congested due to the usage status of other users. Therefore, if a method is adopted in which communication is repeated very frequently between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n, there is a risk that communication between the two companies will be stagnant only during times when the network line is abnormally congested. In comparison, by adopting a format that allows multiple pieces of information to be communicated at once as shown in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the frequency of communication between the two parties and reduce the risk of communication stagnation. However, the system of this embodiment is not limited to this, and communication information conforming to C-format or W-format may be used for communication between system controller α_1126 and server n_1116-n.

In the above A-format or E-format, a plurality of tables in a predetermined template format are defined depending on the type of exchange information 1810 communicated between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n. And which type of table should be used as a template? Information indicating the exchange information is included in the exchange information 1810 as exchange information type identification information 1840. By sharing the exchange information (table) 1810 communicated in this way between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n, efficiency of information processing between the two companies is improved. That is, by installing application software including a processing routine for the exchange information (table) 1810 in both the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n, it becomes possible to provide advanced services to users.

On the other hand, information indicating the purpose of use of the exchange information (table) 1810 to be notified to the receiving party is included in the exchange information (table) 1810 as communication access control information 1830. For example, the communication access control information 1830 in the E-format may include "write request", "read request", "notification request", "write/read request", "write response", "notification", "read Codes corresponding to "response", "notification response", "write/read response", etc. are set respectively. In addition, the communication access control information 1830 in the A-format is set to ``write only'' (which means to instruct the receiving party to set the status or to notify the receiving party of the sender's status) or (means the current status of the receiving party). "READONLY" or "READWRITE" (which means a request for a response regarding a request for a response) can be written in the exchange information (table) 1810 in the XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.

Although not shown in FIG. 10B, the World Wide Web may be used as another method of communicating information via the external network line 1788. This method corresponds to the W-format shown in FIG. 10A, and the server n_1116-n or the system controller α_1126 also has the function of a Web server. In this case, the sending side of communication information (either server n_1116-n or system controller α_1126) specifies the receiving party (server n_1116-n or the opposite side of system controller α_1126) based on the URL (Uniform Resource Location), Communication information is automatically written in the write field specified in the form format (Form) on the homepage. When the information communication is completed, the receiving side stores the received information (or its processing results) in management information 1744 or 1748 according to a program set in advance using PHP (a recursive abbreviation for Hypertext Preprocessor) or a Java applet. By providing multiple write fields specified in form format on the same homepage, it is possible to set up a situation in which "information with multiple contents can be communicated (sent) at once", and the above-mentioned effect can be achieved even in W-format. can. Therefore, the W-format in the system of this embodiment includes all formats in which ``the sending side writes information in a writing field designated in advance by the receiving side to communicate information.'' Furthermore, the format is not limited to this, and any format in which "a tag unique to HTML or HTML5 is described" may be classified as a W-format.

As described above, measures are taken to reduce the frequency of information communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 via the external network line 1788. In contrast, in the same system network line 1782, the system controller α_1126 manages and operates the communication line within the network system, so there is no risk of network line congestion and communication stagnation. Rather, communication information in the communication middleware layer APL02 for the composite modules 1460, 1470 is simplified in order to adapt to the reduction in price and size of the composite modules 1460, 1470. As a specific example, information communication can be performed in any of cases 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 10B. In this case 1, for example, the system controller α_1126 issues a command (command issue) 1852 to change the setting state (state control) to the drive/communication module, and the drive/communication module replies with the execution result of the command 1852. On the other hand, in case 2, for the purpose of collecting sense information (detected information) by the sensor/communication module 1460, the system controller α_1126 issues a response request (request) 1872, and as a response (response) 1874, the sensor/communication module 1460 senses the Reply with information (detected information). In addition, when the sensor/communication module 1460 notifies the system controller α_1126 of sense information (detection information) at an arbitrary timing (or at a preset periodic timing), periodic/non-periodic You may also make a public report 1894.

Note that in the system of this embodiment, the information communication method is not limited to the above, and other communication methods may be used. For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, if a device 1250-1 including a device controller 1240-1 and a memory unit 1242 is installed in a system α_1132, a network line within the same system between this device 1250-1 and a system controller α_1126 is installed. For information communication on 1782, as shown in FIG. 16, a communication middleware layer APL06 or an extended application layer EXL06 conforming to A-format, E-format, or W-format may be used. As an example of an embodiment in this case, application software that can utilize the extended application layer EXL06 may be installed in the server n_1116-n in advance. After obtaining the user's permission via the user I/F unit 1234 (described in FIG. 8A), the system controller α_1126 automatically installs the above application software on both the system controller α_1126 itself and the corresponding device 1250. You may perform the installation process manually. At this time, the system controller α_1126 accesses the server n_1116-n and transfers the application software previously stored in the database 1118-n. In this way, the network circuit outside the system 1788 and the network circuit within the same system 1782 are connected via the system controller α_1126, and application software can be automatically installed up to the compatible device 1250, without placing any burden on the user. Since an environment in which the extended application layer EXL06 can be utilized can be automatically constructed, it is possible to ensure ease of handling and flexibility within the network system for the latest equipment 1250 whose functions have been newly expanded. However, the system of this embodiment is not limited to the above, and for example, communication information conforming to the C-format may be used for information communication in the communication middleware layer APL06 between the system controller α_1126 and the device 1250 shown in FIG.

Note that if the devices 1250-1 and 4 and the server n_1116-n are directly connected via the router (gateway) 1300 as shown in FIG. ) 1300 is located between the device 1250 and the server n_1116-n. In this case, the extended application layer EXL06 and communication middleware layer APL06 use the same communication information both in the external network circuit 1788 and in the same system internal network circuit 1782. Furthermore, in this case, since unique IP addresses are set for each of the device 1250 and the server n_1116-n, the sending side IP address information SIPADRS and the receiving side IP address information DIPADRS set in the Internet Protocol Version 6 layer are used. Direct information communication can be performed between the device 1250 and the server n_1116-n using (details will be described later in Section 2.4 using FIG. 13). Further, in this case, communication information conforming to E-format or A-format is mainly used for information communication in communication middleware layer APL06 between device 1250 and server n_1116-n. However, the system of this embodiment is not limited to this, and may also use C-format or W-format. In this way, the same communication information is used both within the network circuit outside the system 1788 and within the network circuit 1782 within the same system, which has the effect of significantly reducing the burden of relay processing on the router (gateway) 1300. However, the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 and the media access layer MAC02 and MAC06 use different formats (in the example in Figure 16, the Z-format is used for the network line 1782 within the same system, and the L-format is used for the network line 1788 outside the system). or use the G-format). In this case, format conversion is performed within the router (gateway) 1300.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1, when information is communicated between system controllers α_1126 and β_1128 that belong to the same domain 2_1122-2 but belong to different systems α_1132 and β_1134, the system controller α_1126 shown on the left side of FIG. A communication method similar to that between servers n_1116-n may be used. In this case, the same communication information as on the external network line 1688 may be used in all layers from the physical layer PHY06 to the extended application layer EXL06. In this case, the application software may be automatically installed on the system controller β_1128 as well, as described above. Therefore, for information communication in the communication middleware layer APL06 in this case, communication information conforming to E-format or A-format is mainly used. However, the system of this embodiment is not limited to this, and may also use C-format or W-format. In this case, the formats used by the physical layer PHY06 and the media access layer MAC06 are: ○ If the distance between systems α_1132 and β_1134 is large, L-format or G-format is used; ○ Systems α_1132 and β_1134 Z-format may be used when the distance between them is close. Although the L-format and G-format allow information communication anywhere in the world, they take a relatively long time to communicate, while the Z-format limits the communication range but takes a relatively long time to communicate. It has short characteristics. Therefore, by switching the format to be used depending on the distance between the two formats, it is possible to use the advantages of both formats as appropriate.

As an application example of the system of this embodiment, consider a case where FIG. 1 and FIG. 8B coexist. In this case, the system controller β_1128 (FIG. 1) in a different system β_1134 may directly access the composite modules 1460, 1470 in the system α_1132. The communication method in this case is that the system controller β_1128 shown in FIG. 1 is placed in place of the server n_1116-n in FIG. 10A, and the network line outside the system in FIG. 10A is replaced with a network line within the same domain. . Therefore, in this case, the L-format, G-format, A-format, E-format, or W format may be used as communication information within the same domain network line 2082. Furthermore, the system of this embodiment is not limited to this, and may also use, for example, the Z-format or the C-format. Further, similarly to the above, the format may be automatically switched between the Z-format and the L/G-format depending on the distance between the composite module (in the system α_1132) and the system controller β_1128. By the way, the detailed method using the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 in this case will be described in detail later in Section 2.8.

Section 2.2 Relationship between hierarchical structure of communication-related functions and communication information on network lines The relationship with the information content is shown in FIG. Whether network communication media is wired or wireless, communication information is intermittently transmitted in chunks over these physical communication media. This chunk corresponds to the physical layer frame PPDU in FIG. 11(f). Here, in the case of a single channel (single correspondent), communication of other communication information is not possible when the chunk (physical layer frame PPDU) is transmitted on the network communication medium. Therefore, if the size of the chunk (physical layer frame PPDU) is too large, the time taken to occupy the network communication medium becomes longer, and there is a risk of interfering with other communications. In order to solve the above problem, in the system of this embodiment, the data size of one physical layer frame PPDU is set to 127 bytes or less. This has the effect of reducing the adverse effect of inhibiting other information communication due to one physical layer frame PPDU communication within the network system. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11(a), within this one physical layer frame PPDU, the physical layer header PHYHD is sent in the order of transmission from the sending side to the receiving side (from the beginning or from the earliest information sending timing). , MAC layer header MACHD, IPv6 header IPv6HD, TCP header TCPHD, communication middleware data APLDT, extension data EXDT, and error check CRC. On the other hand, if this data arrangement is viewed from the perspective of FIG. It can also be said that the MAC layer header MACHD, IPv6 header IPv6HD, TCP header TCPHD, communication middleware data APLDT, extension data EXDT, and error check CRC are sequentially stored in the layer data/payload PSDU.

By the way, in the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 shown in FIGS. 10A and 16 to 17B, the entire physical layer frame PPDU is processed. Here, the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 represent a concept that abstracts "functions that deal with physical communication media." On the other hand, actual processing corresponding to each function from physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 to Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 is executed inside communication modules 1768 and 1202-3 and communication control unit 1700 (FIG. 10A). Ru. By the way, in this section 2.2, in order to make it easier to explain the relationship between the functions of each layer and the communication information communicated on the network line, we will explain in detail the information delivery procedure for each layer. However, the communication information is not limited to this, and communication information may be created by partially omitting information delivery for each layer. For example, at the time of transmission, inside the communication modules 1768, 1202-3 or the communication control unit 1700 (FIG. 10A), the information provided from the communication middleware layers APL02, APL06 (actually, inside the processors 1230, 1738 or the communication module 1660 in FIG. 10A) The information (data structure) shown in FIG. 11(a) is directly created from the communication middleware data APLDT (given from the interface section of (send). Furthermore, during reception, only the necessary physical layer frames PPDU are selected and extracted from the network lines 1782 and 1788 within the communication modules 1768 and 1202-3 and the communication control unit 1700 (FIG. 10A), and the communication middleware data APLDT and extension data EXDT ( Alternatively, the communication middleware data APLDT only) may be extracted and passed to the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (actually, the processors 1230 and 1738 in FIG. 10A or the interface unit in the communication module 1660).

The detailed receiving side functions carried out by the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 include identifying the contents of the physical layer header PHYHD located at the beginning position in the received physical layer frame PPDU, and identifying the contents of the physical layer header PHYHD located at the beginning position in the received physical layer frame PPDU, and identifying the contents of the physical layer header PHYHD located immediately after that, and identifying the contents of the physical layer header PHYHD located at the beginning position in the received physical layer frame PPDU, and The entire physical layer payload PSDU is delivered to the media access layer MAC02 and MAC06. Therefore, from the perspective of the media access layer MAC02 and MAC06, this physical layer data or the entire physical layer payload PSDU corresponds to the MAC layer frame MPDU. On the other hand, the detailed transmission side functions of the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 include storing the MAC layer frame MPDU received from the media access layer MAC02 and MAC06 in physical layer data or physical layer payload PSDU, and storing the physical layer header PHYHD. The physical layer frame PPDU configured by adding it to the beginning is transmitted via network lines 1782 and 1788.

As shown in FIG. 11E, the MAC layer frame MPDU is composed of a MAC layer header MACHD, MAC layer data/payload MSDU, and an error check CRC in order from the beginning. At the time of reception, the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 use the communication information stored in the MAC layer header MACHD in the MAC layer frame MPDU passed from the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 to perform access support control on the communication medium. conduct. Specifically, the corresponding device 1250, composite module 1460, 1470, or system controller α_1126 extracts only the related MAC layer data/payload MSDU and passes it to the Internet Protocol version 6 layer_IPv6. On the other hand, during transmission, the information passed from Internet Protocol Version 6 Layer_IPv6 is stored in the MAC layer data/payload MSDU, a MAC layer frame MPDU is added with a MAC layer header MACHD, and the MAC layer frame MPDU is sent to the MAC layer frame MPDU side. hand over.

It is possible to check whether there is a data error in the MAC layer frame MPDU (or extract the location where a data error occurs) by using the false check CRC (Fig. 11(e)) added to the last position in the MAC layer frame MPDU. becomes. Specifically, a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Checksum) code is used as the error check CRC in this embodiment. This is the remainder value in binary representation when the entire MAC layer header MACHD and MAC layer data/payload MSDU are divided by a predetermined code (a chain of "1" or "0") in the MAC layer frame MPDU. (remainder). Then, at the time of transmission, the error check CRC calculated using the above method is added to the last position within the MAC layer frame MPDU. Also, at the time of reception, the MAC layer header MACHD obtained and the remainder value obtained when the entire MAC layer data/payload MSDU is divided by the above code are compared with the error check CRC obtained at the time of reception. If both companies agree, it is considered "no error." If there is an error, the error location can be extracted by performing inverse calculation from the error check CRC obtained at the time of reception. Here, the error correction capability (that is, the size of the error correctable area within the entire error correction target data (in this case, the entire MAC layer frame MPDU) including this false check CRC) is determined by the data size of the false check CRC. Therefore, if the data size of the error check CRC is fixed, the smaller the data size of the entire error correction target data (MAC layer frame MPDU) including this error check CRC, the higher the relative error correction ability. The data reliability of the MAC layer frame MPDU (when taking into account) is improved.

Taking the above situation into consideration, the present embodiment is characterized in that the false check CRC is placed at the last position in the MAC layer frame, as shown in FIG. 11(e). As described in Section 2.3 using FIG. 12A, the physical layer header PHYHD contains a lot of relatively robust information. That is, even if some error bits are mixed in the physical layer header PHYHD, it is possible to automatically correct them by some means. On the other hand, the data precision required for the information in the MAC layer frame MPDU handled by the media access layer MAC02, MAC06 and above is extremely high. Therefore, by removing the relatively robust physical layer header PHYHD and adding an error correction function for the entire MAC layer frame to improve the relative error correction ability, the reliability of the entire communication information (physical layer frame PPDU) can be improved. It has the effect of relatively improving the

Next, as shown in FIG. 11(d), the IPv6 header IPv6HD is placed at the beginning, and the information consisting of the IPv6 data/payload IPv6DU that immediately follows is stored in the MAC layer data/payload MSDU. In the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6, at the time of transmission, a set of TCP header TCPHD, communication middleware data APLDT, and extension data EXDT is stored in IPv6 data/payload IPv6DU, and an IPv6 header IPv6HD is added to the media access layer MAC02. , pass it to MAC06. Furthermore, upon reception, the IPv6 header IPv6HD is extracted from the MAC layer data/payload MSDU passed from the media access layer MAC02 and MAC06, and after unique processing is performed, the communication middleware data APLDT and extension data EXDT (or The communication middleware data APLDT only) is passed to the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06.

The communication middleware data APLDT and extended data EXDT (or only the communication middleware data APLDT) shown in FIG. 11(b) are processed within the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06. Regarding the various service providing functions using network communication that are handled by the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06, the interfaces in the processors 1230, 1738, 2030, device controller 1240, or communication module 1660 shown in FIG. 10A and FIGS. 16 to 17B are This is realized through various processes performed by the department.

Section 2.3 Z-format data structure in the physical layer and media access layer Z-format that can be used in the physical layer PHY02 and media access layer MAC02 that support the network circuit 1782 in the same system (see Figure 10A and Figure 16) ) A specific example of the data structure in the physical header PHYHD and the MAC layer header MACHD is shown in FIG. 12A. By the way, the Z-format described below is only one example used within the system of this embodiment, and other formats compatible with the network circuit 1782 within the same system may be used. Furthermore, the information communicated on the network circuit 1782 within the same system is not limited to the hierarchical structure of the physical layer PHY02 and the media access layer MAC02, but information that does not have a hierarchical structure or information that corresponds to another hierarchical structure may be used. You may use it.

First, the data structure in FIG. 12A(c) is the same as the content in FIG. 11(a). As shown in FIG. 12A(b), the physical layer header PHYHD consists of the synchronization header SYNC placed in the first 5 bytes and the physical layer data/payload length information LPSDU placed 1 byte immediately after. configured. Therefore, the data size of this physical layer header PHYHD is 6 bytes (5+1). By the way, this physical layer data/payload length information LPSDU represents the data size of the physical layer data/payload PSDU in FIG. 11(f), and is set in bytes. As already explained at the beginning of Section 2.2, the maximum data size of the entire physical layer frame PPDU is set to 127 bytes. Therefore, a value of 121 bytes (127-6) or less is set in this physical layer data/payload length information LPSDU.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12A(a), the synchronization header SYNC is composed of a 5-byte preamble PRM placed first and then a 1-byte physical layer frame start information SFD. [00000000h] (here, "h" indicates a hexadecimal value) is set as this preamble PRM. Here, since a Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum method is adopted for signal modulation, a synchronization signal can be obtained from the preamble PRM section, which is all "0". [A7h] is set in the area of the physical layer frame start information SFD. When the hexadecimal value [A7h] is converted into a binary value, it becomes "10100111".

How to use the communication information in the physical layer header PHYHD in the communication control unit 1700 or the communication modules 1768, 1202-3 in the communication module 1660 in FIG. 10A, or in the communication modules 1202-4, 2002 in FIGS. 16 to 17B. explain. The communication information in the physical layer header PHYHD is mainly used for chip synchronization and bit synchronization on the receiving side. That is, the communication module has a built-in oscillator (PLL circuit: Phase Lock Loop Circuit) whose frequency and phase can be automatically synchronized. This oscillator (PLL circuit) automatically synchronizes the frequency and phase according to the preamble PRM (chip synchronization). Next, the position of the physical layer frame start information SFD is detected using a technique such as pattern matching, and (1) it is recognized that the Z-format is used for the physical layer PHY02, and the sequence of binary bits 1/0 is detected. The start bit position of the MAC layer header MACHD is detected (bit synchronization) from among the MAC layer headers MACHD.

As shown in FIG. 12A(d), the MAC layer header MACHD contains control information MACNTL, MAC layer frame control information, and It consists of areas for storing the MAC layer sequence number MASQNM and address information MADRS.

In the control information MACNTL area of the first MAC layer frame, information for controlling the entire MAC layer frame MPDU (FIG. 11(f)) is stored in 2 bytes. As detailed information in the control information MACNTL of the MAC layer frame, information indicating the type of the MAC layer frame MPDU is stored in the first three bits. Here, as specific types, identification information such as "beacon", "data", "ACK (Acknowledgement)", and "command frame type" is stored. The next 1 bit stores security information. Further, the next 1 bit stores information on the presence or absence of pending data, and the 1 bit immediately after that stores information on the presence or absence of the Acknowledgment message request.

Then, with the next bit, is the corresponding information communication limited to communication within the PAN (Private Area Network)? Is the communication across multiple PANs? Information indicating the is stored. As already explained using FIG. 1 or FIG. 8A, in the system of this embodiment, one PAN may correspond to one system α_1132, or may correspond to one section 1142. Therefore, the method of setting the above information may be changed depending on which one is to be used. However, when Z-format is used for information communication within the same domain network line 2082, information corresponding to "communication across multiple PANs" may be stored in this information area. This is because, as shown in FIG. 1, the system of this embodiment allows a situation in which the distance between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128 within the same domain 2_1122-2 is large (that is, they protrude from one PAN). Therefore, in this case, information corresponding to "communication across multiple PANs" is stored in the storage area. On the other hand, if the portable system controller β_1128 is moved closer to the system controller α_1126 (if moved within the same PAN), the above storage area will contain information corresponding to "communication within the PAN". Store.

Then, the two bits immediately after that and the last two bits of the control information MACNTL (2 bytes) of the MAC layer frame store address and mode information for each of the receiving side and the transmitting side. Here, as the Z-format, IEEE extended addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS may be specified, or shortened addresses may be specified. As shown in FIG. 12A(e), the system of this embodiment is characterized in that both the receiving and transmitting sides use the IEEE extended addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS as the address mode information. The system of this embodiment not only performs network communication via the system controller α_1126 and the communication modules 1202-3 to 6 built into the devices 1250-1 to 3 as shown in FIG. 8A, but also performs sensor/ Network communication is possible via composite modules such as communication modules 1460-1 to 1460-5 and drive/communication modules 1470-1 and 1470-2. Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, the IEEE extended addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS are used in this address mode at the level of the media access layer MAC02 to communicate with the communication modules 1202-3 to 1202-4. Or composite modules 1460-1 to 5, 1470-1, 2? (Details will be described later using FIG. 12B(e)), (1) high-speed switching of the communication middleware layer APL02 on the receiving side (C-format? Other format?) (2) The effect of making it easier to discover errors on the transmitting side that should occur (recognition of communication modules 1202-3 to 4? Or composite modules 1460-1 to 5, 1470-1, 2?) occurs.

Next, a description will be given of the information storage area for the sequence number MASQNM of the MAC layer, which has a data size of 1 byte and is shown in FIG. 12A(d). As described above, in the system of this embodiment, the data size of the entire physical layer frame PPDU is set to 127 bytes or less. Therefore, when the combined data size of communication middleware data APLDT and extension data EXDT (see FIG. 11(b)) increases, only one physical layer frame PPDU is insufficient for communication (transmission) of this information. This risk becomes particularly high when A-format or E-format is used as the communication middleware layer APL06. As a countermeasure for this, in the system of this embodiment, the communication middleware data APLDT and the extension data EXDT are divided into 256 (2 to the 8th power) physical layer frames PPDU to enable transmission (communication). Specifically, the communication middleware data APLDT and the extension data EXDT are divided into a plurality of parts and sequentially transmitted (communicated) over the network line. In this case, the physical layer header PHYHD and the IPv6 header IPv6HD (and TCP header TCP) shown in FIG. 11(a) all have the same information content. Then, a value (incremented value) starting from "0" is stored in the area of the sequence number MASQNM of the MAC layer in accordance with the transmission (communication) order on the network line. As a result, the order of divided transmission of the communication middleware data APLDT and extension data EXDT is determined, so even if the receiving order of physical layer frames PPDU is changed due to network trouble, stable information communication is possible.

The data structure shown in FIG. 12B(c) is exactly the same as FIG. 12A(e), so the address information MADRS in the MAC header MACHD will be explained using FIG. 12B. In the system of this embodiment shown in FIG. 1, one system α_1132 may be formed by a single PAN (Private Area Network), or may be formed by a combination of a plurality of PANs. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited thereto, and each section 1142-1 to 1142-m within the same system α_1132 may be formed by one or more PANs. In this way, when one system α_1132 is composed of a plurality of PANs, the system controller α_1126 needs to manage the plurality of PANs. Information communication is performed across different PANs within the same system α_1132. In order to cope with this situation, the system controller α_1126 allocates PAN-specific identification information for each PAN, and as shown in FIG. An area for storing information DPANID and SPANID is set within the address information MADRS storage area.

The IEEE extended addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS on both the receiving side and the transmitting side are composed of storage areas for each piece of information: a 1-byte extended IEEE extended address EXEXADRS and an 8-byte IEEE 802.15.4-compliant chip-by-chip setting address ADRSIEEE. Here, this IEEE802.15.4-compliant chip-by-chip setting address ADRSIEEE refers to all communication modules 1202-3 to 6 and sensor/communication modules 1460-1 to 5 that comply with the IEEE802.15.4 standard worldwide. This refers to a unique number assigned in advance to each composite module such as drive/communication modules 1470-1 and 1470-2. And this unique number does not overlap on a global level between different communication modules or composite modules. By the way, this unique number is assigned before shipping the communication modules 1202-3 to 1202-6 and the composite module, but the unique number may be obtained by directly applying to IEEE. When this unique number is issued by the IEEE or a designated official organization, the organization that issues the unique number will provide information on the individual performance and functions of the composite module, as well as communication information when communicating in the C-format. Obtain information such as type (category and template type used for information communication). Therefore, from the information of this IEEE802.15.4-compliant chip-by-chip setting address ADRSIEEE, it is possible to not only know the functions and performance of each target composite module, but also to officially predict the type of communication information using C-format. , there is an effect that advance preparation for corresponding processing in the communication middleware layer APL02 can be performed quickly and easily.

Next, an example of the data structure in the expanded IEEE extension address EXEXADRS (Expanded IEEE Extension Address) in the system of this embodiment is shown in FIG. 12B(e). The first bit of this is an area where module structure information MST can be stored. When this 1 bit is [0], it represents the communication modules 1202-3 to 6 built in the system controller α_1126 or the devices 1250-1 to 3. On the other hand, when this bit is [1], it indicates that the corresponding node has a composite module structure. Furthermore, the information stored in the next 1-bit area means composite module structure information CMST. When this bit is [0], the corresponding node indicates a sensor/communication module, and when this bit is [1], the corresponding node indicates a drive/communication module.

The sense information sent from the sensor/communication module at the site starts from binary light level (whether the lighting is ON or OFF) and multi-value light level (corresponding to illuminance), and covers a wide variety of things such as the sense of presence and temperature. . Furthermore, as explained in Section 1.5 using Figures 6A to 6D, the information that controls the drive/communication module is diverse, such as ON/OFF binary or multi-value information, or equipment remote control information. There is. Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, an area is provided in which information identifying the type of the sensor/communication module 1460 or drive/communication module 1470 corresponding to the node can be recorded as composite module type identification information CMTID in 6 bits. However, in contrast to the method of setting information CNTID to identify the type of each composite module 1460 and 1470, the A-format uses the number attribute in <table> Element as a method of identifying the type of device 1250 (Fig. 15B), and the E-format uses exchange information type identification information EPC (see the explanation in Section 2.6 using FIG. 15A(f)). Therefore, this composite module type identification information CMTID may be used as the exchange information type identification information 1840 shown in FIG. 10B. As with A-format and E-format, by using this composite module type identification information CMTID, multi-value/binary transmission data parts CTMDT and CT2DT (Fig. 14(d)) conforming to C-format can be used. (described later in Section 2.5) has the effect of making it easier to interpret the meaning of the data stored. Furthermore, the address information MADRS can be read by comparing this module structure information MST, composite module structure information CMST, and composite module type identification information CMTID with the target node function expected from the IEEE 802.15.4-compliant chip-specific setting address ADRSIEEE. This also has the effect of improving accuracy and reliability. In other words, if the transmitting side accidentally records different information in the storage area for the module structure information MST, composite module structure information CMST, and composite module type identification information CMTID, or if the receiving side accidentally records the reproduction information during reproduction. If a bit shift (erroneous reproduction) occurs, the error can be easily detected by the above comparison. (In this case, the receiving side issues an alarm notification to the transmitting side. For example, the communication access control information 1830 in FIG. 14(d) is set to [000], and the multilevel transmission data part CTMDT and binary transmission Set [00011] together with the data part CT2DT. Details will be described later in Section 2.5.) Section 2.4 Internet Protocol Version 6-layer data structure In Section 2.4 of this book, the Internet Protocol Version The data structure within communication information compatible with 6-layer IPv6 will be explained using FIG. 13. A major feature here is that it has an area for storing IP address information SIPADRS and DIPADRS of the sending side and receiving side, each described in 16 bytes as shown in FIG. 13(b). This IP address is set separately for all communication modules and composite modules around the world. And the IP addresses set individually for all communication modules and composite modules around the world do not overlap with each other. Therefore, by making it possible to communicate information including the IPv6 header IPv6HD (Fig. 13(a)) within the system of this embodiment, if it is placed in the same domain 2_1122-2 (Fig. 1), it can be identified from anywhere in the world. This has the effect of enabling information communication between the communication module and a specific composite module.

IP packet related information IPPKT is stored in the first 8-byte area shown in FIG. 13(b) in the IPv6 header IPv6HD. Also, as shown in FIG. 13(c), head information SIPHD, IPv6 data/payload length information LIPv6DU, identification information NXHD of the header type immediately following the IPv6 header, and information HPLMT on the remaining number of nodes that can be passed are stored therein. and are arranged in the above order. This IPv6 data/payload length information LIPv6DU indicates the data size of the IPv6 data/payload IPv6DU shown in FIG. 11(d), and the area for storing this information has a size of 2 bytes.

Next, the header type identification information NXHD that immediately follows the above-mentioned IPv6 header will be explained. As shown in FIG. 11(a), various headers are sequentially stored within one physical layer frame PPDU. Then, the header type that immediately follows the IPv6 header IPv6HD is specified by the header type identification information NXHD that immediately follows the IPv6 header. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 11A, "TCP header TCPHD" is specified as the header type identification information NXHD that immediately follows the IPv6 header. The header type identification information NXHD that immediately follows this IPv6 header makes it possible to specify the communication route setting method on the communication network (on the Internet). In the system of this embodiment, the information content stored in the physical layer frame PPDU is not limited to that shown in FIG. 11(a), and other information may be stored. For example, as another application, another type of header information may be placed immediately after the IPv6 header IPv6HD. As a specific example, UDP (User Datagram Protocol) may be used instead of TCP (Trasmission Control Protocol) shown in FIG. 13, and the UDP header may be placed immediately after the IPv6 header IPv6HD. As a further application example, direct communication middleware data APLDT may be placed/stored immediately after the IPv6 header IPv6HD. For example, when using the E-format as this communication middleware data APLDT, as described later in Section 2.6 using FIG. information is arranged/stored. Therefore, in this case, the header type identification information NXHD that immediately follows the IPv6 header specifies information that identifies the "E-format header E-HD."

The information communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 using the network line outside the system 1788 shown in FIG. As described above, information is rarely communicated directly between the two, and in many cases information is communicated via multiple relay points (relay nodes) in the middle of the network line outside the system 1788 or in the middle of the network line 2082 within the same domain. Ru. Then, the maximum number of relay points (relay nodes) allowed between the transmitting side node and the receiving side node in the middle of the communication circuit is determined by the passable node remaining number information HPLMT in FIG. ). For example, when information is communicated between the two, the transmitting node first sets the value of the passable node remaining number information HPLMT. Next, each time this communication information passes (relays) a relay point (relay node) in the middle of the communication circuit, the value of the remaining number of passable nodes information HPLMT is decremented by "1" (i.e. When passing through a relay point (relay node) once, the value of the remaining number of passable nodes information HPLMT after passing is updated to the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value of the remaining number of passable nodes information HPLMT before passing.) . Then, when the value of the remaining passable node number information HPLMT becomes "0", information communication on the network is discarded. By the way, since this passable node remaining number information HPLMT is described in 1 byte, it is possible to pass through up to 256 (2 to the 8th power) relay points (relay nodes).

However, as the number of relay points (relay nodes) increases, the time required for communication from the sending side to the receiving side (time required for information transmission) increases. On the other hand, when transmitting urgent information such as "alarm notification", it is necessary to shorten the communication time. Now, considering the information transfer time at this relay point (relay node), it is necessary to set the number of relay points (relay node) to 100 or less, preferably 10 or less. Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, in information communication using the network line outside the system 1788 or the network line within the same domain 2082, the setting value of the remaining passable node number information HPLMT on the sending side is set to 100 or less, preferably 10 or less. The place has its own characteristics. Naturally, the remaining passable node number information HPLMT is reset (updated) within a relay point (relay node) that is passed through an external network line 1788 or an intra-domain network line 2082 that is applied to the system of this embodiment. The value is also 100 or less, preferably 10 or less. In this way, when the value of the remaining passable node number information HPLMT becomes small, the router placed at a relay point (relay node) on the way to the network line outside the system 1788 or the network line within the same domain 2082 automatically reaches the receiving node. Find the shortest route to the destination and prevent information communication from being interrupted midway. As a result of the above, the time required for communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 or between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128 can be shortened, and the effect is that it is possible to quickly communicate urgent information such as "alarm notification". Yes.

On the other hand, information communication forms using the same system network line 1782 in the system of this embodiment include information communication between the system controller α_1126 and the composite modules 1460 and 1470 shown in FIG. 10A, and information communication between the system controller α_1126 and the device 1260 shown in FIG. Information communication becomes possible. If a plurality of sections 1142 constitute one system as shown in FIG. 1, and a different PAN (Personal Area Network) is used for each section 1142, for example, network communication across the plurality of PANs becomes necessary. In this case, information transfer processing at a relay point (relay node) is required every time communication information crosses different adjacent PANs. Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, even in information communication using the same system network line 1782, it is necessary to define the upper limit of the number of relay points (relay nodes) relayed between the sending node and the receiving node. As shown in FIG. 5, the composite module used in the system of this embodiment receives power from a built-in power storage module (battery) 1554. Each time communication information is transferred as a relay point (relay node), the power stored in the power storage module (battery) 1554 is consumed. Therefore, in information communication using the network line 1782 within the same system, it is necessary to reduce the number of communication information transfers at relay points (relay nodes) as much as possible. Considering the relationship between the amount of power consumed for one transfer of communication information and the amount of power stored in the power storage module (battery) 1554, the number of relay points (relay nodes) along the way is 30 or less, preferably 10 or less. It is appropriate to set it to . Therefore, when information communication is performed on the same system network line 1782 in the system of this embodiment, the value of the remaining passable node number information HPLMT is set to 30 or less, preferably 10 or less in the sending node. It has great characteristics. This prevents unnecessary waste of the amount of power stored in the power storage module 1554 built into the composite module, and has the effect of stably maintaining network communication within the system of this embodiment over a long period of time.

As shown in FIG. 13(d), the area of the start information SIPHD in the IPv6 header IPv6HD is composed of areas in which version information IPVRS, communication class information IPCLS, and communication type label information IPLBL are stored, and from the start They are arranged in the order listed above. Here, the area where the version information IPVRS is stored is composed of 4 bits, and the value "6" ("0110" in binary notation) is stored as the Internet protocol version number.

Communication type label information IPLBL is stored in an area consisting of 2.5 bytes, which is set immediately before the area where the above-mentioned IPv6 data/payload length information LIPv6DU is stored. However, if the combined data size of communication middleware data APLDT and extension data EXDT (Fig. 11(b)) becomes large, they are divided and distributed (stored) in multiple physical layer frames PPDU. The method of communication was explained in Section 2.3. At this time, a method has been described in which a sequentially incremented value is stored in the area of the MAC layer sequence number MASQNM in the MAC layer header MACHD so that the transmission order among the plurality of physical layer frames PPDUs can be known. In parallel, the system of this embodiment identifies the entire same communication middleware data APLDT (and extended data EXDT) when distributed and stored in multiple different IPv6 data/payload IPv6DUs (see FIG. 11(d)). In order to do this, the above communication type label information IPLBL is used. The contents of this communication type label information IPLBL are first set within the sending node (before network communication). Therefore, when a set (series) of communication information contents of communication middleware data APLDT (and extended data EXDT) related to the provision of the same service is distributed (stored) in multiple IPv6 data/payload IPv6DUs and communicated. The same label information is commonly stored in the storage area of all the corresponding communication type label information IPLBL and communicated. However, in the system of this embodiment, information communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 using the network line 1788 outside the system shown in FIG. 1250, or between system controller α_1126 and system controller β_1128 using network line 2082 within the same domain. By changing the content of "communication type label information IPLBL" for each communication middleware data APLDT (and extended data EXDT) related to providing different services, communication middleware data APLDT (and extended data EXDT) related to providing multiple different services can be changed. At the same time, the effect of enabling communication between the two is created. As a result, information regarding the provision of multiple different services can be communicated at the same time between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 (or between the system controller α_1126 and the device 1250, or between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128). Services can be provided simultaneously. Furthermore, by combining this "communication type label information IPLBL" with the information of the MAC layer sequence number MASQNM in the MAC layer header MACHD described above, another effect is obtained that the reliability confirmation accuracy of communication information at the time of reception is further improved. to be born. In addition, as another application example, the same information commonly stored in "communication type label information IPLBL" is used as an "encryption key" for communication middleware data APLDT (and extended data EXDT) related to the provision of the same service. You may do so.

The communication class information IPCLS shown in FIG. 13(d) is used to indicate the communication class during network communication. In particular, this communication class information IPCLS is assumed to be mainly used in layers higher than the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 (ie, communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 and extended application layer EXL06) in FIG. 10A. The expanded IEEE extended address EXEXADRS has already been explained using FIGS. 12B(d) and (e) in Section 2.3. As an application example of the system of this embodiment, ○Abolish the storage area for the extended IEEE extended address EXEXADRS in the IEEE extended addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS on the receiving and transmitting sides. In the storage area, only the information of each IEEE802.15.4-compliant chip-specific address ADRSIEEE is stored (that is, the IEEE extended addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS on the receiving and transmitting sides are each IEEE802.15.4-compliant chip-specific address ADRSIEEE). ○ Store the information of the per-chip setting address ADRSIEEE based on IEEE802.15.4 in the storage area of the above communication class information IPCLS (that is, match the above communication class information IPCLS with IEEE802.15. 4-compliant chip-by-chip setting address ADRSIEEE).

As already explained using FIG. 10A in Section 2.2, the function of Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 is handled by the communication modules 1768, 1202-3 or the communication control unit 1700 in the communication module 1660. The processors 1738 and 1230 or the interface section 1710 in the communication module 1660 are responsible for the service provision function corresponding to the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 and the extended application layer EXL06. Therefore, the information before the TCP header TCPHD including the inside of the IPv6 header IPv6HD in FIG. Similarly, communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) are processed within processors 1738 and 1230 or interface section 1710 within communication module 1660. When the physical layer frame PPDU is received, the communication class information IPCLS is first processed in the communication control unit 1700 in the communication module 1768, 1202-3 or the communication module 1660, and then the communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) is delivered to the processor 1738, 1230 or the interface unit 1710 in the communication module 1660. Therefore, by storing the expanded IEEE extension address EXEXADRS explained in FIGS. 12B (d) and (e) in the IPv6 header IPv6HD (in the communication class information IPCLS storage area), before receiving the communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT). Composite module support can be prepared in advance within processor 1738, 1230 or communication module 1660. This has the effect of improving the processing speed of the system controller α_1126 for communication information transmitted from the composite module.

Section 2.5 C-format data structure in the communication middleware layer The “C-format” used within the system of this embodiment is the data structure on the network line 1782 within the same system, which was explained using FIG. 10A in Section 2.1. It is mainly intended for use within the communication middleware layer APL02, which communicates information to the composite modules 1460 and 1470. Furthermore, as explained at the end of Section 2.1, this C-format may be used when communicating information between the system controller β_1128 in different systems β_1134 and the communication modules 1460 and 1470 in system α_1132. good. Furthermore, it may also be used for information communication with the device 1250. Here, in this C-format, the extended application layer EXL06 (see FIG. 10A) is not defined and is used only within the communication middleware layer APL02.

In order to reduce the processing load on the communication modules 1460 and 1470 as much as possible, the C-format data structure is simplified as much as possible. As a specific method for simplifying the data structure, a data structure is created in which duplication of information in the area from the physical layer header PHYHD to the TCP header TCPHD in FIG. 11A is avoided as much as possible. (Details and effects will be described later.) As a specific example, instead of having the size information of this communication middleware data APLDT in the communication middleware data APLDT, the IPv6 data/payload length information LIPv6DU in the IPv6 header IPv6HD is also used. Here, this IPv6 data/payload length information LIPv6DU indicates the data size of the IPv6 data/payload IPv6DU in FIG. 11(d). Since the data size of the TCP header TCPHD is determined in advance, the data size of the communication middleware data APLDT is automatically determined from this IPv6 data/payload length information LIPv6DU, as shown in FIGS. 14(c) and 14(d). The basic data size of communication middleware data APLDT in C-format is defined as 1 byte. However, depending on the content of the communication information between the composite modules 1460 and 1470, the data size of the communication middleware data APLDT may be reduced from 1 byte by adding extended transmission data CEDT to the end as shown in FIG. 14(d). It may be expanded.

As already explained in Section 2.1 using FIG. 10B, exchange access control information 1830 is included in exchange information (table) 1810 used for information communication in A-format or E-format. Even in the C-format, this exchange access control information 1830 can be stored in "3-bit format". In particular, by writing the information in 3 bits (=describing 8 types of control information), it is possible to identify a variety of exchanged access control information 1830. As a specific control method, when the command (command issuance) 1852 described in case 1 of FIG. 10B is issued, a reset instruction of [111] is set as this exchange access control information 1830. When replying with result report (status) 1854, response reply or report notification of [010] or acknowledgment notification of [001] is set as this exchange access control information 1830.

In the system of this embodiment, the threshold value (reference level when converting into a binary signal) for converting the analog detected signal by the sensor section in the sensor/communication module 1460 into binary information and communicating the information is set externally. It is now possible. When setting this threshold, a threshold level setting instruction [110] is set as the exchange access control information 1830 in response to the command (command issue) 1852 in case 1 of FIG. 10B.

On the other hand, in response to the response request (request) 1872 of case 2 in FIG. 10B, a response (data) request of [011] is set as this exchange access control information 1830. In the response 1874, a response answer/report notification of [010] is set as the exchange access control information 1830.

In addition, in response to the periodic/irregular report 1894 voluntarily performed from the composite module 1460, 1470 side in case 3 in FIG. . If an abnormality is discovered in the composite modules 1460 and 1470, an alarm notification is issued by setting [000] in the exchange access control information 1830 as the non-periodic report described above. Furthermore, when periodic reporting is performed voluntarily from the composite modules 1460 and 1470, a time interval for periodic reporting can be set from the system controller α_1126. In this case, [101] is set in the exchange access control information 1830 to give an instruction regarding the report interval.

For example, consider a case where the smart meter 1124 in FIG. 8A reports the amount of power used (public consumption materials) to the system controller α_1126, the server n_1116-n, or the wholesaler A_1102 at the specified time interval. In this case, there are two methods: reporting the instantaneous value of the instantaneous power consumption (public consumption materials) and reporting the value integrated at every predetermined period. In response to this situation, the system of this embodiment sets [100] in the exchange access control information 1830 to issue an instruction regarding the data storage interval. Here, if [00000] is specified in the area to store the transmission data set immediately after the storage area of this exchange access control information 1830, the instantaneous usage amount (the usage of public consumption materials such as electricity) amount) is reported from the composite module at specified time intervals.

As shown in FIG. 14(d), the storage area of the multi-level transmission data part CTMDT consisting of 4 bits is set immediately after the storage area of this exchange access control information 1830, and the binary transmission consisting of 1 bit. Binary or multi-value transmission data is transmitted by the storage area of the data portion CT2DT. The feature here is that the transmitted data does not have a special information storage area indicating either binary or multi-value, and the transmitted data is used to identify binary/multi-value. That is, when the transmission data is binary, all values of the 4-bit multi-value transmission data section CTMDT are set to "0" (ie, [0000]). Here, when indicating an ON state or an OK state, [1] is set in this binary transmission data section CT2DT. Further, when indicating an OFF state or an NG (No) state, [0] is set in this binary transmission data section CT2DT. On the other hand, a transmission data setting method will be described when an abnormal situation occurs in the composite modules 1460 and 1470 and an alarm notification is sent to the system controller α_1126 ([000] is set in the exchange access control information 1830). In this case, [0000] is set in the multilevel transmission data section CTMDT. When the abnormality of the composite modules 1460 and 1470 is a detection abnormality of the sensor or an abnormality of the drive system of the drive unit (uncontrollable/difficult to control), [1] is set in the binary transmission data section CT2DT. As shown in FIG. 5, since a power storage module (battery) 1554 is built into the sensor/communication module 1460 or the drive/communication module, there is always a risk of the power storage being depleted (remaining power running out). Therefore, when the remaining amount in the power storage module (battery) 1554 becomes low, [0] is set in the binary transmission data section CT2DT to notify the system controller α_1126 of the decrease in the remaining battery amount.

On the other hand, when information is communicated using multi-value transmission data, the multi-value data is expressed using a 5-bit signal that is a combination of the multi-value transmission data section CTMDT and the binary transmission data section CT2DT. For example, when storing multi-value information from 0% to 100% as transmission data, convert the multi-value from 0% to 100% into values divided by 30, from [00010] (= equivalent to 0%) to [11111]. ] (=corresponds to 100%). However, the system of this embodiment is not limited to this, and multi-value information may be expressed in other ways by combining the multi-value transmission data section CTMDT and the binary transmission data section CT2DT. In addition, the binary transmission data section CT2DT is used for communication of high-precision sense information and high-precision setting of threshold values or control values, for example, when detecting temperature and humidity or changing the illuminance of lighting equipment, where values divided into 30 parts are insufficiently expressed. Immediately after the area for storing extended transmission data CEDT, an area for storing extended transmission data CEDT can be added to improve the accuracy of expressing multivalued information. Further, the number of bits used for multi-value expression at this time is indicated based on the IPv6 data/payload length information LIPv6DU in the IPv6 header IPv6HD, as described above.

In this way, by not having a binary/multi-value identifier and identifying binary/multi-value based on the contents of the transmitted data, the data size of the communication middleware data APLDT can be reduced. As a result, information communication congestion on the network line 1782 within the same system is alleviated, and processing within the composite modules 1460 and 1470 (particularly within the interface unit 1710 shown in FIG. 10A) is simplified and composite The cost of the modules 1460 and 1470 can be reduced.

Furthermore, there is no area for storing information indicating the meaning of transmission data expressed in multi-values in the communication middleware data APLDT conforming to the C-format. Instead, the system of this embodiment utilizes the information of the per-chip setting address ADRSIEEE compliant with IEEE802.15.4 in FIG. 12B(d) as information indicating the meaning of the transmission data expressed in multi-values. It has characteristics. As already explained in Section 2.3, the issuing agency of this IEEE802.15.4-compliant chip-by-chip setting address ADRSIEEE knows the functions and performance of the composite modules 1460 and 1470 corresponding to the above address. By publishing this information on the Internet, it is possible to understand the meaning of the transmitted data that corresponds to the composite module that corresponds to the IEEE 802.15.4-compliant chip-specific address ADRSIEEE. Furthermore, from the explanation in Section 2.3 using FIG. 12B(e) and the explanation in Section 2.4 using FIG. , SEXADRS or communication class information IPCLS in the IPv6 header IPv6HD can store composite module type identification information CMTID. Therefore, by combining the above-mentioned IEEE 802.15.4 compliant chip-by-chip setting address ADRSIEEE and this composite module type identification information CMTID, transmission (for example, expressed in multi-value) can be performed between the composite modules 1460 and 1470. Able to accurately understand the meanings of data CTMDT, CT2DT, and CEDT and how to interpret them. Since it can be used for the meaning and interpretation of the transmission data CTMDT, CT2DT, and CEDT in this way, the above composite module type identification information CMTID can be used as the exchange information type identification information 1840 (see FIG. 10B) corresponding to each composite module 1460 and 1470. related to. That is, the above composite module type identification information CMTID can be used for the same purpose as the number attribute (see FIG. 15B(b)) in the <table> Element in the A-format, which will be described later in Section 2.7. On the other hand, this exchange information type identification information 1840 corresponds to exchange information type identification information EPC (see the explanation in Section 2.6 using FIG. 15A(f)) in the E-format. In this way, for both the E-format and the A-format, the exchange information type identification information 1840 of FIG. 10B is included in the communication middleware data APLDT.

Compared to the above E-format and A-format, in the C-format, the information in the MAC layer header MACHD (composite module type identification in FIG. 12B(e)) is related to the exchange information type identification information 1840 in FIG. A major feature is that the information in the IPv6 header IPv6HD (information in the communication class information in FIG. 13(d) according to the explanation in Section 2.4) can be used. As already explained in Section 2.2, at the time of reception, communication information is processed in order from the lower layer in FIG. 10A. Therefore, whether the target node is the sensor/communication module 1460 at the functional level of the media access layer MAC02 located at a relatively lower layer or the functional level of the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6? Or drive/communication module 1470? If not only the identification of the composite module but also the type of the composite module is known in advance, before the communication middleware data APLDT is passed from the communication control section 1700 in the communication module 1660 to the interface section 1710 (shown in FIG. 10A), the interface section can be identified in advance. This has the effect of making preparations for C-format support within the 1710. Thereby, communication information processing on the receiving side can be speeded up.

Furthermore, as described above, in the C-format, information specified in other layers is used in common, and the data size of the communication middleware data APLDT is minimized. This alleviates information communication congestion (congestion) on the network line 1782 within the same system, simplifies processing within the composite modules 1460 and 1470 (particularly within the interface unit 1710 shown in FIG. 10A), and 1470 can be lowered in price.

Next, a specific data example of communication middleware data APLDT in C-format in accordance with the method described above will be shown. For example, when the system controller α_1126 issues a command (command issue) 1852 (FIG. 10B) to “stop operation” to the drive/communication module 1470, “[111] Reset instruction” is set in the communication access control information 1830 and , "[0000] binary data designation" is set in the multi-level transmission data section CTMDT, and "[0] OFF designation" is set in the binary transmission data section CT2DT. In addition, when the sensor/communication module 1460 notifies (reports) to the system controller α_1126 that, for example, the amount of public consumption goods that have been used to date is 50%, the communication access control information 1830 is set to "[010] Report notification. ” is set, and “[10001]50%” is set in the 5-bit area that combines the multilevel transmission data section CTMDT and the binary transmission data section CT2DT.

Another example of specific data will be shown. As described later in Section 4.3, ○ Large adults with thick fingers can provide stable user input even if the sensitivity of touchpads and capacitive buttons is low.
On the other hand, children and women with thin fingers may not be able to respond unless they increase the sensitivity of the touchpad or capacitive buttons. Correspondingly, after estimating/judging the user status (finger thickness) according to Section 4.3, the system controller α_1126 sets the sensitivity for the sensor/communication module 1460 that supports the touchpad and capacitive buttons. An example is shown. In this case, “[110] Threshold level setting instruction” is set in the communication access control information 1830. Now consider increasing the sensitivity of a touchpad or capacitive button from 25% to 73%. Then, [11000] corresponding to 73% is specified in the 5-bit area that is a combination of the multilevel transmission data section CTMDT and the binary transmission data section CT2DT.

In the above embodiment, the communication timing of binary information such as ON/OFF and the communication timing of multi-value information such as status setting are separated, and whether or not the information set in the multi-value transmission data part CTMDT is [0000] is determined. Is it binary communication information? Is it multivalued? Identification is made. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and in other embodiments, binary data such as ON/OFF and multi-value data such as status settings may be communicated at the same time. In this case, 1-bit binary value may be set in the binary transmission data section CT2DT, and multi-value may be set with 4 bits in the multi-value transmission data section CTMDT. In this way, by communicating binary data and multi-value data such as state settings at the same time, such as "specifying state setting values (such as temperature setting) at the same time as starting operation," the system The frequency of information communication between the controller α_1126 and the composite modules 1460 and 1470 is reduced, which has the effect of alleviating communication congestion within the same system network line 1782 (FIG. 10A).

It has already been explained that communication precision and communication stability can be improved by combining the IEEE802.15.4-compliant chip-by-chip setting address ADRSIEEE with this composite module type identification information CMTID. If an error occurs in the system controller α_1126 and the functions of the communication partner composite modules 1460 and 1470 are mixed up, this error can be detected by comparing the information of the two. If an error in the system controller α_1126 is discovered on the composite module 1460, 1470 side, the system of this embodiment supports a function that allows the composite module 1460, 1470 to notify the system controller α_1126 of the error. In this case, "[000] alarm notification" is set in the communication access control information 1830 in FIG. 14(d). Then, [00011] is set in a 5-bit area that is a combination of the next multilevel transmission data section CTMDT and binary transmission data section CT2DT, and a target misrecognition notification is notified. In this way, the system of this embodiment supports the function of notifying errors occurring in the system controller α_1126 from the composite module 1460, 1470 or the device 1250, thereby increasing the stability and reliability of information communication on the network line 1782 within the same system. It has the effect of improving.

Section 2.6 E-format data structure in the communication middleware layer The “E-format” used in the system of this embodiment is mainly used in the device 1250 and the It is mainly intended for use within the communication middleware layer APL06 that communicates information to the server n_1116-n. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be used for information communication between different system controllers α_1126 and β_1128, or may be used for information communication with composite modules 1460 and 1470. Furthermore, as already explained in Section 2.1 using FIG. 10B, in the E-format, information communication is basically performed by exchanging information (table) 1810 between the transmitting side node and the receiving side node. Therefore, this exchange information (table) 1810 (or a part thereof) is stored in the IPv6 data/payload IPv6DU as part of the communication middleware data APLDT shown in FIG. 11(a). As described later in Section 2.7, the A-format has the characteristic of being written in a text format in a broad sense. In comparison, the E-format is characterized by storing correspondence information in a predetermined area as a setting code. Therefore, the E-format is defined as a format in which "a setting code is stored in a predetermined area within the area of communication middleware data APLDT." Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, any format in which setting codes are sequentially stored in a predetermined area is included in the E-format.

At the beginning of the communication middleware layer data APLDT based on the E-format, an E-format header E-HD shown in FIG. 15A(b) is stored in a 2-byte area. The value of this E-format header E-HD is set to [1081h] (“h” indicates a hexadecimal value, and in binary representation, [0001000010000001]). The next 2-byte area stores identification information TID for association between request transmission and response reception. By the way, this identification information TID for association between sending a request and receiving a response is an association between the answer request (request) sent in advance by the answer request sending side when receiving the response (response) and the received response (response). It means a parameter for aiming at. (The sequence of the response (response) 1874 to this response request (request) 1872 corresponds to the sequence shown in case 2 in FIG. 10B.) The code stored in this area is can be specified arbitrarily as appropriate. Next, when the receiving node of the reply request (request) makes a response, it stores in this area the same code as the code set by the previous reply request sending node. Based on the degree of coincidence of the association identification information TID between the request transmission and the response reception, it is determined whether the received information indicates a response to the previous response request.

The E-format data E-DT stored in the next area shown in FIG. 15A(b) corresponds to the exchange information 1810 described in Section 2.1 using FIG. 10B. As shown in FIG. 15A(c), this E-format data E-DT contains 3 bytes of identification information of the sending device SEOJ, 3 bytes of identification information of the receiving device DEOJ, and 1 byte of communication access control information ESV. , control/processing related information CM1, and are arranged in the order described above. Here, the 1-byte communication access control information ESV corresponds to the communication access control information 1830 described in Section 2.1 using FIG. 10B.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 15A(d), both the sending device identification information SEOJ and the receiving device identification information DEOJ have a 1-byte device type group code DTGC, a 1-byte device type code DTC, and a 1-byte device type group code DTC, and a 1-byte device type group code DTC. The internal device identification code DIDC is arranged in the order described above. This device type group code DTGC represents a device type group, and indicates which group the target device is included in, such as a sensor-related device group, an air-conditioning-related device group, a housing/equipment-related device group, or a cooking/housework-related device group. show. The next device type code DTC represents a device type such as a television or an air conditioner. However, if multiple different devices 1250 corresponding to the same device type are installed in the same system α_1132 (for example, if multiple air conditioners are installed in one house), it is necessary to identify each device 1250. In order to do this, the same type device identification code DIDC is set.

By the way, when considering an air conditioner as an example of the device 1250, there are setting states regarding multiple items such as "set temperature", "set air volume", "set wind direction", and "set timer time (auto ON/auto OFF)". , it is possible to change settings (state change control) for multiple items at the same time. Therefore, in the exchange information (table) 1810 shown in FIG. 10B, "status related to multiple items" or "simultaneous setting change instruction (state change control information) related to multiple items" are defined even for a single device, and these Information can be written in the form of a list. Therefore, in the control/processing related information of FIG. 15A(c), state change control corresponding to collection of state information and setting change can be performed for multiple items at the same time, as shown in FIG. 15A(e). The number of items of state information to be collected at the same time or the number of items for which state change control (setting change) is to be performed at the same time is described in one byte in the control/processing number NCM. The control/processing information CM-1 to n from the first time to the nth time are arranged in the above-mentioned order for the number of items set in the control/processing number NCM.

As shown in FIG. 15A(f), each control/processing information CM-1 to CM-n is composed of 1-byte exchange information type identification information EPC, 1-byte individual exchange information data size PDC, and individual exchange information EDT. and are arranged in the order listed above. Then, "status information to be collected", "status information to respond to", or "status change (setting change) control information" stored for each item corresponding to each device 1250 is stored as the above-mentioned individual exchange information EDT. . Further, data size information for each individual exchange information EDT is stored as the data size PDC of the individual exchange information.

Depending on the type of the corresponding device 1250 (that is, depending on the content of the device type code DTC described above), the contents of the item representing the state and the contents of the item subject to state change control (setting change) differ. Therefore, in the E-format, for each type of the corresponding device 1250 (contents of the device type code DTC), the items of information whose status should be collected and the information expression format, or the items whose status should be controlled (setting changes) and the expression of the control information are expressed. The format is determined in advance, and templates and item codes (template codes) are prepared in advance according to the expression format for each item. Then, the item code set for each type of the corresponding device 1250 (contents of the device type code DTC) is stored as the type identification information EPC of the exchange information. Further, this exchange information type identification information EPC corresponds to the exchange information type identification information 1840 shown in FIG. 10B.

Here, we will explain the information in the E-format data E-DT corresponding to the exchange information (table) 1810, taking as an example the case where the settings of a home air conditioner are changed (state change control) under control from the system controller α_1126. . Incidentally, a setting change (state change control) command (command issue) in the E-format corresponds to the "write request" described in Section 2.1. Therefore, [60h] (=when a response is not required) or [61h] (=when a response is required) is set as the communication access control information ESV (1830) in FIG. 15A(c). (For reference, the setting code of the communication access control information ESV (1830) is [62h] for "read request", [73h] for "notification", and [72h] for "read response". ) The device type group code DTGC of the household air conditioner corresponds to [01h], which means an air conditioning related device group. Further, the device type code DTC is [30h]. Here, when assigned to the first air conditioner in system α_1132, the same model device identification code DIDC is [01h]. Therefore, when the system controller α_1126 issues a state change control command 1852 (corresponding to case 1 in FIG. 10B) to this household air conditioner, the identification information of the receiving device in FIG. 15A(c) becomes [013001h]. . Then, when controlling from the system controller α_1126 to change the operating state of the relevant air conditioner, the type identification information EPC of the exchange information is [80h], the data size of the individual exchange information is [01h] (=1 byte), and the individual The exchange information EDT becomes [30h]. Therefore, the initial control/processing information CM-1 that is a combination of these pieces of information can be expressed as [800130h]. Next, when changing the set temperature to 26 degrees Celsius as part of the control/processing for the n-frame, the type identification information EPC of the exchange information is [B3h], and the data size of the individual exchange information is [01h] (= 1 byte). , the individual exchange information EDT is [1Ah], which means 26°C. Therefore, the n-th control/processing information CM-n, which is a combination of these pieces of information, is expressed as [B3011A].

Section 2.7 A-format data structure in the communication middleware layer The “A-format” used in the system of this embodiment is mainly used in the device 1250 and It is mainly intended for use within the communication middleware layer APL06 that communicates information to the server n_1116-n. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be used for information communication between different system controllers α_1126 and β_1128, or may be used for information communication with composite modules 1460 and 1470. Furthermore, as already explained in Section 2.1 using FIG. 10B, in the A-format, information communication is basically performed by exchanging information (table) 1810 between the transmitting side node and the receiving side node. Therefore, this exchange information (table) 1810 (or a part thereof) is stored in the IPv6 data/payload IPv6DU as part of the communication middleware data APLDT shown in FIG. 11(a).

In the A-format, as shown in an example in FIG. 15B, the communication middleware data APLDT may be written in the XML (Extensible Markup Language) format. In this specification, a text-based method of describing content such as XML or HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) is referred to as a "text format in a broad sense." For example, in HTML, tags are always included in the descriptive text. However, the above-mentioned tag description is not necessarily required in the "text format in a wide sense" as referred to here, and if there is any description in a text format in a broad sense, it is included in the "text format in a wide sense." Therefore, for example, programs such as Java applets, Java scripts, and C language programs are also included in the above-mentioned broad text format. By describing the communication middleware data APLDT in a broadly defined text format in this way, it is possible to ensure the versatility and extensibility of the communication middleware data APLDT. Therefore, the A-format in the system of this embodiment is defined as "a format in which communication information related to the communication middleware layer APL is described in a broadly defined text format." All formats described in the above-mentioned broad text format are included in this A-format. The exchange information (table) 1810 configured in a table format in FIG. 10B corresponds to the "<table> Element area" (range from <table - > to </table>) in FIG. 15B(b). good.

Furthermore, in the A-format, the <tdl> Element, which is a Root Element, may be set as the parent element of the <table> Element. (Here, the above <tdl> means transferring data language.) Also, as described in Figure 15B(b), the date attribute is the attribute information (Attribute) of the <tdl> Element. ) may be used to describe the creation date of the corresponding table. In the description of FIG. 15B(b), the creation date of the corresponding table is "December 25, 2014."

As shown in FIG. 15B(b), the number attribute or name attribute in the <table> Element corresponds to the exchange information type identification information 1840 shown in FIG. 10B. However, in the communication middleware data APLDT written in the A-format, there is a place where information corresponding to the device type group code DTGC and device type code DTC is displayed, as in the E-format explained in Section 2.6. There is no. Instead, a table template that predefines the items and information expression format of the information to be collected regarding the state inside the device 1250, or the items and the expression format of the control information to be controlled to change the state of the device 1250 (setting change) is used. Detailed settings are made for each supported device type. A table number and a table name are specified for each table template that is set in detail for each device type. As an example of this, the template number of the corresponding table may be directly designated by the numerical value specified by the number attribute, as shown in "number="02"" in FIG. 15B(b). Therefore, by writing the above number attribute or name attribute in the corresponding <table> Element, it becomes possible to automatically write the communication middleware data in APLDT in accordance with the table template. Furthermore, the present embodiment system is not limited to this, and other descriptions may be made to correspond to the exchange information type identification information 1840 that can be used for selecting a standard template used in the information exchange table. Similarly to the method of associating a table template according to the type of device 1250 by specifying a numerical value with the number attribute described above, the standard template for information exchange according to the type of composite module 1460, 1470 can be called (see FIG. 12B). The composite module type identification information CMTID in e) may be used (see Section 2.5 for details).

As an example of writing communication information in the communication middleware data APLDT in accordance with the A-format, in FIG. 15B(b), the amount of power used periodically accumulated in the smart meter 1124 in FIG. ” shows an example of a description for notifying the service provider B_1112-2 (server n_1116-n within) that provides the power supply service. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1, since this smart meter 1124 is also connected to the system controller α_1126 and the wholesaler A 1102 through a network line, the above communication information may be communicated to the system controller α_1126 and the wholesaler A 1102. . On the other hand, since the supplied voltage value is determined in advance depending on the location where this smart meter 1124 is installed (i.e., corresponding to a general household, building, or factory), the integrated current value is notified instead of the integrated power amount. . In addition, information described in a "broad text format" may be used for information communication with any device 1250 or any composite module 1460, 1470, without being limited to the description example in FIG. 15B(b).

As an example of the integrated current value notification shown in FIG. 15B(b), the A-format uses a standard table (table template) with "table number 2" and table template name "Device Nameplate Table" as a template. You may do so. In addition, in A-format, Table may be abbreviated as “TBL”. Therefore, write "number="02"" as the number attribute in the <table> Element, and write "name="DEVICE_NAMEPLATE_TBL" as the name attribute.

As already explained in Section 1.7, there are many types of smart meters 1124, including not only "electricity consumption" but also "gas consumption", "water consumption", and "sewage discharge". There is a smart meter 1124 that notifies the usage status of each public consumption product. On the other hand, in the description example shown in FIG. 15B(b), the type attribute is described as "type="E_ELECTRIC_DEVICE_RCD" to mean "measuring the amount of electricity used." By the way, the above-mentioned "RCD" means a packed record. As already explained in Section 2.2, (part of) the communication middleware layer data APDLT described in FIG. 15B(b) is packed in the MAC layer data/payload MSDU and communicated. Therefore, the expression "packedRecord" is used to mean "packing (a part of) the communication middleware layer data APDLT and recording it in a physical layer frame PPDU for communication." Therefore, the number attribute in the <packedRecord> Element is also written as "name="E_ELECTRIC_DEVICE_RCD" using the same word as above.

In the explanation in Section 2.1 using FIG. 10B, it is clear that both this A-format and the E-format explained in Section 2.6 include communication access control information 1830 in the exchange information (table) 1810. showed that. This communication access control information 1830 can then be made to correspond to the accessibility attribute within the <table> Element or within the <set> Element described below. This accessibility attribute allows the receiving node to request READWRITE, READONLY, or WRITEONLY. Here, READ means an instruction to read the status of the receiving node (for example, the device 1250 or the composite modules 1460, 1470, etc.) and to respond with the read information (or to notify sense information), and is in E-format. This corresponds to “read requests” etc. Furthermore, WRITE means an information response or status change setting instruction to the receiving node side, and corresponds to a "notification", "read response", or "write request" in E-format. READWRITE is used to instruct the receiving node to respond to the response request 1872/response 1874 sequence in case 2 of FIG. 10B. Furthermore, the present embodiment system is not limited to this, and other descriptions may be made to correspond to the communication access control information 1830. In the example of FIG. 15B(b), information on the "integrated current value (Ampere)" measured by the smart meter 1124 is notified to the receiving node (for example, server n_1116-n, controller α_1126, or wholesaler A1102), so accessibility = "WRITEONLY" is specified.

Furthermore, the element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 15B(b) refers to "individual items such as sense target information, detection target state information, or state information to be controlled (setting change)". There is. Therefore, if the information specified in the exchange information type identification information 1840 in FIG. 10B (the information specified in the number attribute or name attribute in the <table> element) is Settings are described in each <element> Element for each item.

However, among the table templates that are preset with "table number 2", the table template specified with "type="E_ELECTRIC_DEVICE_RCD" has individual The items include “E_KH” (periodically integrated electric energy), “E_KT” (test pulse output amount), and “E_INPUT_SCALAR” (the unit of communication information). 1”), “E_ELEMENT” (local number of smart meter), “E_VOLTS” (instantaneous voltage value/transmission system voltage fluctuations can be monitored in real time), “E_AMPS” (periodic (current value integrated into the current value) etc. are prepared in advance. In the description example shown in FIG. 15B(b), only "E_KH" and "E_AMPS" are defined using <element> Element.

First, the <element> Element with “E_KH” specified in the name attribute declares that “this communication information notifies the periodically accumulated amount of electricity.” According to the standard, you can tell what “E_KH” means just by looking at the information in <element name="E_KH">. However, the <description> Element is set so that the contents of the exchange information (table) 1810 can be understood without referring to the standard document. A feature of the A-format is that it has a "function that allows supplementary explanations to be provided using text in a broad sense" within the A-format, which can be described in a text format in a broad sense. As a result, the description content can be understood without referring to the standard document, which has the effect of making it easier for the receiving node to understand the exchange information (table) 1810.

As an example of A-format, numerical values are set using <set> Element. However, the value is not limited to this, and the numerical value may be set using another description method. Also, before using <set> Element, define the type of “E_AMPS_RCD” in the <element> Element that specifies “E_KH” in the name attribute (<element name="E_AMPS" type="E_AMPS_RCD"), and specify " It is specified that the periodic accumulated current value is reported by packedRecord in the MAC layer data/payload MSDU. After that, <set> Element is defined using the same name “E_AMPS_RCD”.

The “periodic integrated current value” measured by the smart meter 1124 is set in the value attribute in the <enum> Element (enum means Electrical numerator). (Here, the smart meter 1124 automatically substitutes the measured value for $$$$ in value="$$$$".) Also, the variable name “E_AMPS” that means the value set here is Specified by name attribute in <enumerator> Element.

By the way, we have already explained the <description> Element as a "supplementary explanation function" within the A-format. However, the information is not limited to the above, and supplementary explanations may be provided using label attributes and text attributes.

Section 2.8 Address table used in this embodiment system and its usage example From the explanations in Sections 2.3 to 2.7 above, different addresses are set repeatedly for the same module in each layer. I know what will happen. For example, in an address table showing a list of various addresses that can be set for the sensor module 1260-1 and drive module 1270-1 in FIG. 8A, or the drive/communication module 1470-2 and sensor/communication module 1460-5 in FIG. 8B. An example of the data structure is shown in FIG. In addition to the method described in Section 2.8, this address table may be used in the manner described in Section 4.2.

By the way, in FIG. 23, various addresses that are set in duplicate in the drive/communication module 1470-2 and sensor/communication module 1460-5 in FIG. 8B are grouped together and described in the same vertical column. Further, various addresses that are duplicated and set in the sensor module 1260-1 and the drive module 1270-1 built in the device 1250-1 in FIG. 8A are also written together in the same vertical column. Incidentally, the IEEE extended address EXADRS included in one of the address items in the address table of FIG. 23 is assigned to the communication module chip 1202-4 (see section 2.3). Therefore, the IEEE extended address EXADRS corresponding to the sensor module 1260-1 and drive module 1270-1 in FIG. 23 is set to an address related to the communication module chip 1202-4 built in the same device 1250-1.

Among the address items listed in the address table of FIG. 23, the IEEE extended address EXADRS is individually set in the media access layer MAC02, as described in Section 2.3. Next, in the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6, as explained in Section 2.4, IP addresses IPADRS (sending side IP address information SIPADRS/receiving side IP address information DIPADRS) are individually set. On the other hand, in the communication middleware layer APL06, the same-type device type code DIDC is set in accordance with the E-format described in Section 2.6.

The system of this embodiment is characterized in that the list shown in FIG. 23, in which the section information in which each module is currently placed is added to the above list, is stored in the memory section 1232 of the system controller β_1134 and the system controller α_1126. . As a result, (1) services can be provided efficiently and accurately, (2) format conversion can be easily performed within the system controller β_1134 and system controller α_1126, and (3) services can be easily provided within the sending node or nodes along the communication path. This makes it easier to detect errors that occur, which has the effect of improving the reliability of information communication.

As explained in Chapter 4, in the system of this embodiment, services can be provided for each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. Therefore, when controlling the state (changing the setting state) of multiple devices 1250 or multiple drive/communication modules 1470 in the same section 1142 as one form of the above service, the information in FIG. 23 is utilized to control the state (setting state). (Status change) Selection of the target device 1250 or drive/communication module 1470 becomes very easy.

Also, as explained in Section 2.1, when communicating information across different network lines (network line 1782 within the same system/network line 1788 outside the system/network line 2082 within the same domain), the format may be changed midway. There is. In this case, by using the information in FIG. 23, format conversion can be performed smoothly and accurately.

Here, a specific explanation will be given using, as an example, information communication between the equipment 1250 or composite modules 1460 and 1470 placed in the system α_1132 and the system controller β_1128 placed in a different system β_1134. A case where format conversion is performed within the relaying system controller α_1126 during this information communication will be explained. However, the information shown in FIG. 23 may be used for any form of network communication in the system of this embodiment. As a precondition for this, it is assumed that the information shown in FIG. 23 is stored in the memory unit 1232 in advance for both the system controllers α_1126 and β_1128. Even if the location of the system controller β_1128 is far away from the system α_1132, the system controller β_1128 can use the information in Figure 23 to collect what information from within the system α_1132 and what kind of state control (state setting) it can collect from within the system α_1132. changes) can be made. Furthermore, since the system of this embodiment uses Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 for all information communication, IP address information IPADRS is preset in the system controller β_1128, all devices 1250, and composite modules 1460 and 1470. There is.

First, a method of converting the format from C-format to E-format regarding the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 within the system controller α_1126 during the above-mentioned information communication will be explained. As already explained in Section 2.5, the C-format itself does not have any address information, so information that needs to be set in the E-format cannot be obtained from this C-format information. However, as shown in FIG. 23, information related to the E-format is recorded in advance in FIG. Therefore, within the system controller α_1126 (specifically, within the processor 1230), the device type group code DTGC, device type code DTC, and device identification code within the same type DIDC described here are used to create an E-format compliant code. Create information.

Conversely, the case of converting from A-format, E-format, or W-format to C-format will be explained. As already explained in Section 2.5, when the composite modules 1460 and 1470 use the C-format, the extended IEEE extension of FIG. 12B(d)(e) defined in a layer other than the communication middleware layer APL02 Use address EXEXADRS. However, by utilizing the IEEE extended address EXADRS for each of the composite modules 1460 and 1470 shown in FIG. 23, processing compatible with the C-format can be performed smoothly. If you are using a format that does not include the expanded IEEE extended address EXEXADRS in the above IEEE extended address EXADRS, use the IEEE802.15.4 compliant per-chip setting address ADRSIEEE to support the composite module via the Internet. Attribute information of 1460 and 1470 can be obtained. However, the method is not limited to this, and other methods may be used. In other words, the system of this embodiment takes advantage of the feature of commonly using Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6 for all information communications (even when communicating information using formats other than C-format), as explained in Section 2.4. Information on the expanded IEEE extended address EXEXADRS shown in FIG. 12B(d) may be stored in advance in the communication class information IPCLS shown in FIG. 13(d).

Next, a method for changing the format within the system controller α_1126 (specifically, within the processor 1230) with respect to the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 and the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 will be described. In this case, only the physical layer and the media access layer are replaced using the information in FIG. 23 based on the common IP address IPADRS specified by Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6. That is, in the system of this embodiment, the transmitting side IP address information SIPADRS and the receiving side IP address information DIPADRS (see FIG. 13(b)) are commonly stored in the IPv6 header IPV6HD regardless of the intermediate communication line path. Therefore, by referring to the receiving side IP address information DIPADRS for the information in FIG. 23, the receiving side's PAN specific information PANID and IEEE extended address EXEADRS used in the Z-format can be extracted.

Finally, we will explain how the reliability of information communication using a network line is improved by using the information in FIG. 23. In the unlikely event that an error occurs in the information sending node or the node that relays information during the communication route (including system controller α_1126), inappropriate information may be included in some of the communication information described in Figures 12A to 15B. There is a risk of contamination. When this happens, information communication within the network system is inhibited. To deal with this problem, by sequentially verifying communication information using the information shown in FIG. 23 within the system controllers α_1126 and β1128, it is possible to determine whether or not an error has occurred in the communication information and to identify the location of the error very easily. As a result, the reliability of information communication is improved.

Chapter 3 Management/display method for each unit Section 3.1 Overview of basic unit management method As explained in Section 1.1 using Figures 1 and 2, in the system of this embodiment, "Domain/System / section / unit / equipment or composite module. That is, domain 2_1122-2 is composed of one or more systems α_1132, and one system can be divided into sections 1142. A unit 1290 is arranged for each section 1142. Further, as a specific form of this unit 1290, a single device 1250, a single composite module 1295, or a mixed system thereof is acceptable. Furthermore, there is a system controller α_1126 that manages or controls network communication within the system α_1132 and collects information, and manages this unit 1290. In order to be able to respond to unforeseen circumstances such as power outages and failures, alternative management/control/information collection by another system controller β_1128 is also possible as appropriate. Furthermore, regarding this replaceable system controller β_1128, “movable” or “at least temporarily placed outside the corresponding system α_1132” is allowed.

As a unit management method based on the above hierarchical structure, the system of this embodiment is characterized by "managing the units belonging to each system α_1132". As described above, the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) manages/controls/collects information on network communication for each system. Therefore, as mentioned above, by "collectively managing all the units 1290 included in the same system α_1132 on a system α_1132 basis", it is convenient to manage/control/collect information on network communication of system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128). It has the effect of improving sex.

In addition, the "plug-in processing", "plug-out processing", or "check-in processing" described later in Section 4.2 can be used to "manage within the system α_1132 according to the units 1290 entering and exiting the system α_1132." The point where the target unit 1290 is switched also has the following characteristics. That is, when a particular unit 1290 enters the system α_1132, the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) automatically detects it and assigns the particular unit 1290 to the managed unit 1290 of the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128). Automatically register as . Conversely, when another predetermined unit 1290 leaves the system α_1132, system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) automatically detects it and transfers the other predetermined unit 1290 to system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128). automatically deleted from the managed unit 1290.

As a result, even if a plurality of units 1290 frequently enter and leave the specific system α_1132, network communications within the specific system α_1132 can be managed while maintaining stability and high reliability.

For example, when an external hard disk device, external optical disk device, or USB memory device is connected to a conventional computer system, it is automatically recognized (plug-in processing) as a "new additional drive" (for example, D drive or E drive). “Drive management” is performed. Here, if the number of units 1290 belonging to the same system α_1132 is small, each unit 1290 may be managed as an individual drive as described above. However, the system of this embodiment allows a large number of units 1290 to belong to the same system α_1132. If drives are added sequentially as "D drive", "E drive", etc. for each unit 1290 added within the same system α_1132 as described above, drive management will fail when the "Z drive" is exceeded. If an attempt is made to manage the units 1290 using the conventional technology in this way, there is a problem that A] it cannot cope with an increase in the number of units 1290 within the same system α_1132. Similarly, when considering not only drive management but also port allocation for network communication control, etc., a further related problem arises: B) The increase in the number of units 1290 causes the corresponding port allocation to fail. If a unique and novel countermeasure is attempted to avoid problems [A] and [B], an additional problem will arise: C) compatibility with conventional computer system management methods will be broken.

As a method for simultaneously solving the above-mentioned problems [A] to [C], this embodiment has a major feature in that ``units are managed using a method similar to file management via a computer network''. Then, it is assumed that "1 unit 1290=1 pseudo file". Here, from the perspective of the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) that manages the unit 1290, the process of "collecting predetermined information from the unit 1290 (for example, collecting sensor information)" is defined as "information reproducing (READ) process from the unit 1290". ” Similarly, the process of "changing (controlling) the setting state of the unit 1290" from the perspective of the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) that manages the unit 1290 is defined as "setting state information after change for the unit 1290 (contents to be controlled)". "WRITE processing".

However, when managing files via a computer network, "URL (Uniform Resource Locator)" is often used to specify a file storage location on the network. However, since the location of the unit 1290 is determined to be within the same system α_1132, this embodiment also has the feature that ``instead of specifying a URL, the system α_1132 to be managed is assigned as one drive, folder, or directory.'' Yes. If an individual drive is allocated to each unit 1290 as in [A] above, it becomes difficult to cope with an increase in the number of units 1290. However, as mentioned above, by ``assigning only one drive, folder, or directory to one system α_1132'', it is not only possible to respond flexibly to an increase in the number of units 1290, but also prevent port allocation from occurring. This has the effect of ensuring compatibility with conventional management methods in the computer world.

Next, a method for realizing the above basic concept will be explained. In order to apply the above-described "unit 1290 management method" on application software using a computer network, there is a method of defining a new "unit management compatible API (Application Interface)." Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and new "unit management compatible built-in functions and referenced/usable subprograms" may be defined. Here, a program called a "subroutine" may be used as the subprogram that can be referenced/used by the other program. Further, the above-mentioned built-in function may be a program called a "function" or a predetermined program called a "method" that is incorporated and utilized in a specific application software (specific class) using Java script.

Section 3.2 Unit Management Means As a means of realizing the basic concept of unit management explained in Section 3.1, in addition to the application software support described above, the following hardware improvements are also made.

FIG. 18A shows the hardware configuration and software hierarchy around a conventional computer system. A processor 3010 built into the computer is connected to a communication control section 3028 and a recording medium control section 3024 via a bus line 3012. In information communication between the processor 3010 and the recording medium control section 3024, command/status information corresponding to a device drive (commonly known as a device driver) is mutually communicated via a connection section 3018 that is directly connected to the bus line 3012. Then, the recording medium control unit 3024 decodes the content and directly drives the recording medium (hardware unit) 3014. By the way, specific examples of this recording medium (hard part) 3014 include a hard disk, an optical disk, and a USB memory.

On the other hand, the information communication execution unit 3016 represents a part that actually executes network communication, and has communication means depending on wired/wireless communication media. This information communication execution unit 3016 is also controlled by the processor 3010 in the same manner as described above.

Conventional computer control from the perspective of software includes a device driver area 3022 involved in controlling the recording medium (hardware part) 3014 in the OS (Operating System) layer 3030 and a communication driver area involved in controlling the information communication execution unit 3016. 3026 is included. On the other hand, the application software 3050 issues an API (Application Programming Interface) command 3045 to the OS layer 3030 to execute the application software 3050.

Compared to the conventional type described above, the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128), as shown in FIG. 10A, can perform both information communication control using the network line outside the system 1788 and information communication control using the network line 1782 within the same system. It has a major feature in that it does this. In order to make this possible, as shown in FIG. 18B, it has both an external connection compatible information communication execution unit 3017 and an internal system connection compatible information communication execution unit 3015. By the way, for convenience of explanation, both are physically separated and described in FIG. 18B. However, the structure is not limited to this, and a structure may be adopted in which a part of the information communication execution unit 3017 for connection outside the system and the information communication execution unit 3015 for connection within the system overlaps/is used, or in a broad sense that one is substantially included in the other. may have an inclusion relationship.

The external connection compatible information communication execution unit 3017 and the internal system connection compatible information communication execution unit 3015 in FIG. 18B refer to a wireless radio wave (including detection) transmitting/receiving unit or a wired communication communication information transmitting/receiving unit. Therefore, there is a communication control unit 3029 for external connections and a communication control unit 3021 for internal connections that control them. For convenience of explanation, the OS layer 3030 is described as having a predetermined program area corresponding to the communication driver area 3027 for external connection and a predetermined program area corresponding to the communication driver area 3025 for internal connection. However, in reality, there is no need for independent subprograms to exist, and there are cases where a part of both is shared, or when one of the program steps in both corresponds to the BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) control area 3020. It may overlap/also be used as the program area.

As a means of realizing the operation overview described in Section 3.1, the embodiment shown in FIG. A management/control area 3034 (physically or virtually) of the units within the system corresponding to the terminology (using terminology used) is formed (physically or virtually). The intra-system unit management/control area 3034 includes (at least a part of) a processor 3010 having a hardware structure including a control program corresponding to an intra-system connection communication driver area 3025, and an intra-system connection communication control unit. 3021, and a bus line 3012 (including a connecting portion 3018) that connects the two.

The configuration within the management/control area 3034 of this in-system unit corresponds to the processor/communication module 1465 described in FIG. 4D. In other words, as already explained in Section 1.3, the part involved in network communication using the same system network line 1782 in the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) is the composite module 1295 called the processor/communication module 1465. It consists of

By the way, even if a special line called the intra-system network line 1782 is used, the parts involved in network communication should be considered as part of the communication control unit 3028 and communication driver area 3026 in FIG. 18A in terms of conventional technology. Conceivable. However, as explained in Section 3.1, when managing the unit 1290 by considering it as "1 unit 1290 ≒ 1 pseudo file", the management/control area 3034 of the system unit described above is It is functionally close to the device driver area 3022. Accordingly, in the example embodiment of FIG. 18B, at least a portion of the management/control area 3034 of the unit within the system is included within the device drive area 3022 within the OS layer 3030. As described in FIG. 18B, "a part of the control program corresponding to the existing device driver area 3022 may be used for managing the unit 1290". Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and a part of the control program corresponding to the existing BIOS control area 3020 may also be used for unit 1290 management (that is, a part of the control program corresponding to the BIOS control area 3020 may be used for managing the units in the system. (may be included in the management/control area 3034).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 18B, a case has been described in which a predetermined OS (Operating System) is used within the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128). However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the execution processing of the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) may be performed without using any existing OS.

The application example of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B shows means for managing the unit 1290 using Java script. In this Java script, instead of using a predetermined OS (Operating System), a JVM (Java Virtual Machine) is installed for each corresponding processor 3010. The program environment executed here is composed of a group of classes 3160, and for example, a main method 3148 in an application class 3158 is executed in response to a user request. Here, the class group 3160 includes various programs written in Java script.

In FIG. 19A, the processor 3010 and the intra-system connection compatible information communication execution unit 3015 represent a hardware unit. The operation of this intra-system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3015 is controlled by an intra-system connection correspondence communication control unit 3021.

However, in the prior art, programs involved in file management within the class group 3160 are stored within a file class 3154 composed of a plurality of file class instance method groups 3144. On the other hand, in the applied example of the embodiment, a management/control class 3150 of the system unit for managing the unit 1290 is newly set in the class group 3160. In the system unit management/control class 3150, there is an area in which a unit management/control related method group 3140 is stored. Here, programs that execute subdivided operational processes related to the management/control of the unit 1290 exist as various methods. A collection of these various methods is called a method group, and constitutes the management/control related method group 3140 of the unit.

Next, the relationship between the program 3188 written in the main method 3148 in the application class 3158 and the unit management/control related method group 3140 will be explained using FIG. 19B.

When the application class 3158 is activated, the incorporation processing 3174 and 3170 (import processing) of the file class 3154 designated in advance and the management/control class 3150 of the system unit newly proposed in the applied example of this embodiment is performed. Then, a file class instance method group 3144 included in the incorporated (imported) file class 3154 and a unit management/control related method group 3140 contained in the system unit management/control class 3150 can be used from within the application class 3158.

Next, a predetermined method in the file class instance method group 3144 is referenced 3194 from within the program step 3188 written in the main method 3148 to efficiently perform execution processing regarding the file system. Similarly, by referring 3190 to a specific method included in the unit management/control related method group 3140 from another program step 3188 written in the main method 3148, it is possible to efficiently manage/control/collect information regarding the unit 1290. .

In the application example of this embodiment, a predetermined organization different from the user creates a program corresponding to the management/control class 3150 of the unit in the system in advance, and sends it to the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) as appropriate via the Internet. Install additionally. Also, since the program step 3188 that refers to a specific method in the unit management/control related method group 3140 in the main method 4148 is one line (several lines at most), it is very easy to refer to the unit 1290 in the application class 3158. Management/control/information collection becomes possible. By using the above method, it is possible to easily incorporate the management/control/information collection means of the unit 1290 with almost no burden on the software developer of the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128).

FIG. 20 shows a comparison between the existing file system and the unit management method according to this embodiment. The basic management information is stored in the storage medium in the existing file system, but in the unit management method of this embodiment, it is stored in the memory unit 1232 in the system controller α_1126. Next, a method of accessing content (a predetermined file in a file system/a predetermined unit in unit management) will be explained. In existing file systems, a file name (including the URL where the file is saved) is specified, and a range in which specific information within the file is recorded is specified using a relative address range within the file. In contrast, in the unit management method of this embodiment, addresses of corresponding units are specified. The designated address means an address listed in the address table of FIG. 23 (eg, IP address IPADRS or IEEE extended address EXADRS). Note that in the unit management method of this embodiment, since the information size of the information owned by the unit 1290 (setting state information and sensor information to be changed) is relatively small, information is read/written for one unit 1290 as a whole. . Therefore, it has the effect of greatly simplifying management/control/information collection compared to existing file systems.

In existing file systems, file management information such as FAT (File Allocation Table) and UDF (Universal Disk Format) corresponds to management information for managing the entire file or the entire unit 1290, and in the unit management method of this embodiment, FIG. corresponds to the address table. In the existing file system, the information to be read/changed corresponds to the content (data) in a file, whereas in the unit management method of this embodiment, the information to be read/changed corresponds to sensor information and various status information/setting status (of the object to be changed). Furthermore, the unit management method in this embodiment is not limited to this, and the exchange information (table) 1810 shown in FIG. 10B is also included in the read/change target information.

However, there is a major difference between the existing file system and the unit management method of this embodiment in the presence or absence of a function to list all contents. That is, in existing file systems, although a "file name list" can be known from the file management information described above, there is no means to easily know the entire file contents. Therefore, if it is necessary to know the contents of all files, it is necessary to open all the files one by one and newly tally the contents, which is very time-consuming. In contrast, in the unit management method according to the present embodiment, since there is a time-series information tracking table shown in FIG. 28, the contents of the entire unit 1290 can be grasped instantly. As described above, since the unit management method according to the present embodiment has a means for independently grasping the contents of the entire unit 1290, there is an effect that the management/control/information collection of all the units 1290 in the system α_1132 can be performed quickly and easily. .

Section 3.3 Specific Unit Management Examples and Display Examples In many cases, the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) automatically collects information from the unit 1290 and controls it. However, there may be cases where the user wants to manually control the specific unit 1290 or collect information from the specific unit 1290. In this case, a display example of the management screen of the unit 1290 displayed on the user I/F section 1234 in the system controller α_1126 shown in FIG. 2 will be described below. By the way, the following explanation will be given as an example of a display screen, but the method is not limited to this, and a similar method may be used as a management method for each unit 1290 based on the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128).

As already explained in Section 3.1, the feature of this embodiment is that "only one drive, folder, or directory is assigned to one system α_1132". The situation is shown in FIG. 21A. The multiple units 1290 within the system α_1132 are provided with various hierarchical structures (folder hierarchical structure or directory structure) to facilitate management.

21A(a) shows an example of hierarchization (folder/directory division) for each content of the unit 1290, and FIG. 21(b) shows an example of hierarchization (folder/directory division) for each section 1142 divided within the same system α_1132. ) is shown below. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to appropriately hierarchize (folder/directory division) according to the user's convenience.

Here, examples of display/management when moving to a lower layer according to the hierarchy (folder/directory division) shown in FIG. 21A(a) are shown in FIGS. 21B to 21D. In the display/management example shown in FIG. 21A(a), there is a list data folder 2610 and a unit 1290 in which the address table shown in FIG. 23, the estimation/judgment collation table shown in FIG. 27, and the time series information tracking table shown in FIG. Folders divided by format are arranged in the "T drive" corresponding to the unit management pseudo drive. As already explained in Section 1.2 using FIG. 3A, there are three types of units 1290: "equipment 1250 alone", "composite module 1295 alone", "a combination of both", and "other". In accordance with this, in FIG. 21A(a), a device corresponding folder 2612 and a composite module corresponding folder 2614 are arranged.

Next, an example of display contents (internal structure) in the composite module corresponding folder 2614 is shown in FIG. 21B. As already explained in Section 1.3, the composite module 1295 includes a sensor/communication module 1460, a drive/communication module 1470, a processor/communication module 1465, a memory/communication module 1475, a display/communication module 1478, etc. Permissible. Accordingly, in FIG. 21B, a sensor/communication module folder 2622, a drive/communication module folder 2624, a processor/communication module folder 2626, a memory/communication module folder 2628, and another function/communication module folder 2630 are included in FIG. and each is managed accordingly.

Furthermore, an example of display contents (internal structure) in the sensor/communication module corresponding folder 2622 is shown in FIG. 21C. As already explained in Section 2.5, there are two types of sensor information detected and acquired by the sensor/communication module 1460: binary information and multi-value information. Accordingly, in FIG. 21C, a binary data compatible folder 2634 and a multivalued data compatible folder 2638 are arranged and managed accordingly.

Finally, in FIG. 21D(a), all the sensor/communication modules 1460 belonging to the binary data corresponding folder 2634 are arranged as pseudo files. By displaying/managing in this manner, it is possible to manage/control/collect information in units of one unit 1290 in a very simple manner. The sensor information content detected/acquired by the sensor/communication module 2_1460-2 can be displayed to the user as shown in FIG. 21D(b) by clicking, for example, like opening a conventional file. When the inside of the drive/communication module 1470 is opened, the current setting status is displayed. Then, by pasting (inserting) another numerical value in the display area of FIG. 21D(b) regarding the unit 1290 that can control (change the setting state) the drive/communication module 1470, etc., it is possible to easily control (change the setting state). ) can be performed. Adopting such a display method and management method has the effect that the user can control (change setting state) the specific unit 1290 very easily and quickly.

Chapter 4 Overview of Sections in the System of this Embodiment In this Chapter 4, we will first explain the basic concept of "sections" in the system of this embodiment. Then, we will explain how to collect information and provide services using the concepts in that section. Finally, we will explain a method for detecting the location of a transmitting node using radio waves emitted from the transmitting node and services using this method.

Section 4.1 Positioning of sections within the system of this embodiment A “section” in the system of this embodiment is defined as “a unit related to the integration or management of information collected within the system” and “a unit related to the integration or management of information collected within the system” and “a unit related to the provision of services performed within the system”. defined as at least one of the following: Therefore, the units corresponding to the above sections may be used both for the purpose of integrating/managing collected information and for providing services. In addition, when serving both purposes in this way, services may be provided to users in conjunction with (or based on) the results of the integration/management of the collected information.

Furthermore, the above unit may refer to a group of functions related to information collection and service provision within the same system. Furthermore, the unit is not limited to this, and as another form of the above unit, it may mean a group of predetermined spatial relationships within the same system. The specific content of this spatially related group may be a group in a predetermined continuous space within the same system. However, the specific content of the spatially related clusters is not limited thereto, and may be, for example, a predetermined collection of discretely distributed (stepping stone) clusters of continuous spaces. In this case, the different distribution states of section 1_1122-1 and section 2_1122-2 within the same system α_1132 may be mixed.

As shown in FIG. 1, the same system α_1132 is composed of one or more sections. Therefore, the entire system α_1132 may spatially completely overlap one section 1_1122-1, or may be divided into a plurality of sections 1_1122-1 to m_1122-m. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited thereto, and parts of a plurality of different sections 1_1122-1 to m_1122-m may spatially overlap with each other.

First, the positioning of the above sections will be explained using an example shown in FIG. FIG. 25 shows a situation where one building is divided into two rooms. Then, spatial units such as section 1_1122-1 (room on the left) and section 2_1122-2 (room on the right) are assigned to each room. Here, as shown in Figure 25(a), the lighting fixtures are on in the room on the left (inside section 1_1122-1), and the lighting fixtures are off in the room on the right (inside section 2_1122-2) (in the off state). ) Consider the state. Then, a plurality of optical sensors (a sensor module 1260 with a light detection function may be built into the device 1250 (FIG. 1), or a sensor/communication module 1460 may be configured as shown in FIG. 8B) are installed in both sections 1_1122. -1, 2_1122-2. Then, when (system controller α_1126) integrates/manages the sensor information obtained from the optical sensors arranged in section 1_1122-1, a large amount of light amount detection information can be obtained from all the sensor information. On the other hand, only small light amount detection information can be obtained from all the optical sensors arranged in section 2_1122-2. In this way, commonality appears in the sensor information obtained from sections 1_1122-1 and 2_1122-2. A major feature of the system of this embodiment is that the state within each section 1_1122-1 and 2_1122-2 is estimated/judged by integrating or managing various sensor information obtained for each section 1_1122-1 and 2_1122-2. . Then, when estimating/judging the state within the same section 1122, the result of integrating or managing a plurality of pieces of information collected from this section 1122 is used to improve the accuracy of the estimation/judgment.

Next, consider a case where only the air conditioner installed in section 1_1122-1 is operated to perform air conditioning as shown in FIG. 25(b) in a very cold outside air environment. In this case, since the air conditioning is not working in section 2_1122-2, the "warmth service" is not provided to the user in the room on the right. However, no matter where the user is in the room on the left, a "warmth provision service" is being provided to the user. In this way, the same services can often be commonly provided within the same section 1122. In this way, in the system of this embodiment, by "controlling the provision of services for each section 1122" to the users, the effect of facilitating service management for users within the same system α_1132 is produced. Furthermore, compared to the service provided by the entire system α_1132, by providing the service in units of sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m, detailed services can be provided to the users, which has the effect of improving end user satisfaction.

Here, an example of a "room" is used to explain a section, but the system of this embodiment is not limited to this, and any spatial unit that meets the above definition may correspond to a section.

In the system of this embodiment, the system controller α_1126, which controls/manages/collects information on network communication within the network system α_1132, may divide the inside of the system α_1132 into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. As mentioned above, the system controller α_1126 automatically detects "areas that become dark at the same time," "areas that become bright at the same time," or "areas where the temperature rises or falls at the same time." It can be divided into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. Alternatively, the classification may be based on the results of photography by a camera or the like. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and division into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m may be performed by direct designation by the user.

Section 4.2 How to manage the placement locations of various modules and devices within sections As explained in the example above, the system controller α_1126 collects information within the corresponding system α_1132 and stores it for each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. In order to estimate/judge the state of the unit, it is necessary to know in advance which section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m each unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) is placed in. Yes. In order to make this possible, information on sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m arranged for each of one or more units 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) existing in the same system α_1132 is managed. There is a great feature in that. Another way to express this feature is as follows. That is, a plurality of units 1290 (FIG. 2) each having a function (which is handled by the communication module 1660 in FIG. 4A) of independently acquiring or creating information (corresponding to the function of the other functional module 1440 in FIG. 4A) and communicating the obtained information. and a system controller α_1126 (FIG. 1) that acquires and manages the information from the plurality of units 1290, and the system controller α_1126 manages each unit 1290 by dividing it into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. However, the system controller α_1126 holds information regarding the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m to which each unit 1290 belongs.

On the other hand, when looking at the above characteristics from the perspective of the system α_1132 (client system), the characteristics as the client system can be expressed as follows. In other words, this client system (system α_1132) can be connected to an external cloud (server n_1116-n), and has the function of acquiring or creating and transmitting information to be provided to the system controller α_1126 that manages information and the system controller α_1126. The system controller α_1126 manages the unit 1290 by dividing it into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, and holds information regarding the section to which each unit 1290 belongs.

The address table shown in FIG. 23, which will be described later, corresponds to the information regarding the section belonging to each unit 1290.

Therefore, in this section 4.2, we will mainly explain the management method for realizing the above features. Note that the following explanation is based on a system model in which a system controller α_1126 installed in the system α_1132 shown in FIGS. 2 and 8A/B manages, operates, or controls the network communication system α_1132. However, the following explanation is not limited to that, and the system controller β_1128 or server n_1116-n installed outside the system α_1132 in FIG. 9 manages and operates the network communication system α_1132 via the router (gateware) 1300. Alternatively, it may be adapted to a system model that performs control. In this case, the system controller α_1126 in the explanation below may be replaced with the system controller β_1128 or the server n_1116-n.

In order to manage the units 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) arranged in each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, the address table in FIG. 23, which will be described later, is stored in the memory in the system controller α_1126 shown in FIG. 1232 (and within system controller β_1128 in FIG. 1). Here, the example of entry in the address table in FIG. 23 shows that the sensor/communication modules 1460-1 to 5 and drive/communication modules 1470-1 to 2 in FIG. 8B and the devices 1250-1 to 3 in FIG. 8A are in the same system α_1132. An example of a mixed arrangement is shown. However, in the system of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8A, a plurality of sensor modules 1260-1 and 2 are allowed to be built into one device 1250-1. Different types of sensor information are obtained from each sensor module 1260-1 and 1260-2. Therefore, in order to collect various information and estimate/judge the status of each section 1142, instead of managing the installation locations of devices 1250-1 to 3 using an address table, it is necessary to It is desirable to manage information on sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m in which the individual sensor modules 1260-1 to 1260-5 and the individual drive modules 1270-1 are installed.

In the example of description in the address table in FIG. 23, sensor module 1260-1, drive module 1270-1, drive/communication module 1470-2, and sensor/communication module 1460-5 are arranged in a horizontal row related to "section information". The locations of all sections are listed together. From this, it can be seen that the sensor module 1260-1 is located within section 2_1142-2. In the system of this embodiment, the various composite modules 1460 and 1470 arranged in each section 1142, each sensor module 1260, and each drive module 1270 are managed in real time through the creation and maintenance of the address table. However, in the system of this embodiment, the method is not limited to the above method, and any method of managing placement locations that can be managed by the system controller α_1126 may be used.

The system of this embodiment is characterized in that it allows a plurality of different systems (client systems) to coexist at the same time. The following content can be specified as a newly generated feature by combining the above-mentioned address table (FIG. 23) with the result of considering the feature and the content described in FIG. 2. That is, the client system (system α_1132) is connectable to an external cloud (server n_1116-n), and includes a unit 1290 having a function (played by the communication module 1660 in FIG. 4A) of communicating independently acquired or created information. A composite client system including a plurality of client systems α_1132 (a plurality of client systems α_1126 and client systems β_1134) including a system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the unit 1290 (corresponding to domain 2_1122-2 in FIG. 1). The system controller α_1126, which manages the client system α_1132 included in the composite client system (domain 2_1122-2), can send the information independently acquired or created to the system controller α_1126. Units 1295-1 to -7 are managed by dividing them into sections (section 1_1142-1, section 2_1142-1, and section m_1142-m in FIG. 2), and information regarding the section to which each unit belongs (address table in FIG. 23) It has the characteristic of holding.

Next, FIG. 22 shows a method for creating and maintaining the address table. First, in Step 101, sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m within the same system_1132 are defined. Here, a major feature of the system of this embodiment is that a section is first defined (Step 101), and based on this, arrangement information is set for each section 1142 or arrangement information is managed (Step 102 or Step 103). In this way, by managing the placement locations of various modules and various devices according to the initially defined section division state, there is an effect that it becomes easier to estimate and judge the state of each section in real time. In addition to this, another effect is created, which is that it is easier to manage the placement locations of various modules and various devices.

In particular, as described later in Section 5.2.3, in the field of social infrastructure, there may be multiple different section definition methods within the same region. In other words, in the example of FIG. 35, instead of setting each section 1142 for each address on the map, the sections 1142 may be divided along the piping of a water pipe or the sections 1142 may be set along the wiring route of the distribution power line. There may be multiple definition methods such as dividing. Therefore, in the field of social infrastructure, it is desirable to define a method for dividing sections 1142 independently for each purpose of use, based on some standard information such as map information.

On the other hand, in the consumer field, the section 1142 may be defined automatically according to the user's definition, such as ``room allocation within a single house''. For example, a user can take a picture of the inside of their home with a video camera (or smartphone, tablet, or mobile phone with a built-in camera) equipped with a GPS (Global Positioning System) function, and automatically analyze the captured video as shown in Figure 24. This section 1142 can be automatically defined. In the above example, the user specifies how to define section 1142. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and for example, "section 1142 division is defined by room allocation" may be set in advance as a default. This default setting has the effect of reducing the burden on the user at Step 101. Alternatively, after the section is automatically divided according to the default section division method, the user may partially modify the section division method using the user I/F unit 1234 in the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 8A. Alternatively, the center position information of each room may be input using the GPS function, and the input results may be analyzed to automatically define the sections. In this embodiment, the physical spatial position information of sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m may be obtained by any method other than the above method. For example, in the method described above, some kind of user intervention is required to define this section. However, the physical spatial position information of sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m may be obtained without any user intervention. As an example of a specific method, a robot cleaner equipped with a camera and a GPS function may be used to sweep across rooms (section 1142) in a predetermined house while measuring the room layout and the location information of each room. Using this method has the effect that the physical spatial position information of sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m can be obtained very easily without placing any burden on the user.

In addition, as another application example of this embodiment, the section definition (Step 101) is not performed first, and the section definition is automatically performed using information obtained from various units 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 and equipment 1250). You can also define it. That is, at least some of the various composite modules 1460, 1470 and various devices 1250 arranged in the system α_1132 are first operated, and after the operation, the section 1142 is divided. As a result, the user is not aware of the section definition (Step 101) within the same system, which has the effect of reducing the psychological burden on the user. The specific details of the above method will be explained below. As will be described later, the system controller α_1126 can grasp the location information of the various composite modules 1460, 1470 and the various devices 1250 in real time through initial settings (Step 102) and automatic tracking of movement positions (Step 103). Also, as explained in Section 4.1 using FIG. 25(a), when the user acts and the state in section 2_1142-2 changes, synchronization is performed from the composite modules 1460, 1470 and equipment 1250 placed therein. state change related information can be obtained. Therefore, by checking the synchronicity with respect to changes in information (sense information, state setting control information, etc.) obtained from the units 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 and equipment 1250) arranged in the system α_1132, various composite modules The relationship between the locations of 1460, 1470 and various devices 1250 can be predicted. By repeating this synchronicity detection multiple times over time, it is possible to accurately estimate/judge the positional relationship of the units 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 and equipment 1250) arranged in the same section 1142. Then, the system controller α_1126 enters the estimation/judgment result in the section information column in the address table of FIG.

Next, the initial setting method (Check-in method) of various units 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 and device 1250) corresponding to Step 102 in FIG. 22 will be explained. In the internal structure of the sensor/communication module 1460 in FIG. 5, a near-field communication module 1560 is compatible with near-field wireless, such as TransferJet, a near field wireless transfer technology, and FeliCa (a coined word combining Felicity and Card), a contactless IC card standard. may be built-in. Further, although not shown, a similar near-field communication module 1560 may be built into the drive/communication module 1670 and the device 1250. When the composite modules 1460, 1470 or the device 1250 in one example of the system of the present embodiment are newly installed, a portable external device with a built-in GPS (Global Positioning System) function ( (not shown) may be brought closer to communicate with the near-field communication module 1560. This portable external device, together with the near-field communication module 1560 compatible with near-field wireless, is connected to the system controller α_1126 via the same system network line 1782 (see explanation in Section 2.1 using FIG. 10A). It also has a built-in communication module 1202 that can communicate information between them. During this initial setting, the system controller α_1126 inputs the IP address information IPADRS (for details, refer to the explanation in Section 2.4 using FIG. 13) of the new composite module 1460, 1470 or device 1250 (targeted for initial setting). Automatically register. Also, during this near-field communication, the system controller α_1126 sends the new composite module 1460, 1470 or device 1250: (1) this newly registered IP address information IPADRS, (2) the IP address information IPADRS on the system controller α_1126 side, ( 3) PAN-specific identification information PANID of the location where the current portable external device is located (see explanation in Section 2.3 using Figure 12A), (4) PAN corresponding to the location where the system controller α_1126 is installed The unique identification information PANID and (5) the IEEE extended address EXADRS owned by the system controller α_1126 are transmitted. Then, using this near-field communication, the new composite module 1460, 1470 or device 1250 (targeted for initial settings) sends (6) information about the IEEE extended address EXADRS that it owns to the system controller α_1126. . By exchanging information between the two using means such as near-field communication during the initial setting (Step 102), preparations for information communication using the same system network line 1782 are completed. Here, a method using the above-mentioned near-field communication has been described as an example of a method for exchanging information at the time of initial setting. However, the system of this embodiment is not limited to this, and information exchange at the time of initial setting may be performed by other means. Alternatively, as will be described later as another initial setting method, formal address exchange may be performed by first performing temporary communication on the same system network line 1782 using a temporary address. Therefore, instead of performing such near-field communication, the aforementioned portable external device with GPS function may simply be brought close. At this time, the system controller α_1126 automatically recognizes the GPS position information obtained from the portable external device as location information of the corresponding unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250). On the other hand, this system controller α_1126 compares the above GPS information with the GPS range information for each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m obtained in advance in the section definition in Step 101. Based on the comparison result, it is automatically estimated/determined in which section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m the newly placed unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is placed. , the result is registered in the corresponding location in the address table of FIG. Further, the results are displayed on the user I/F unit 1234 in FIG. 8A and notified to the user, and the user is asked to confirm whether the results are correct or not, and to make corrections to the registration as necessary.

In the above embodiment, a user operation is required for initial setting (Step 102) of the unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite module 1295). However, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and initial settings (Step 102) may be performed automatically. An example of its specific implementation will be explained. In this embodiment, the user assumes that the unit 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 and equipment 1250) is to be relocated midway, and as in Step 103, Automatic tracking is possible. Here, the method described later in Section 4.4 is used for this automatic tracking. Accordingly, during initialization, using the automatic tracking technique described above, system controller α_1126 monitors the location of the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or equipment 1250) to be initialized. Then, the resulting placement location information is compared with the GPS range information for each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, and the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be newly configured is applicable. The section 1142 to be assigned is automatically estimated/determined and registered in the corresponding location in the address table of FIG.

In addition, when the initial setting target unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) initially performs provisional communication on the same system network line 1782, (see Section 3), α) PAN-specific identification information SPANID on the sending side, β) PAN-specific identification information DPANID on the receiving side, γ) IEEE extended address DEXADRS on the receiving side, and (2) in Figure 13(b). In section 4), leave each information storage area of δ) sending side IP address information SIPADRS and ε) receiving side IP address information DIPADRS blank, or use the default predetermined in Z-format (see section 2.1). Values may also be stored. When the initial provisional communication is received from the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be initialized in this way, the system control α_1126 uses this default value (or blank state) to perform initialization. Information communication to the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be set can be started. Next, among the communication information sent from the system control α_1126, the aforementioned α) PAN-specific identification information SPANID on the initial setting target side and δ) IP address information SIPADRS on the initial setting target side are communication middleware data. It may be stored and transmitted in the APLDT storage area (see explanation in Section 2.2 using FIG. 11). Even in this case, since it is known that the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be initialized is located in the system α_1132, there is a risk that it will be initialized in a different domain 1122 by mistake. There is no gender. Since the above method does not involve the user during the initial setting, it has the advantage that the initial setting operation can be performed automatically without placing any burden on the user.

As explained above, a major feature of this embodiment is that "the position of the initial setting object is detected at the time of initial setting". This allows you to confirm that the system controller α_1126 is placed in the corresponding system α_1132 and its associated domain 2_1122-2. This has the advantage that there is no risk of initial settings (registration). Furthermore, since the initial setting method does not require any manual effort from the user, it not only reduces the mental burden on the user, but also improves the reliability of the initial setting process by preventing human errors. Furthermore, this embodiment has the following feature in that ``the section belonging state of the initial setting object is also defined at the time of initial setting''. This has the effect that even immediately after the initial settings, services can be provided in section units using the initial settings objects.

By the way, here we define the process of making the newly purchased unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) usable in domain 2_1122-2 as "initial setting", and in particular "Check-in" You can call it that. On the other hand, after initialization, the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) once leaves domain 2_1142-2, re-enters the same domain 2_1142-2, and enters system α_1132 or system β_1134. The process of restoring the network to a state where network communication is possible may be defined as a "plug-in."

Such a plug-in target unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) belongs to the same domain 2_1122-2 as the preset "δ) plug-in side IP address information SIPADRS". For either system controller α_1126 or β_1128, "ε) IP address information DIPADRS set in the other system controller" is known. Therefore, as explained in Section 2.1 with reference to FIG. ) is located anywhere in the world, network communication is possible in principle.

Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, the plug-in target unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is placed within the physical area defined by either system α_1132 or β_1134 belonging to the same domain 2_1122-2. Automatic plug-in processing may be performed depending on whether the plug-in is installed or not. Specifically, the systems α_1132 and β_1134 check the placement location of the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) targeted by the plug-in using the same method as the initial setting described above. That is, the system controllers α_1132 and β_1134 always monitor the information communication status on the network line 1782 (see FIG. 10A and section 2.1 for explanation using FIG. 16) within the same system, and the information communication status is registered in the address table of FIG. 23. It is constantly confirmed that there is no information communication from other than the connected unit 1290 (equipment 1250 (sensor module 1260 and drive module 1270) and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470). When information communication is discovered from a unit other than the unit 1290 (equipment 1250 (sensor module 1260 and drive module 1270) and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) registered in the address table of FIG. Check the contents of address information SIPADRS. Then, if the content of this sending side IP address information SIPADRS is information used in the past in systems α_1132 and β_1134, plug-in processing is started. If the information is other than that, initialization processing is started. In other words, system controllers α_1126 and β_1128 always manage the placement locations of units 1290 (equipment 1250 (sensor module 1260 and drive module 1270 therein) and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) in systems α_1132 and β_1134. Then, it automatically detects that the plug-in target unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) enters the physical area defined by either system α_1132 or β_1134 belonging to the same domain 2_1122-2, Automatically performs plugin processing. During this plug-in process, the user I/F unit 1234 may be used to confirm with the user whether or not the plug-in is possible. At the final stage of the plug-in process, information related to the plug-in unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is added to the address table in FIG. 23. In this way, the system controllers α_1126 and β_1128 automatically start the plug-in process according to the position of the plug-in object, so there is no need for any manual work by the user. This has the effect that "plug-in" processing can be executed very easily without placing any burden on the user.

When the plug-in processing described above is viewed from the viewpoint of the system α_1126 (client system) described in Chapter 1, the following characteristics can be shown. That is, the client system (system α_1126) in the system of this embodiment includes a unit 1290 that has a function of acquiring or creating information and communicating, and a system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the unit, and the system controller α_1126 manages each of the plurality of units 1290 by dividing them into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, and holds information (address table in FIG. 23) regarding the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m to which each unit 1290 belongs, It holds information regarding the units (FIG. 21D), and includes the units 1290 already registered in the information regarding sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m to which each unit 1290 belongs (address table in FIG. 23). When registering a new unit with a different name, (1) check in advance whether the new unit that requires new registration has already been registered in the above information (address table in FIG. 23); 2) Check that the new unit is not registered in the information mentioned above (address table in Figure 23), (3) Register the new unit in the information mentioned above (address table in Figure 23), and (4) Check which section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m the new unit belongs to, and (5) Add information regarding the section to which the new unit belongs to the above information (address table in FIG. 23). It is characterized by

In particular, the above address table includes information regarding the first section (i.e., information about the units 1290 belonging to the first section) and information regarding the second section (i.e., the information about the units 1290 belonging to the second section) regarding the plurality of units 1290. It is characterized by the fact that it contains information on

Furthermore, regarding the above address table, the following feature also exists in that the information is recorded as time series information.

As the features have been clarified above, this embodiment has a particularly significant feature in that it is possible to "detect the position of an object and plug in". Furthermore, it has the following feature in that ``the section belonging state of the object is also defined at the time of plug-in''. The effects of these features match the effects of the initial settings described above.

Further, whether or not plug-in processing corresponding to this embodiment has been performed is determined by the address table (stored in the memory unit 1232 in the system controller α_1126 shown in FIG. 2) managed by the system controller α_1126 (see FIG. 23). ) can be easily determined by deciphering the changes in the written content.

Another confirmation method is when the newly registered unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is moved from the outside of the system α_1132 to the inside. It is also possible to check changes in the content of the communication information. That is, for example, first, the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is placed in another domain 1_1122-1. Then, the receiving side IP address information DIPADRS (Fig. 13(b)/Section 2.4) in the communication information sent from the newly registered unit 1290 located in domain 1_1122-1 is a reception corresponding to the above system α_1132. An address different from the side IP address information DIPADRS is stored. Similarly, the receiving side addresses (FIG. 10A & FIG. 16 & FIG. 11/Section 2.2) set in the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 also store information different from that of the system α_1132. After that, this new registration target unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is moved into the system α_1132, and the corresponding address after the plug-in processing is completed is confirmed. The receiver IP address information DIPADRS in the communication information sent from the newly registered unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) after the plug-in process is completed is the receiver IP address information DIPADRS of the system α_1132 (or in the system of FIG. System controller β_1128). Also, the receiving side address set in the media access layer MAC02, MAC06 (for example, the PAN-specific identification information DPANID on the receiving side and the IEEE extended address DEXADRS on the receiving side in FIG. 12A(e) related to Section 2.3) , corresponds to system α_1132 (or system controller β_1128 in the system of FIG. 9).

For reference, changes in the address information in the communication information during the plug-in process will be explained below. First, we will begin with a description of what happens immediately after the location of the newly registered unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250), which was previously connected to the network in another domain 1_1122-1, is moved. If the new registration target unit 1290 is the device 1250-1, the new registration target unit 1290 is equipped with a GPS function, so that the device 1250 itself can recognize the change in location. If the system α_1132 has been installed in the past (before this plug-in process), the IP address information IPADRS and media access information of the system controller α are stored in the memory section 1242 of the compatible device 1250-1. Addresses set within layers MAC02 and MAC06 are saved. Therefore, the compatible device 1250-1 uses this information to communicate information to the system controller α. Note that from now on, when the sending side IP address information SIPADRS and the receiving side IP address information DIPADRS shown in FIG. 13(b) are collectively referred to, they will be simply expressed as IP address information IPADRS. Similarly, when the IEEE extended address DEXADRS on the receiving side and the IEEE extended address SEXADRS on the transmitting side shown in FIG. 12A(e) are collectively called, they are written as IEEE extended address EXADRS.

On the other hand, if the compatible device 1250-1 has never been placed in this system α_1132, the information in the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06, such as the sending side IP address information SIPADRS and the IEEE extended address SEXADRS on the sending side, The address area to be set is made blank or predetermined dummy information is stored, and the information is communicated within the system α_1132 to prompt the system controller α_ to perform initial setting processing (Step 102 in FIG. 22).

By the way, when the above newly registered unit 1290 is a composite module 1295, 1460, or 1470, it basically does not have a GPS function. Therefore, in this case, the newly registered unit 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) does not know that the location has been moved. Therefore, even after the new registration target unit 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470) is moved, it transmits the same communication information within the system α_1132 as when it was located in another domain 1_1122-1.

System controller α_1126 (or β_1128) constantly monitors communication information within system α_1132. Therefore, media access layer information such as unexpected IP address information IPADRS or IEEE extended address EXADRS may be included in the physical layer frame PPDU (FIG. 11(f)) communicated on the network line 1782 (FIG. 10A, FIG. 16) within the same system. When it is discovered that the address information set in MAC02 and MAC06 is stored, the location of the source of the corresponding physical layer frame PPDU is determined using the method described later in Section 4.4 (and Figures 31 to 34). confirm. If the location of the target transmission source is within the area of step α_1126 (based on the section definition result of Step 101 in FIG. 22), initial setting processing (Step 102) or plug-in processing is started.

Both this initial setting and plug-in processing use the sender's address (such as the IEEE extended address SEXADRS on the sender's side) set in the media access layer MAC02 and MAC06 and stored in the above physical layer frame PPDU. Information is then communicated (transmitted) from the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) to the newly registered unit 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470). By receiving this information, the new registration target unit 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) on the receiving side receives the IP address IPADRS of the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128), the address in the media access layer MAC02, MAC06, etc. and the IP address (IPADRS) set on the receiving side during initial setup.

As the next step, the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250-1) to be newly registered (initial setting/plugin target) uses the above received information to use the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128). As a result, the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250-1) to be initialized/plugged in can confirm that correct address information has been acquired. Then, the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) checks the contents of the communication information sent from the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250-1) that is newly registered (initial setting/plug-in target). After confirming that initial settings or plug-in processing have been performed correctly, regular registration processing in the address table shown in FIG. 23 is performed.

In this embodiment, as described in Section 1.8 using FIG. 8B, a composite module 1295 such as the sensor/communication module 1460-5 can exist independently. Alternatively, it may exist in the form of being inserted or mixed into a specific product or part. Therefore, the user can carry this composite module 1295 and move around. Therefore, the specific composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 (or device 1250) carried by the user can also be moved between different sections 1142 after initial setup. In other words, the composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 (or equipment 1250) that can be moved together with the user while existing alone or inserted or mixed into a product or part are moved to a moving position as shown in Step 103 of FIG. is automatically tracked, and as shown in Step 104 in FIG. 22, it is possible to repeatedly determine the section to which the current location belongs after the move. Then, based on the latest placement information, sense information and status information from the composite modules 1460, 1470 and devices 1250 of each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m are collected and services are provided to the user (Step 105). The accuracy of status grasping for each of 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m is improved, which has the effect of improving user satisfaction.

Next, a detailed explanation will be given regarding the automatic tracking method of the movement position of the unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) described in Step 103 of FIG. 22. In this step 103, as described later in Section 4.4, a technique for detecting the location of the source of the radio waves transmitted from the target unit 1290 (device 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) may be used. . That is, when wireless is used as the physical medium (communication medium) of the network line 1782 (FIG. 10A or FIG. ) transmits radio waves to communicate information to the system controller α_1126. Then, the communication information is analyzed within the system controller α_1126 (for example, as described later, the sending side IP address information in FIG. 13(b) and the IEEE extended address SEXADRS on the sending side are extracted and the address table in FIG. 23 is referred to) This makes it possible to determine in real time which unit 1290 (equipment 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) in the system α_1132 is transmitting radio waves for each physical layer frame PPDU (FIG. 11). At the same time, by using the radio wave transmission source location detection technology described later in Section 4.4, it is possible to obtain the physical location information of the radio wave transmission source in real time for each physical layer frame PPDU. In this way, by comparing the two pieces of information for each physical layer frame PPDU, the physical position information for each unit 1290 (each device 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) is determined.

In this way, each time the system controller α_1126 receives the above-mentioned physical layer frame PPDU, the system controller α_1126 determines (in the same manner as the initial setting described above) that each unit 1290 (equipment 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) belongs to ( Sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m (located in the middle) are determined. Then, the determined result is successively compared with the contents written in the address table in FIG. 23. If there is no difference in the comparison results, it is assumed that ``the corresponding device 1250 and the composite modules 1460 and 1470 have not moved beyond the section 1142,'' and the address table is not rewritten. On the other hand, if a difference is found in the comparison results, it may be assumed that the specific device 1250 or the specific composite modules 1460, 1470 has moved beyond the section 1142, and the address table may be rewritten and the process may proceed to the next step 104. As described above, a major feature of this embodiment is that it "owns information related to section 1142 (address table, etc.)." In the movement position automatic tracking step (Step 103) of the unit 1290 (equipment or composite module), the presence or absence of movement beyond the section 1142 is determined using the information related to the section 1142. In Step 103, the placement location of each unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) is managed in units of section 1142. Even if there is a slight movement, it is assumed that ``no movement has occurred beyond section 1142'' and predetermined processing such as rewriting the address table is not performed. This has the effect of efficiently collecting information and providing services to users. In order to explain this effect, a comparison will be made with a method in which feedback is given sequentially to slight movements of the unit 1290 (equipment or composite module). For example, when a user wears a particular portable composite module, there are frequent opportunities for the user to move within the same section 1142. If feedback processing (such as updating the address table or transitioning to the next Step 104) is performed every time the user moves slightly, the processing within the system controller α_1126 becomes extremely complicated. On the other hand, as explained using FIG. 25(a) in Section 4.1, even if the unit 1290 (equipment or composite module) moves slightly within the same section 1142, the content of the obtained sensor information will change. There are many cases where there is no. Further, as explained in FIG. 25(b), services are often provided to users in units of sections 1142. Therefore, even if feedback is provided every time the user moves slightly, the efficiency of improving the quality of service provided to the user will not increase much.

As a result of automatic tracking of the movement position of the unit 1290 (equipment or composite module) in Step 103 of FIG. Proceed to the next step 104. Therefore, if there is no movement beyond section 1142, Step 104 may be skipped and the process proceeds to Step 105. By the way, the specific "processing to determine the section to which the current position of the unit 1290 (equipment or composite module) whose location has been moved" in Step 104 refers to the address table correction processing and the section performed within the system controller α_1126. This means the recombination processing of the units 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) arranged every 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m.

Here, when modifying this address table, only changes within a predetermined frame (inside a cell) are made, and rearrangement in units of vertical columns is not performed. Then, in order to improve the efficiency of state management and sensor information collection in units of sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, the above address table is copied to the temporary storage area in the processor 1230 of the system controller α_1126. The units 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) arranged every m are recombined (rearranged in units of vertical columns).

Further, in Step 105 in FIG. 22, "collection of sensor/state information from the target unit 1290 (device or composite module) or provision of service to the user" is performed for each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. As a specific content, the method described in Section 4.2 using FIGS. 26A to 30 is used.

Thereafter, the moving position of the unit 1290 (device or composite module) is automatically tracked (Step 103) as appropriate, and the above series of processes is repeated.

However, in the system of this embodiment, "plug-out" processing may be automatically performed for a specific unit 1290 (equipment 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) using automatic tracking of the moving position. In other words, if a unit 1290 (equipment 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) that has gone outside the physical area range of each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m defined in Step 101 is discovered, "corresponding network communication It is assumed that the item is no longer managed by the system α_1132, and the corresponding item (the entire corresponding vertical column) is temporarily deleted from the address table. However, in order to flexibly support future "re-plugin" processing, information on the IP address IPADRS and IEEE extended address EXADRS of the temporarily deleted unit 1290 (equipment 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) is stored in the memory section 1232. (in the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 8A). Immediately before performing the "plug-out" process, it may be displayed on the user I/F unit 1234 (in the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 8A) to inquire of the user whether or not the plug-out is possible.

The characteristics of the above plug-out process will be explained from the perspective of the system α_1132 (client system) as follows. That is, the client system that is the system of this embodiment includes a unit 1290 that has a function of acquiring or creating information and communicating, and a system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the unit 1290, and the system controller α_1126 has a plurality of units. It manages the units 1290 by dividing them into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, and holds information regarding the section to which each unit belongs (address table in FIG. 23), as well as information regarding the unit (FIG. 21D). do. Furthermore, if the information from the unit cannot be reacquired, the system controller α_1126 temporarily removes the information (address table in FIG. 23) regarding the section to which each unit belongs from being managed.

On the other hand, in the re-plug-in process described above, if the information from the unit can be re-acquired in addition to the above as a further feature of the client system, the system controller α_1126 receives the information regarding the section to which each unit belongs. (address table in FIG. 23).

Regarding the above plug-out process, information regarding the first section of the plurality of units 1290 (that is, information of the unit 1290 belonging to the first section) and information regarding the second section (that is, the second The feature is that it includes (information on units 1290 belonging to the section).

Furthermore, the following feature also exists in that the information is recorded as time-series information in the address table in relation to the above plug-out process.

Now, check the communication history from the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) after moving the unit 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 or equipment 1250) previously placed in the system α_1132 out of the system α_1132. This will tell you whether or not this "plug-out" process can be executed. That is, when a "plug-out" process is performed, after a predetermined period of time after the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is moved out of the system α_1132, this unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1460, There is no information communication from the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) to the device 1470 or the device 1250).

In other words, the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128), which manages, operates, and controls the network communication system α_1132, transmits communication information on the network line 1782 within the same system in units of physical layer frames PPDU as shown in FIG. 11(f). The placement position is monitored. If a physical layer frame PPDU is sent from outside the system α_1132, the corresponding unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is deleted from the address table in FIG. 23 immediately (after confirming with the user). The plug-out process is completed. Once the plug-out process is completed, there is no information communication from the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) to the corresponding unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) until the plug-in process is performed again.

On the other hand, due to timing issues, the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) may not temporarily recognize the circumstances in which a specific unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) has been moved outside the system α_1126. . In this case, information is communicated from the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) to the corresponding unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250). However, in this case, no response is received to the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128). If no reply is received, information communication is performed again, and if no reply is received twice in a row, the relevant location in the address table of FIG. 23 is deleted and the plug-out process is completed. By the way, during the plug-out processing described above, an inquiry may be made to the user via the user I/F unit 1234 (FIGS. 8A & 8B) in the system controller α_1126.

However, if the time required between moving a particular unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or equipment 1250) outside of system α_1126 and completing plug-out is too long, this will be discussed later in Section 4.3. The accuracy of estimation/judgment of system α_1132 and user's actions/requests decreases. Here, as a delay time until the service is provided in response to a state change, a typical user can tolerate a delay of up to 5 or 10 minutes. Also, if you are a patient user, you can tolerate a delay of about 15 minutes. However, if the delay exceeds an hour, most users become dissatisfied. Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, the time required from moving the specific unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) outside the system α_1126 to completing the plug-out is preferably 15 minutes or less. It is set to be 5 minutes or less. Also, for the above reasons, the duration should be one hour or less in the worst case.

A major feature is that ``the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) that has gone outside the physical range of the system α_1132 is plugged out''. By using the placement location of the unit 1290 (combined modules 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) for plug-out determination in this way, plug-in operations can be easily performed while maintaining high reliability without placing any burden on the user. It is effective. In other words, if wireless is used as the physical communication medium for the network line 1782 (FIG. 16) in the same system, the personal information protection function may be accidentally crossed with the network communication line in another adjacent domain 1122. There was a risk that this would decrease. In order to avoid the above-mentioned risks, the user is required to perform complicated initial setting processing and plug-in/plug-out processing. On the other hand, as described above, if the automatically detected location information can be used to perform initial setting processing and plug-in/plug-out processing without placing a burden on the user, interference with other adjacent network communication lines can be prevented. Another effect is that security and personal information protection functions can be guaranteed.

By the way, the explanation has been made so far that the system controller α_1126 located in the system α_1132 performs the series of processes shown in FIG. 22. However, the system controller β_1128 and the server n_1116-n, which are placed outside of this system α_1132 due to the spatial layout, can be used as shown in FIG. 22. You may also perform the following operations.

Section 4.3 Processing method from information collection to service provision for each section In this Section 4.3, we will explain the specific processing content from “collection of sensor/status information to provision of service to users” related to Step 105 in Figure 22. Explain. In particular, the characteristics described in Section 4.3 of this book from the perspective of system α_1132 (client system) are as follows. That is, the client system that is the system of this embodiment includes a unit 1290 that has a function of acquiring or creating information and communicating, and a system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the unit, and the system controller α_1126 has a plurality of units. Each unit 1290 is divided into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m and managed, and information regarding the section to which each unit belongs (address table in FIG. 23) is held. In addition, state change information from one unit 1290 is communicated to the system controller α_1126, and the other units 1290 in the same section 1142 are controlled based on the state change information. Furthermore, another feature of the system controller α_1126 is that other units within the same section are controlled using state changes from one unit 1290 at predetermined time intervals.

In addition, when looking at the above characteristics from the relationship with the server n_1116-n (cloud) shown in FIG. System controller α_1126 sends state changes from one unit 1290 to the cloud (server n_1116-n) while communicating to the system controller α_1126. The other units 1290 in the same section are controlled based on information from the cloud (server n_1116-n).

In other words, a major feature of the content explained in Section 4.3 is that ``services are provided based on multiple pieces of collected information.'' For example, if only a single piece of information is collected, the accuracy of estimating/determining the current state or the user's actions and requests decreases, making it difficult to provide services that satisfy the user. However, as explained here, "using multiple pieces of information" improves the accuracy of estimation/judgment, which has the effect of improving user satisfaction with the provided services.

On the other hand, another major feature is that ``when providing a service, multiple state change controls (changes in setting states) are carried out in coordination.'' By controlling multiple state changes (changes in setting conditions) within the same system α_1132 as a form of service provision that responds to user actions and requests, it is possible to provide users with detailed state changes, which increases user satisfaction. The effect of improving is created.

FIG. 26A shows a processing process within the system controller α_1126 from collecting various information from the system α_1132 to providing services. Here, the process of FIG. 26A is based on the embodiment system shown in FIG. 2 or FIG. 8A/B. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a system controller β_1128 placed outside the system α_1132 as shown in FIG. 9 may collect information/provide services. In this case, it is necessary to change the system controller α_1126 in the explanation below to the system controller β_1128.

First, upon receiving a service execution request (Step 110) from server n_1116-n or system controller β_1128, system controller α_1126 starts collecting information from within system α_1132 (Step 111). Here, the information to be collected is not limited to sensor information from the sensor/communication module 1460, but also sensor information from various sensor modules 1260 in the device 1250, current setting status information in the drive/communication module 1470, and device information. Contains current setting state information for the drive module 1250 (mainly the drive module 1270). Furthermore, as shown in Step 112, the system controller α_1126 may collect information from the server n_1116-n or the system controller β_1128. When a series of information collection is completed in this way, all the collected information is integrated and organized in the system controller α_1126, and necessary information is stored in the internal memory unit 1232 (Step 113).

Then, as the next step, the state within the same system α_1132 is estimated and determined (Step 114). Also, based on the estimated/judged state, the current behavior of the user is estimated and determined (Step 115). Here, the estimation/judgment of the state in Step 114 or the estimation/judgment of the user's current behavior in Step 115 includes estimating/judging the user's individual state, such as the height of the user and the color of clothes and accessories worn by the user. Judgments are also made. An example of how the estimation/judgment result of the user state affects the provision of services to the user (Step 119) is the sensitivity setting of a touch pad or a capacitive button. For example, for large adults with thick fingers, stable user input is possible even if the sensitivity of the touchpad or capacitive buttons is low. On the other hand, children and women with thin fingers may not be able to handle this without increasing the sensitivity of the touchpad or capacitive buttons. Therefore, the estimation/judgment result of the user state affects the provision of services to the user. After estimating/determining the thickness of the user's fingers, the communication information described in Section 2.5 is changed to change the sensitivity setting of the touch pad or capacitive button.

Then, based on the state/judgment (Step 114) result in the system α_1132 and the user's current behavior estimation/judgment (Step 115) result, the user's future behavior is predicted (Step 116) and the user's request is estimated/predicted (Step 117). I do.

Thereafter, the series of estimation/prediction results described above are displayed on the user I/F unit 1234 (FIGS. 8A and 8B), and the user is inquired and confirmed (Step 118). If the above series of estimation/prediction results are incorrect, the estimation/prediction of the state within the system α_1132 is started again in Step 114. Further, if the content of the confirmation to the user is correct, a service is provided to the user in Step 119. Then, the series of processing steps up to providing the service to this user are repeated as appropriate. Also, at the necessary timing, the server n_1116-n or the system controller β_1128 is notified of the above service provision (Step 109).

The present embodiment is characterized in that the various estimation/judgment processes executed in Steps 114 to 117 in FIG. 26A utilize a plurality of pieces of information collected in Step 111 or Step 112. The use of multiple pieces of information has the effect of improving the accuracy of estimation/judgment compared to estimation/judgment using only a single piece of information. The situation will be explained in detail using FIG. 26B.

When the state changes within the system α_1132 or when the user takes an action, there is a situation in which one of the ○ units 1290 (equipment 1250 or composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) moves across the section 1142 or ○ unit 1290 (device 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470), situations often occur in which the contents of various types of information change. Therefore, if only the section 1142 that corresponds to the above is selected in the system α_1132 and the series of estimation/judgment processes described above are performed only within the corresponding section 1142, the processing efficiency within the system controller α_1126 is increased. The process of finding the section 1142 in which either of the above two situations has occurred corresponds to Step 120 in FIG. 26B. Further, the work of extracting the unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) arranged in the corresponding section 1142 corresponds to Step 121. Here, in this Step 121, the address table shown in FIG. 23 is used.

Then, information is collected for a plurality of modules arranged in the same section 1142 from among the sensor module 1260, drive module 1270, sensor/communication module 1460, and drive/communication module 1470 listed in this address table. As a specific example, as shown in case 2 of FIG. 10B, the system controller α_1126 transmits a response request 1872 to each of the target modules, and obtains a response 1874 thereto.

In particular, the method of providing services to users shown in FIG. 26B is to automatically extract states that do not conform to the estimation/determination results performed for each corresponding section 1142, and to perform state change control or setting state changes for the non-conforming portions. Give instructions and perform conformance processing. An example of this service provision method is shown below. For example, when ``the user turns off the lights and TV in the room he was in and tries to leave the room'', the situation where ``the air conditioner in the room where the lights were turned off remains in operation'' is automatically considered a non-compliant state. Examples of methods include "automatically controlling the operating status of the air conditioner" as a suitable process. What is particularly important here is that it is difficult to predict what the user will do in the future with a single piece of information such as ``the user turned off the TV in the room he was in.'' However, in addition to that, by collecting multiple pieces of information within the same section 1142 such as "turn off the lights in the room", the accuracy of estimation/determination is improved. Furthermore, in this embodiment, by "extracting states that do not match the estimated/determined results" as described above, there is an effect that efficient service can be provided to users.

The above examples of "turning off the TV in the room the user has been in" and "the user turning off the lights in the room" are based on the units 1290 (equipment 1250, composite modules 1295, 1460, etc.) placed in a specific section. 1470) and current state information (Step 122). After collecting multiple pieces of information in the same section 1142 (Step 122), the state in the corresponding section is estimated/determined (Step 123), the user behavior is estimated/determined (Step 125), and the user request is estimated/determined (Step 127). . Then, information that does not conform to each estimation/judgment result is extracted (Steps 124, 126, and 128), and the user is instructed on a state change control method (how to change the setting state) for adapting the extracted nonconformity information to the estimation/judgment result. Inquire (Step 129). This inquiry to the user may be made using a display on the user I/F unit 1234 in the system controller α_1126. If the user rejects the estimation/judgment using the plural pieces of collected information (Steps 123, 125, 127), the process is restarted.

When permission is obtained from the user as a result of an inquiry to the user, a command 1852 (case 1 in FIG. 10B) is given to the drive module 1270 built into the device or the drive module 1270 in the drive/communication module 1470. The state change within the section 1142 is controlled (state setting change) to provide services to the user (Step 130).

In relation to Step 120 in FIG. 26B, ○ Extraction of units 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) that move across section 1142
The left side of the time-series information tracking table in Figure 27/Figure 28 (b) is used to extract information obtained from the unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) whose contents have changed. Also good. This time-series information tracking table records the history of various information collected by the system controller α_1126 and the history of various estimations/judgments based on it in a chronological list format along the elapsed time 2310. This information is added as needed and saved in the memory unit 1232 in the system controller α_1126. 27/28(b), various sensor information obtained from the various sensor modules 1260-1 and 2 in the device 1250-1 of FIG. 8A or the state (setting) set in the drive module 1270-1 values) are all written in the form of state A, etc. The number of the section where this device 1250-1 is located is also listed. On the other hand, the sense information of the sensor/communication module 1460-5, which is obtained as sense information in binary form (presence/absence), is also written on the left side of this time-series information tracking table. Also listed is the section number in which this sensor/communication module 1460-5 is located, which is obtained as a result of position detection using the method described later in Section 4.4.

For example, the sensor/communication module 1460-5 has a built-in photodetection sensor module, and the user wearing the sensor/communication module 1460-5 can move from section 2_1142-2 where the light is on to section 5_1142-5 where the light is off. This will be explained using an example when moving to . In this case, when the elapsed time 2310 is "t3", this sensor/communication module 1460-5 is located in section 2_1142-2. Further, the optical information detected by this sensor/communication module 1460-5 becomes "present". When the user moves between elapsed time 2310 "t3" and "t4", the sensor/communication module 1460-5 after the move is placed in section 5_1142-5. Also, the optical information detected at this time changes to "nothing". By using the time-series information tracking table in this way, it is easy to move the device 1250 or the composite modules 1460 and 1470 across the sections 1142 and to extract changes in the collected information content.

Incidentally, the estimation/judgment comparison table shown in FIG. 27/FIG. 28(a) is used for the estimation/judgment processing performed in Steps 114 to 117 in FIG. 26A and Steps 123, 125, and 127 in FIG. 26B. First, candidates for estimation/judgment results regarding the status item 2320 for each section 1142, such as "in use state in a predetermined section", are set in advance as state α, state β, etc., and this estimation/judgment collation table is Write sequentially in the row direction. On the other hand, the states collected as information from the device 1250-1, such as "the air conditioner is in operation" and "the timer setting time of the air conditioner", are defined as states A, B, etc. Write them in order in the column direction. Furthermore, sensor information such as sensor information detected by the sensor/communication module 1460-5 that detects "the presence or absence of light" and a state setting value representing the current state in the drive/communication module 1470-2 are also used in this estimation/communication module. Write them in order in the vertical columns of the judgment reference table. The correlation value between the two is written in the corresponding cell in this estimation/judgment collation table. For example, if there is a positive correlation between state A of "the air conditioner is active" and state α in the state item 2320 such as "the specified section is in use," “80” is written in the corresponding cell as the correlation coefficient. Furthermore, there is a positive correlation between the “light is present” information in the same section 1142 obtained from the sensor/communication module 1460-5 and the status α in the status item 2320 such as “the specified section is in use”. Even if there is, "57" is written in the corresponding cell as the correlation coefficient. On the other hand, if there is a negative correlation (inverse correlation), a negative value may be written in the corresponding cell as a correlation coefficient.

Then, during state estimation/determination in section 1142, the sum of correlation coefficients in the same column is calculated for each state α, β, . . . and is made to correspond to the value of state probability 2330. Then, it is estimated/determined that the states α, β, · with the highest total value represent the states within the corresponding section 1142. By calculating the total value of the correlation coefficients in the same column in this way, it is possible to use a plurality of pieces of collected information in the same section 1142 instead of using only one piece of collected information. By using a plurality of pieces of collected information in this way, it is possible to not only make multifaceted estimations/judgments, but also have the effect of increasing the accuracy of estimations/judgments.

Similarly, candidates for estimation/judgment results regarding the user's action item 2440 are set in advance as action α, action β, etc., and are sequentially written in the horizontal row direction of this estimation/judgment collation table. Further, candidates for estimation/judgment results regarding the user's request item 2360 are also set in advance as request α, request β, etc., and are sequentially written in the horizontal row direction of this estimation/judgment collation table. Furthermore, each correlation coefficient value is entered in the corresponding cell in the same manner as above.

Furthermore, the total value of the correlation coefficient is calculated for each row of actions α and β and each row of requests α and β at each time t1, t2, t3, etc. as the elapsed time 2310, and the values of the action probability 2350 and the request probability 2370 are calculated. 27/28(b) in the corresponding locations on the right side of the time-series information tracking table.

By using the above-mentioned time-series information tracking table, it is possible to estimate/judge the state within the section 1142 and the user's actions and requests in real time. For example, an example of a service providing method using this time-series information tracking table will be explained using the example shown in FIG. 27/FIG. 28(b). For example, consider a case where the user moves from section 2_1142-2, where the lights are on, to section 5_1142-5, where the lights are off, while carrying the sensor/communication module 1460-5. In this case, since the light in section 2_1142-2 remains on, there is not much change in the value of the state probability 2330 of state α in section 2_1142-2, which indicates that “the corresponding section is in use”. In comparison, the action probability 2350 of action α corresponding to "user movement" rapidly increases from 4% to 87% between t3 and t4. As a result, it can be estimated/determined that "the user moved between t3 and t4". Furthermore, the request probability of the request α corresponding to the request "I want to turn on the lights in section 5_1142-5" also rapidly increases from 4% to 98% between t3 and t4.

By utilizing this time-series information tracking table, it is possible to obtain the result of estimating/determining the user request shown in Step 127 of FIG. 26B, for example, "I want to turn on the lights in section 5_1142-5." However, as information that does not meet this user request, information such as "There is no light in section 5_1142-5" is obtained from the sensor/communication module 1460-5. In response to this, a service is provided to the user in Step 130. Specifically, the system controller α_1126 issues a setting state change command (command issue) 1852 to the drive/communication module 1470-2, which has the function of "turning on the light in section 5_1142-5" (see FIG. 10B). is served.

The above description has mainly been about internal state estimation/judgment for each section 1142, estimation/judgment of user behavior based on information collected for each section 1142, and estimation/judgment of user request. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as other embodiments, for example, estimation or judgment may be made regarding the state of the entire system α_1132, or estimation/judgment of user behavior or estimation/judgment of user requests may be made based on information collected from the entire system α_1132. You may make a judgment.

Next, the method of providing services to users described in Step 119 of FIG. 26A or Step 130 of FIG. 26B will be described using FIG. 29. First, based on the nonconformity information extraction results performed in Steps 124, 126, and 128 in FIG. 26B, state change control candidates are extracted within the unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) in the corresponding section 1142. (Step 141) is performed. Thereafter, after making an inquiry to the user (Step 129), the setting state is sequentially changed (state change control) as shown in Steps 142 to 143.

Here, as the example mentioned above, if the lights are off in section 5_1142-5 where the user is moving, the air conditioner and television may also be in a stopped state. Therefore, when nonconformity information is extracted in Steps 124, 126, and 128 of FIG. 26B, it is necessary to change the setting state (state change control) for a plurality of items in the same section 5_1142-5. In that case, as shown in Step 142 to Step 143 in FIG. The major feature is that it performs change control). As a result, it is possible to shorten the time it takes to set the optimal environment within the same section 5_1142-5.

However, when changing the setting state of multiple items sequentially or simultaneously (state change control), as shown in case 1 of FIG. 10B, multiple units 1290 (drive/communication module 1470 or equipment 1250), information communication corresponding to a plurality of commands (command issuance) 1852 is performed sequentially or simultaneously. However, in each physical layer frame PPDU (FIG. 11(f)) indicating communication information corresponding to a plurality of commands (command issues) 1852, the contents of the sender IP address information SIPADRS (FIG. 13(b)) and , the sending side address information in the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (for example, the contents of the PAN-specific identification information SPANID on the sending side and the IEEE extended address SEXADRS on the sending side in FIG. 12A(e)) match. Furthermore, some information on the receiving side, such as the PAN-specific identification information DPANID on the receiving side in FIG. 12A(e), may also match.

Therefore, when changing the setting status of multiple items sequentially or simultaneously (status change control), the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128 in the system shown in FIG. It is desirable to perform information communication corresponding to the command (command issue) 1852 corresponding to the above. By collectively communicating information in this way, a plurality of different pieces of communication information can be created by the above-described copying process of the common information. Therefore, using the above method has the effect of improving the processing efficiency of system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128 in the system shown in FIG. 9).

It is already stated in Section 4.2 that ``General users can tolerate a delay of up to 5 or 10 minutes in response to a change in service.Also, a patient user may tolerate a delay of around 15 minutes.'' However, if the delay exceeds one hour, most users will feel dissatisfied. Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, when services related to multiple items are performed sequentially, the services provided consecutively are The time difference between them should be 15 minutes or less, preferably 5 minutes or less, and at worst less than 1 hour. This has the effect of minimizing stress on the user.

The above description has mainly focused on providing services for each section 1142. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as another embodiment, for example, the entire system α_1132 may be provided as a service.

In the above, we have already given an example of ``the user moves from section 2_1142-2, where the light is on, to section 5_1142-5, where the light is off, while carrying the sensor/communication module 1460-5,'' to explain the service provision method. I explained. In this regard, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding a processing method when a specific unit 1290 (equipment 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) moves across different sections 1142.

In this case, as shown in Step in FIG. 30, it is necessary to extract section information before and after the movement of the unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470). The time-series information tracking table shown in FIG. 27/FIG. 28(b) described above is useful for this extraction. Here, in the section column of the sensor/communication module 1460-5 in FIG. 27/FIG. 28(b), the value changes from "2" to "5" between elapsed times 2310t3 and t3. By searching for this change location, section information before and after the movement can be easily extracted. In this case, services are often provided especially for the sections before and after the move. Therefore, the system of this embodiment can be used to simultaneously or sequentially provide services to both sections 2_1122-2 and 5_1122-5 before and after a specific unit 1290 (equipment 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) has moved. It has characteristics. In this way, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128 when supporting the system in FIG. 9) can efficiently provide services to users by centrally providing services to sections 2_1122-2 and 5_1122-5 before and after movement. I can do it. Here, the series of processes from Step 155 to Step 158 in FIG. 30 corresponds to the process in FIG. 26B. Furthermore, as Step 151 in FIG. 30 shows, the unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) placed in the pre-movement section 2_1122-2 is extracted. Then, through a similar processing process, services are provided to the user within the pre-movement section 2_1122-2 (Step 130). Furthermore, as already mentioned above, the setting states may be changed (state change control) for a plurality of items in the pre-movement section 2_1122-2 either sequentially or simultaneously.

Also, when providing services to both the preceding and succeeding sections 2_1122-2 and 5_1122-5 simultaneously or sequentially, as described above, system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128 in the system shown in FIG. 9) It is desirable to perform information communication corresponding to the command (command issue) 1852 corresponding to the above all at once, without adding another process. By collectively communicating information in this way, a plurality of different pieces of communication information can be created by the above-described copying process of the common information. Therefore, using the above method has the effect of improving the processing efficiency of the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128 in the system shown in FIG. 9).

Section 4.4 Method for tracking the movement of various modules and devices between sections Section 4.4 describes a method for detecting the location of the communication module 1202 built into the device 1250 and the communication module 1660 built into the composite module. I will explain about it.

However, when wireless is used as the physical communication medium used on the same system network line 1782 in FIG. 10A, there are times when radio waves are emitted from the communication modules 1202 and 1660. do. A feature of the present embodiment is that this timing is used to detect the position of the communication modules 1202, 1660, or the device or composite module in which they are incorporated, from the radio wave emission position. GPS technology is known as a conventional device position detection method. However, as long as this technology is adopted, only the GPS-related parts installed in the device will become expensive. In comparison, the above method does not require any additional parts necessary for position detection, so it has the effect of making it possible to reduce the cost and size of the communication modules 1202 and 1660 (or the device or composite module in which they are built). Yes.

In addition to the above-mentioned GPS technology for knowing location information, a technology called a beacon is also known. GPS technology uses radio waves emitted from artificial satellites. In comparison, the beacon technology described above uses terrestrial radio waves, such as those used in a short-range wireless standard called Bluetooth. That is, a plurality of devices that transmit the above-mentioned short-range radio waves are installed at a plurality of locations on the ground, and the short-range radio waves transmitted from each device are received to calculate relative reception locations. However, this method also requires a circuit for determining the position on the receiving side, which increases the circuit scale of the receiver, resulting in an increase in the size and price of the receiver. In comparison, the system of this embodiment does not require independent position detection within the composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) that requires position detection, so the price of the target composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) is reduced. This enables miniaturization.

The principle of position detection in this embodiment is shown in FIG. Here, the system controller α_1126 and devices 1250-1 and 4, which receive the radio waves and detect the location of the transmission source, each have a built-in GPS function. Therefore, the installation locations of the system controller α_1126 and the devices 1250-1 and 4 are known in advance. Then, by using the characteristics of the radio waves received by the system controller α_1126 and the devices 1250-1 and 1250-4, the emission position of the radio waves is measured.

The following feature is found in that the reception side (system controller α_1126 and devices 1250-1, 4) involved in position detection uses the reception timing of radio waves for position detection. Then, in a network communication system where there are multiple radio wave transmission sources, the transmission source is identified using the reception timing of the radio waves. Alternatively, it may be said that in a network communication system where a plurality of radio wave transmission sources exist, the transmission source is identified using the content of communication information. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 31, the sensor/communication module 1460-5 and the drive/communication module 1470-3 emit radio waves at different timings. Therefore, depending on the reception timing, it is possible to identify which of the sensor/communication module 1460-5 and the drive/communication module 1470-3 emitted the radio waves. By using the reception timing of radio waves for position detection in this way, multiple different positions can be detected at the same time, which has the effect of improving the efficiency of position detection. On the other hand, the position detection method in this embodiment is not limited to the above method, and a signal from a beacon (compliant with the Bluetooth Smart standard) may be used as another method.

A specific method for identifying the source of radio waves will be explained. On the same system network line 1782, information is communicated in blocks of physical layer frames PPDU shown in FIG. 11(f). Here, the system controller α_1126 controls or manages the system network line 1782 so that physical layer frames PPDUs transmitted from a plurality of different transmission sources do not overlap at the same time.

Further, address information indicating the transmission source is stored in the one physical layer frame PPDU. As a specific example, the sending side IP address information SIPADRS shown in FIG. 13(b) described in Section 2.4 can be used to identify the sending source. Furthermore, the information stored in the MAC layer header MACHD (FIG. 11(a)) is not limited to this, and for example, the IEEE extended address SEXADRS on the transmitting side in FIG. 12A(e) explained in Section 2.3 is used to identify the source. You may use it. Therefore, on the radio wave receiving side, the radio wave characteristics at the time of reception are measured, and the source address information written in the corresponding physical layer frame PPDU is decoded. Thereby, it is possible to obtain radio wave characteristics for each radio wave transmission source.

An additional feature is that the transmitter's location information is calculated by comparing the radio wave characteristics received at multiple locations simultaneously. Utilizing radio wave characteristics at multiple locations in this way has the effect of improving position detection accuracy. Here, there is a method that uses "radio field intensity" as the radio wave characteristics used to detect the location of the transmission source. That is, in an ideal state, the radio field strength at a receiving location is inversely proportional to the square of the distance to the source. Therefore, by comparing the received radio wave intensities of the system controller α_1126 and each of the devices 1250-1 and 4, the relative position information of the sensor/communication module 1460-5 and the drive/communication module 1470-3 can be estimated.

Furthermore, "radio wave phase" may be used as another radio wave characteristic used to detect the location of the transmission source. That is, since the phase of radio waves during reception differs depending on the distance between the transmitting source and the receiving party, this phenomenon is utilized for position detection. By comparing the phases of the radio waves received simultaneously by the system controller α_1126 and the devices 1250-1 and 4, the relative position information of the sensor/communication module 1460-5 and the drive/communication module 1470-3 can be estimated.

However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and the "progressing direction of radio waves" may be used as another radio wave characteristic used to detect the location of the transmission source. As a method for detecting the direction of travel of radio waves, this implementation involves ``comparing each detection signal obtained from multiple receivers with different detection sensitivities with respect to the direction of travel of radio waves, and measuring the direction of travel of radio waves.'' It has morphological characteristics. Furthermore, the following feature exists in that the position is detected using trigonometry based on the traveling direction of the radio waves emitted from the transmission source obtained here. By using this embodiment, it is possible to accurately detect the location of the transmission source using very inexpensive equipment. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the radio wave characteristics used for position detection are not limited to the "progressing direction of radio waves", but may be combined with reception strength, phase at the time of reception, or other radio wave characteristics.

For example, if the system controller α_1126 and the device 1250-1 in FIG. 31 can individually detect the traveling direction of the radio waves transmitted from the sensor/communication module 1460-5, they can easily and accurately detect the source of the radio waves using "trigonometry". position can be detected. As long as trigonometry is used here, the position can be detected as long as there are at least two receiving points for the radio waves. (1) System controller α_1126 manages/operates/controls information communication on system network line 1782, (2) System controller α_1126 always analyzes information in physical layer frame PPDU, (3) Radio waves For the reason that it is more efficient if the characteristic detection location and the transmission source location calculation location are physically closer, it is desirable that the system controller α_1126 serve as one of the radio wave reception points described above. A general device 1250 with a built-in GPS function may be used as another radio wave receiving point, or a dedicated device for detecting the source position may be installed.

Next, the principle method for measuring the traveling direction of radio waves will be explained using FIG. 32(b). As an example, the detection sensitivity of the Pola Bora antenna 2760 used for terrestrial wave reception has direction dependence of the received radio waves. For example, the polar Bora antenna 2760 from which the detection signal α is obtained has the highest detection sensitivity when the received radio waves come from the direction A, and has the lowest detection sensitivity for the received radio waves coming from the directions B and C. In this way, the Pola Bora antenna 2760 has the characteristic that "the detection sensitivity differs depending on the direction in which the radio waves travel." On the other hand, the Pola Bora antenna 2760, which provides the detection signal β, has the highest detection sensitivity when the received radio wave comes from the direction B, and the Pola Bora antenna 2760, which provides the detection signal γ, has the highest detection sensitivity when the received radio wave comes from the direction C. High sensitivity. Therefore, by simultaneously receiving received radio waves arriving from any direction using three Pola Bora antennas 2760 and comparing the strengths of the detection signals α, β, and γ, it is possible in principle to predict the traveling direction of the received radio waves. . This process of predicting the traveling direction of the received radio waves corresponds to the method of "measuring the traveling direction of the radio waves by comparing each detection signal obtained from a plurality of receivers."

A direction detection antenna structure with higher directional accuracy is shown in FIG. 32(a). This basic structure is composed of a stealth plate 2730 having a substantially triangular pyramid or quadrangular pyramid shape. An antenna 2710-1 is arranged in a cross shape on the side surface of this approximately triangular pyramid or approximately quadrangular pyramid. This antenna 2710-1 is composed of a pair of antennas orthogonal to each other. Here, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 32(a), only one pair of cross-shaped antennas 2710-1 may be arranged on one side of the stealth plate 2730. Furthermore, the antennas 2710-1 to 2710-3 perpendicular to each other in a cross shape may be arranged on one side surface of the stealth plate 2730, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 32(b). Here, the antennas 2710-2 and 2710-3 shown by broken lines in FIG. 32(b) are attached to the antenna 2710-1, which is perpendicular to the cross shape, rotated by 30 degrees. Using this cross-shaped antenna 2710-1, A) receiving communication information on the intra-system network line 1782, and B) detecting the location of the transmission source.
Do both. Here, an amplifier and signal processing circuit 2720 is arranged between each of the antennas 2710-1 to 2710-3 arranged in a cross shape. Further, detection signals α, β, γ, and δ are obtained individually from each amplifier and signal processing circuit 2720. However, it is not necessary that the shapes of the stealth plates 2730 are properly triangular or quadrangular pyramids, and it is sufficient that the sides of the stealth plates 2730 face in different directions.

By the way, the detection sensitivity of the cross-shaped antenna 2710 arranged on the side surface of the stealth plate 2730 in FIG. 32(a) has reception direction dependence. Therefore, the set of cross-shaped antennas 2710 corresponds to the above-mentioned "receiving section with different detection sensitivities with respect to the direction of propagation of radio waves." The comparison between the individual detection signals α, β, γ, and δ obtained from each amplifier and signal processing circuit 2720 corresponds to the above-mentioned “comparison of each detection signal”.

An enlarged view of one side of FIG. 32(a) is shown in FIG. 33(a). The stealth plate 2730 placed on the back side of the cross-shaped antenna 2710 has the following functions: (1) to prevent radio waves from entering the cross-shaped antenna 2710 from the back side, and (2) to absorb radio waves that have passed through the cross-shaped antenna 2710. Fulfill. By arranging the stealth plate 2730 on the back side of the "antenna 2710 that detects the direction of radio waves" as described above, the effect of suppressing unnecessary radio wave reflections that reduce detection accuracy and improving the accuracy of position detection of the transmitting source is achieved. Yes. In order to exhibit this effect, the stealth plate 2730 has a two-layer structure as shown in FIG. 33(b). This inner layer is composed of a metal plate layer 2734 whose surface has a fine uneven structure. By arranging the metal plate layer on the back side in this manner, transmission of radio waves is strongly prevented, thereby preventing radio waves from entering the cross-shaped antenna 2710 from the back side.

However, reflection of radio waves occurs on the surface of the metal plate layer 2734. Therefore, various measures have been taken to prevent the radio waves reflected here from entering the cross-shaped antenna 2710. One of the ideas is to make the side surfaces of a substantially triangular or substantially quadrangular pyramid shape curved, as shown in FIG. 33(c). By forming the curved surface in this way, the traveling direction of the incident radio waves 2800 that are incident approximately parallel to each other is changed depending on the incident position. Furthermore, the surface of the metal plate layer 2734 is provided with a fine uneven structure to diffusely reflect the incident radio waves 2800 that are incident approximately parallel to the metal plate layer 2734.

However, the original purpose (2) of the stealth plate 2730 is not to reflect radio waves but to absorb radio waves. In order to realize this function (2), a weakly conductive organic layer 2738 having a fine uneven structure on both the front and back surfaces is arranged on top of the metal plate layer 2734 whose surface inside the stealth plate 2730 has a fine uneven structure. . The detailed structure of the weakly conductive organic layer 2738, which has a fine uneven structure on both the front and back surfaces, may be a structure in which metal powder is solidified with an organic layer, or it may be formed entirely of a weakly conductive organic material. Then, the incident radio wave 2800 is absorbed within this weakly conductive organic layer 2738. However, since the weakly conductive organic layer 2738 cannot completely absorb the incident radio wave 2800, the incident radio wave 2800 is diffusely reflected on the uneven surface. Furthermore, the diffused reflection efficiency is increased between the weakly conductive organic layer 2738, which has a fine uneven structure on both the front and back surfaces, and the metal plate layer 2734, whose surface has a fine uneven structure, and the radio waves diffusely reflected here are transferred to the weakly conductive organic layer 2738. 2738 and prevents it from reaching the cross-shaped antenna 2710.

The detailed structure of the cross-shaped antenna 2710-1 shown in FIG. 32(a) and the principle regarding the detection signal characteristics will be explained using FIG. 34. The internal structure of the above-mentioned cross-shaped antenna 2710 is as shown in FIG. The two antennas 2710 are connected by a resistor 2920. By the way, in addition to the resistor 2920, a capacitor or an inductance may be appropriately placed in the connection between the two antennas 2710 in order to improve the frequency characteristics of signal detection. The inside of the amplifier and signal processing circuit 2720 is composed of voltage difference devices 2940-1 and 2940-2 that detect the voltage difference generated between each resistor 2920, and an adder 2960 that adds each signal obtained from each. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 32(b), when a radio wave whose polarization plane is tilted by θ with respect to the horizontal axis (X-axis) and has an electric field amplitude A passes perpendicularly to the cross-shaped antenna 2710, From voltage differentiator 2940-1
A signal of A2ei2ωtcos2θ (1) is obtained, and from the voltage differentiator 2940-2
A2ei2ωtsin2θ (2) is obtained. In equations (1) and (2), the phase term of the detection signal is expressed in complex numbers. Therefore, the output signal from the adder 2960 that adds the above signals is
A2ei2ωt (3). A major feature of this equation (3) is that the tilt angle θ of the plane of polarization does not appear. That is, it can be seen that as long as the radio waves pass perpendicularly to the cross-shaped antenna 2710, the obtained detection signal has constant characteristics independent of the tilt angle θ of the polarization plane.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 34(c), the output signal from the adder 2960 when the radio wave passes through the cross-shaped antenna 2710 at an angle tilted by ξ from the vertical direction is
It is given by A2ei2ωtsin2ξ (4). Equation (4) above indicates that the output signal of the adder 2960 changes depending on the traveling direction of the radio waves with respect to the cross-shaped antenna 2710 (the angle of inclination of the cross-shaped antenna 2710 from the vertical direction). There is. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32(a), compare the output signals α, β, γ, and δ (of the adder 2960) obtained from each cross-shaped antenna 2710 arranged on the stealth plate 2710 facing in different directions, By applying equation (4) above, the traveling direction of the radio waves can be calculated.

However, when the tilt angle ξ is particularly small in FIG. 34(c), the output signal amount tends to be largely dependent on the vibration plane of the radio waves. In order to alleviate this adverse effect, a plurality of sets of cross-shaped antennas 2710-2 and 2710-3, which have rotation angles with respect to each other, are arranged as indicated by broken lines in FIG. 32(a). Among the output signals obtained from the individual cross-shaped antennas 2710-1 to 2710-3, only the output signal that is significantly different from other output signals is discarded, and the average of the remaining two output signals is taken, so that the tilt angle ξ is small. Detection signal error can be reduced when

As shown in equation (3) above, if the antennas 2710 are arranged at right angles (without being affected by the plane of polarization), the traveling direction of the radio waves can be efficiently measured. However, the antennas 2710 are not limited to this (if some correction is added when calculating the traveling direction of radio waves), and the antennas 2710 may be arranged at any angle. Furthermore, the shape of the antenna 2710 is not limited to the linear shape described above, but may take other shapes such as a "leaf shape" as shown in FIG. 34(d).

Note that in the method of detecting the position of the transmission source from the direction in which the radio waves travel, the detection accuracy may decrease due to reflections from walls, ceilings, etc. in the middle of the travel path of the radio waves. As a countermeasure against this, radio waves in a plurality of different frequency bands may be used for position detection. For example, as reference frequencies used for short-range wireless communication, frequency bands of 2.4 GHz, 915 MHz, 950 MHz, and 868 MHz can be used depending on the region. Therefore, for example, wireless communication using the above-mentioned different reference frequencies may be performed in parallel. However, the reflection characteristics of radio waves on walls, ceilings, etc. along their travel path vary depending on the reference frequency used. Therefore, by comparing the results of position detection using wireless communication using different reference frequencies, the accuracy of position detection of the transmission source can be improved.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when trigonometry is used for position detection, it is basically possible to detect the position of the transmission source simply by measuring the traveling direction of the radio waves at two locations. However, in order to prevent a decrease in position detection accuracy due to reflections during the radio waves' traveling route, the traveling direction of the radio waves may be measured at three or more reception points. In this way, the measurement results at three or more reception points are compared to improve the accuracy and reliability of position detection of the transmitter. Furthermore, instead of using only one of the above methods, a method of increasing the number of receiving points for position detection and increasing the number of reference frequencies to be used may be combined. As described above, the above-mentioned measures have the effect of improving the accuracy of detecting the location of the transmission source.

Section 4.5 Compatibility between systems with different units (complex modules and equipment) System α_1132 in this embodiment system is a system applied to the civil sector, a system applied to the healthcare field, and a system applied to the social infrastructure field. It has characteristics that can be applied to a wide range of network communication systems. Furthermore, in the system of this embodiment, as explained in Section 4.2, the initial setting (Check-in), plug-in, and plug-out of the unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) into the system α_1132 are performed. It has the feature of being very easy to perform. Combining the above features creates a new feature in the system of this embodiment that ``the unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) can be easily incorporated and used in multiple systems of different types.'' . Furthermore, it becomes possible to use the same unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) across multiple different systems.

Therefore, by using the system of this embodiment, the versatility of the unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) can be ensured for a very wide range of application fields. In particular, if the composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 have versatility in a very wide range of application fields, the prices of the composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 can be easily reduced due to mass production. Furthermore, since the low-cost composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 can be used across multiple different systems, the usability of the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 is greatly improved.

The relationship between multiple systems α_1132 and system β_1134, in which the same unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) is used across, is contained within the same domain 2_1122-2 as shown in FIG. Also good. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the plurality of systems α_1132 and system β_1134 may belong to separate domains 1_1122-1 and 2_1122-2, respectively.

This section 4.5 describes the initial setting (Check-in), plug-in, and plug-out method of the unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) between multiple different systems α_1132 and system β_1134. explain.

First, the case where the functions are different between the system α_1132 and system β_1134 will be explained. In this case, system controller α_1126 in system α_1132 and system controller β_1128 in system β_1134 individually perform system compatibility/non-compatibility identification processing for unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470). However, if the target of this system conformity/nonconformity identification is the device 1250, the communication middleware layer APL06 exchanges information 1810 (see FIG. 10B) as explained in Section 2.1 using FIG. 16 or FIG. 17B. Exchange and identify. On the other hand, if the target of this system conformity/nonconformity identification is the composite module 1295, 1460, 1470, as explained in Section 2.1 using FIG. 10A, communication information in the media access layer MAC02 is used. and identify it. For example, as described in Section 2.3 using FIG. 12A(e), the IEEE extended address SEXADRS on the sending side included in the communication information sent from the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 may be used. In this case, access the server n_1116-n via the Internet from the obtained IEEE extended address SEXADRS information to obtain the background information of the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470, and identify whether the system is compatible or not. Also good.

As a result of the above processing, if the corresponding unit 1290 (equipment 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) is determined to be system compatible, the user I/F section 1234 (FIG. 2, FIG. 9, or FIG. 8A/B) is Please confirm with the end user whether it is OK to incorporate it into the compatible system.

First, if the functions of the system α_1132 and system β_1134 match, as explained in Section 4.2, use the location information where the unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) is located. to identify system conformance/nonconformity.

Next, a situation that occurs when the same unit 1290 (equipment 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) is used across multiple systems α_1132, system β_1134, etc. and how to deal with it will be described. As an example of the unit 1290, the C-format may be used as the communication middleware layer APL02 used when the composite module 1295 communicates information with the system controller β_1128, as shown in FIG. 17A. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and other formats may be used for information communication with the composite module 1295 as the communication middleware layer APL02. On the other hand, as another example of the unit 1290, the communication middleware layer APL06 used when the device 1250 communicates information with the system controller β_1128 is in A-format, E-format, or W-format as shown in FIG. 17B. You may also use the extended application layer EXL06. In this way, the formats used in the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 allow different situations depending on the unit 1290 (device 1250 and composite module 1295, 3583) used.

FIG. 36A shows an example configuration of a system controller 3581 that can communicate with various units 1290 (composite module 3583). In FIG. 36A, for ease of explanation, various processing execution units are shown in hardware form. In this way, the structure within the system controller 3581 may be composed of hardware connections. In addition, the system controller α_1126 is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. Corresponds to the processing flow to be executed.

As the unit or the composite module 3583 as an example thereof, there are a plurality of composite modules 3583 developed by different manufacturers. Furthermore, the use of different formats (standards) on the communication middleware layer APL02 is allowed for each composite module 3583. To this end, the communication middleware layer APL02 must support multiple different formats (first communication standard to nth communication standard) so that the same system controller 3581 can communicate with various composite modules. There are features that make it possible. In order to make this possible, different communication standards are identified within the communication standard recognition unit 3581c in the system controller 3581, and appropriate processing according to the communication standard is performed according to the identification result. This improves the versatility of the system controller 3581 and enables information communication with a plurality of different composite modules 3583 developed by different manufacturers.

By the way, among the various formats used in the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 explained in Section 2.1, ○A-format is "described in a broad text format", and ○C-format is "described in a command format". /Request/Response/Status” format ○E-format is a format that “stores the setting code in a predefined area” ○W-format is a format where the sender writes in the specified field or “HTML/HTML5 specific” format It is characterized by the tag "described". Therefore, by analyzing the information written in the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (information written in the communication middleware data APLDT in Figure 11) and determining which of the above characteristics corresponds to the corresponding communication standard, the corresponding communication standard is identified. can.

As the example of FIG. 17A shows, composite module 3583 is connected to the Internet 3585 via access point 3584a and/or base station 3584b. Here, the Internet 3585 in FIG. 36A corresponds to the out-of-system network line 1788 in FIG. 17A. Although not shown in FIG. 37A, a router (gateway) 1300 with a built-in battery shown in FIG. 17A is installed between the Internet 3585 and the Internet connection section 3581a in the system controller 3581.

However, the composite module 3583 may include a sensor module 1260 as shown in FIG. 4B (a) or (b), and a detection signal from the sensor module 1260 may be transmitted. Alternatively, identification data is stored in the self-attribute data storage area 1793 (FIG. 7B) in the communication module 1660 in the composite module 3583, and this information (or the address of the composite module 3583 itself (for example, the IP address SIPADRS, DIPADRS in FIG. 13) ) may be accessed from the outside via the Internet 3584 and base station 3584b.

Further, as described in Section 1.6, the communication module 1660 having the structure of FIG. 7A or 7B is also used as part of the communication module 1202-3 (FIG. 2) in the system controller 3581 and α_1126. Therefore, the Internet connection section 3581a in FIG. 36A corresponds to the information communication execution section 3016 in FIG. 7A. Similarly, the protocol recognition unit 3581b in FIG. 36A corresponds to the physical layer frame analysis unit 1918 in FIG. 7A, and the data detection unit 3581d in FIG. 36A corresponds to the content extraction unit 1938 in FIG. 7A. Further, the Internet compatible data output unit 3581g in FIG. 36A corresponds to the physical layer frame generation unit 1914 in FIG. 7A. Furthermore, the communication standard recognition unit 3581c and communication standard compatible format setting unit 3581f in FIG. 36A both correspond to the combination unit of the signal processing unit 1780 and processor 1736 in FIG. 7B. However, the processing performed within the data processing unit 3581e in FIG. 36A is executed within the processor 1230 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the composite modules 3583 and 1295 can be connected to the system controller 3581 (system controller β_1128) via the Internet 3585. The communication information used at this time has the structure shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 13, sending side IP address information SIPADRS and receiving side IP address information DIPADRS are stored therein.

The received signal received by the Internet connection section 3581a is analyzed by the protocol recognition section 3581b. Within the protocol recognition unit 3581b, the IPv6 header IPv6HD and communication middleware data APLDT (and extended data EXDT) in FIG. 11 are individually extracted. Thereafter, the extracted communication middleware data APLDT (and extended data EXDT) is analyzed within the communication standard recognition unit 3581c.

The communication standard recognition unit 3581c includes a data processing routine for analyzing formats of various communication standards in advance. Therefore, the communication standard recognition unit 3581c easily determines whether the composite module adopts the A/E/W-format (FIG. 17B) or the C-format (FIG. 17A). can do. After the corresponding communication standard is recognized, the content (for example, sensor detection data) extracted by the data detection unit 3581d is input to the data processing unit 3581e.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, after automatically determining the communication standard to which the communication middleware data APLDT (and extended data EXDT) in the received communication information is compliant, the communication middleware data APLDT (and extended data EXDT) and transmits a response to the transmission destination unit 1290, which has the following characteristics. Specifically, based on information on the communication standard (format of communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06) identified in the communication standard recognition unit 3581c, the communication middleware data APLDT (and extended data EXDT). As a result, the system controller 3581 can stably communicate information with a plurality of different units 1290 (or composite modules 1295) developed by different manufacturers.

That is, as described above, the communication standard on the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (and extended application layer EXL06) used by the corresponding unit 1290 (or composite module 3583) is already recognized in the communication standard recognition unit 3581c. . Therefore, based on the information, the communication standard compatible format setting unit 3581f converts the transmission data from the data processing unit 3581e into communication middleware data APLDT (FIG. 11) and, if necessary, extension data EXDT. As a result, the sending (replying) destination unit 1290 (or composite module 3583) can recognize the communication middleware data APLDT (and extended data EXDT). The transmission data in a predetermined data format is then input to the Internet compatible data output section 3581g.

FIG. 36B shows an example in which the composite module 3583 (or unit 1290) described above moves to various different areas. Here, different network systems α_1132 and β_1134 are configured for each area. Therefore, system controllers 3581-1, 3581-2, and 3581-3 are installed for each area to control/manage/collect information on network communication within the network system. Here, system controller 3581-1, system controller 3581-2, and system controller 3581-3 arranged in each area each have the same configuration as system controller 3581 in FIG. 36A.

As described above, all system controllers 3581-1, 3581-2, and 3581-3 flexibly support different formats (communication standards) on communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (and extended application layer EXL06). Therefore, the composite module 3583 (or unit 1290) can communicate with the system controllers 3581-1, 3581-2, and 3581-3 no matter which area it moves to.

Chapter 5 Application examples for each application field Section 5.1 Application examples in the consumer field Section 5.1.1 Application examples of the wide area network system in the consumer field (Consumer Electronics Technology ), "specific information" may be associated with products distributed between wholesaler B1_1104-1, service provider B_1112-2, and system α_1132. For example, service provider B_1112-2 collects wide-area weather information, accident information, or road congestion information as raw materials from wholesaler B1_1104-1, such as the Japan Meteorological Agency, police stations, and Japan Road Traffic Corporation, and processes it for each region. Publish useful information on the Internet. A general end user may operate a personal computer (system controller α_1126) to receive this information viewing service.

In addition, as an example of application to the civil sector, one domain 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 shown in Figure 1 may be related to family (in the case of a single person, one person constitutes one household), business, hobbies, or region. The information may correspond to a predetermined activity area on the network of members (including individual individuals) constituting the specific group. Furthermore, as the specific group, specific members on an SNS (Social Network Service) may form one specific domain 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3.

As another specific example, if the system α_1132 in FIG. It can be made compatible. In this case, a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or a tablet owned by the user while out and about corresponds to the system controller β_1128. However, this system β_1134 is not only compatible with just one mobile terminal, but also the entire local network space (constructed within a specific area that is physically or geographically close to each other) connected to the system controller β_1128. It may be made to correspond to the whole. As an example of the relationship between system α_1132 and system β_1134 in domain 2_1122-2, a user operates the above-mentioned mobile terminal (system controller β_1128) from system β_1134 on the go and receives domain-specific identification information ID (Identification information ID). Information) and a unique password to enter domain 2_1122-2 and control specific equipment in system α_1132 built in your home, or based on information from a predetermined sensor module in your home (system α_1132). There is a way to receive unique services (for example, get dinner recipe suggestions on the go from ingredient information stored in your refrigerator at home).

Section 5.1.2 Example of Application of Composite Module in Consumer Field As an example of application in the consumer field, the sensor/communication module 1460 and the drive/communication module 1470 are attached to existing small home appliances such as alarm clocks, flashlights, toothbrushes, hair dryers, etc. This has the effect of dramatically improving the functions of the above-mentioned small home appliances at low cost. Here, as a method of attaching the sensor/communication module 1460 and the drive/communication module 1470 to an existing small home appliance, it is not necessarily necessary to fix it with screws or the like, but it is also possible to temporarily attach it using double-sided tape or adhesive, for example. good. For example, simply by attaching (attaching) various sensor/communication modules 1460 to these small home appliances, various sensor functions can be added to these small home appliances very easily. Various types of information detected by these sensors/communication modules 1460 are aggregated within the system controller α_1126. Further, new additional functions can be added to these small home appliances very easily by simply attaching (attaching) a drive/communication module 1470 that generates sound or light, for example, to these small home appliances. Here, these additional functions are integrally controlled by the system controller α_1126. Small household appliances with new additional functions can provide optimal services depending on the user's behavior and condition. For example, if a user has trouble waking up in the morning, an alarm clock can provide a strong warning with a human voice. Alternatively, if a user leaves behind a particular small home appliance or loses it in the house, the small home appliance itself can provide a service to notify the user of the user's whereabouts.

Other application examples will be described below. For example, sensor/communication modules 1460 with functions such as temperature sensors, wind sensors, sound sensors, light sensors, or short-range human sensors are installed throughout section 2_1142-2 (room), and system controller α_1126 is installed. Enables intra-system α_1132 communication between users. At the same time, a drive/communication module 1470 is built into the remote control that controls devices such as air conditioners, televisions, and lighting equipment, allowing the system controller α_1126 to control devices such as air conditioners, televisions, and lighting devices via this remote controller. do. As a result, the system controller α_1126 can grasp detailed distribution characteristics of temperature, wind force, sound, light brightness (illuminance), and human movement within section 2_1142-2. Then, based on the grasped results, the above-mentioned equipment is controlled under optimal conditions for the user. Particularly in large rooms, the heating and cooling effects are unevenly distributed, so the temperature and wind power tend to fluctuate dramatically depending on the location. On the other hand, by applying the above service method, the satisfaction level of users living in large rooms can be greatly improved. By using this method, there is no need to replace the existing main unit equipment (air conditioners, TVs, lighting equipment, etc.) that has already been installed, and you can simply replace the existing remote control with the remote control with the built-in drive/communication module 1470. This has the effect of increasing the satisfaction level of many users.

However, when using the drive/communication module 1470 built-in remote controller as the drive/communication module 1470-2 built-in device 1450-4 in FIG. 8B, communication is very simple as described in Chapter 2 using FIG. 25. The C-format, which allows communication of standardized communication information, may be used. However, the remote control structure is not limited thereto, and the remote control structure may be improved to the level of a device 1250-1 that internally includes a drive module 1270-1, a communication module 1202-4, and a device controller 1240-1 as shown in FIG. 8A. In this case, the A-format or E-format, which will be described later, may be used for communication within the system α_1132 with the system controller α_1126.

Next, another example of application will be shown. FIG. 37B shows milk 3506 purchased by the purchaser being stored in refrigerator 3521. A composite module 3523 is attached to the milk 3506 container. This composite module 3523 is then covered with a seal and fixed to the outside of the milk container. On the one hand, a system controller 3522 is installed inside the refrigerator 3521, and this system controller 3522 can intercommunicate with a composite module 3523.

Incidentally, a communication module 1666 with a built-in antenna exists in the composite module 3523 (FIG. 4A(b)), and self-attribute data 1793 can be stored in the communication module 1666. The system controller 3522 can then request the composite module 3523 to return the contents of the self-attribute data 1793. As a result, the system controller 3522 can check the "best before date data" included in the self-attribute data. Since the system controller 3522 has the current date data, it is possible to compare the obtained best-before date data with the date data and measure the degree to which the end of the best-before period of the milk is approaching. That is, for example, the system controller 3522 can detect whether the expiration date is within one week, within four days, within two days, within one day, or if the expiration date has passed.

Furthermore, the system controller 3522 is not limited thereto, and can receive self-attribute data 1793 for each product, food, etc. in the refrigerator 3521 from a composite module 3523 provided for the product, food, and the like. Thereby, the system controller 3522 can display list data of foods, products, etc. stored in the refrigerator on a display 3525 provided in the refrigerator 3521 using a communication line within the network. The user of the refrigerator 3521 who sees the display 3525 can check the status of the expiration date of the milk 3506. Based on the control from the system controller 3522, the status of the expiration date of the milk 3506 can be displayed by changing the color on the display 3525. For example, if the expiry date of the milk 3506 is within one week, it will be marked "green", if it is within four days, it will be "blue", if it is within two days, it will be "yellow", if it is within one day, it will be "pink", and if the expiration date is within one day, it will be "pink". When the deadline has passed, "red" may be displayed. Note that instead of changing the color as this display method, various display methods such as a bar display or a warning character display may be used. Furthermore, if the self-attribute data 1793 includes product purchase date data and identification data of the shop where the product was purchased, these data may be displayed on the display 3525.

FIG. 37C shows an example in which a composite module 3531 is embedded in the heel portion of a shoe 3505. This composite module 3531 contains a pressure sensor, a humidity sensor, and the like. When the user returns home, the composite module 3531 and the system controller 3532 at home communicate with each other, and the system controller 3532 can read the step count data and humidity data recorded in the composite module 3531 in advance. This allows the system controller 3532 to calculate the user's daily number of steps. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and information on the current humidity inside the shoe 3505 can also be obtained. Using the results, the user's daily step count and shoe humidity can be displayed on the smartphone 3533, for example.

Section 5.1.3 Example of application of the section division method to the civil sector In this section 5.1.3, an example of application of the section division method to the civil sector is explained. The example in FIG. 24 shows an example of division into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m when the entire residential lot of one house is made to correspond to the system α_1132. By the way, in FIG. 25, sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m are associated with each room. In comparison, FIG. 24 corresponds to a slightly broader concept, and the garden in the residential area also corresponds to one section 10_1142-10. Also, in FIG. 24, similarly to FIGS. 8A and 8B, the interior space of the vehicle corresponds to one section 1_1142-1. Similarly to FIGS. 8A and 8B, the location of the smart meter 1124 is excluded from the section in FIG. 24, but the location of the smart meter 1124 may be defined as a specific independent section. In addition, sections 3_1142-3 to 8_1142-8 are allocated to each room, including toilets and bathrooms. However, in the system of this embodiment, it is not necessary to divide each room into sections; for example, an "entire annex" whose interior is divided into a plurality of rooms may be assigned to one section 2_1142-2. Furthermore, a spatial area such as a storeroom where users are rarely present may be made to correspond to section 9_1142-9.

In addition, as an example of utilizing the results of integrating and managing information collected in each section 1142, the system controller α_1126 (processor 1230 within it) can determine the presence or absence of end users, their actions/states (whether the end users are awake or asleep, etc.). , is the end user an adult? Is the end user a child? etc.) may be estimated or determined in units of sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m. In addition, the unit of integration and management of collected information is not limited to sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m as described above, but for example, systems α to β_1132 to 1134 (for example, how many users live in one residential area) It may be done by estimating/judging, etc.).

Examples of how to provide services to users include air conditioner temperature settings and lighting on/off control for sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m units, lighting brightness control, and output volume of TVs, radios, audio decks, etc. You may also make adjustments. Further, by providing detailed services in units of sections 1142, it is possible to save power consumption within the systems α to β_1132 to 1134 (support energy saving).

Section 5.2 Example of application to the field of social infrastructure Section 5.2.1 Example of application of wide area network system to the field of social infrastructure When the wide area network system shown in Figure 1 is applied to the field of social infrastructure (Social Infrastructure Technology) Wholesalers A_1102 and B1/2_1104-1/2 also correspond to public institutions such as national and local governments, public corporations, and public interest corporations. The information (products) handled by the wholesalers A_1102 and B1/2_1104-1/2 may include personal information regarding nationals, prefectural residents, metropolitan residents, prefectural residents, and citizens, such as domicile/resident records and tax history. Alternatively, the information (products) handled by the road public corporation or the housing corporation may include road congestion information, accident occurrence information, or land cost (land price) and housing information for each area. Particularly when applied to the social infrastructure field, wholesalers A_1102, B1/2_1104-1/2 own or manage/operate their own unique infrastructure (for example, power transmission lines, water and sewage pipes, city gas pipes, etc.) and products. It has the characteristic of being able to use delivery systems (delivery methods using trains, trucks, etc.).

First, we will show examples of services related to railways and transportation infrastructure, as examples of services provided based on contracts from public organizations such as national and local governments, public corporations, and public interest corporations. The system controller α_1126 periodically reports deterioration information for each region, such as roads, railway bridges, tunnels, and railways, to the server n_1116-n. Then, the service provider B_1112-2 integrates the information of all servers 1 to n_1116-1 to n, formulates future repair plans or issues abnormality warnings, and sends them to the entrusted state, local government, public organization (wholesale Report (notify) to vendor A/B_1102/1104). As another example, we will explain examples of integrated management of systems such as railways, transportation, postal services, transportation, and air traffic control. The system controller α_1126 notifies the server n_1116-n on a regular basis of various operating conditions and accident occurrence information, which is managed in an integrated manner, and service provider B_1112-2 issues operation change instructions as necessary to the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128. Notify to: Specifically, the service provider B_1112-2 that provides these services corresponds to a specific social infrastructure management organization or social system management organization (a commercial company or a public interest corporation). Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to the above, and for example, an NPO corporation or an NPO organization may be associated with the service provider B_1112-2.

In the above service provision example, a service method provided by only a single service provider 1112 has been described. However, the system example of this embodiment is not limited to this, and a plurality of service providers A/B_1112/1114 may cooperate with each other to provide services. In other words, in the explanation in Section 1.7 using FIG. 1, service provider A_1112-1 and service provider B_1112-2, or service provider B_1112-2 and service provider C_1112-3 do not share information or collaborate and accommodate resources. 1114, and demonstrated that it is possible to improve the efficiency and sophistication of services. By combining this mechanism with the information obtained by the smart meter 1124, the effect of new effective use and effective diversion of public consumption goods is created. As an example, a customer receives electricity using the infrastructure and distribution system of wholesaler A_1102, pays the amount of electricity to the electricity retailer's service provider A_1112-1, and uses the infrastructure and distribution system of wholesaler B1_1104-1. Consider a case in which water is supplied, sewage is treated using the infrastructure and delivery system of wholesaler B2_1104-2, and water and sewage usage is paid to service provider B_1112-2, a water and sewage retailer. In the database 1118-n corresponding to the server n_1116-n in service provider B, information obtained from the smart meter 1124 includes information on the real-time amount of stored water in the system α1132 (the amount of water supplied via the water supply system and the sewerage system). (difference with the amount of water discharged through the system) and water pressure information of tap water are collected. Then, upon receiving "instantaneous spike information on electricity usage charges" or "request to limit electricity usage" during a specific time period from service provider A_1112-1, which is an electricity retailer, service provider B_1112-2, which is a water and sewage retailer, The server n_1116-n reads the stored information in the database 1118-n and determines whether or not hydroelectric power generation is possible based on the current amount of stored water and water pressure in the target system α_1132. If the determination result is that hydroelectric power generation is possible within the target system α_1132, the server n_1116-n makes a proposal to the system controller α_1126 to “switch to hydroelectric power generation” within the system α_1132. This not only makes it possible to lower the electricity rate within the system α_1132, but also has the effect of avoiding the danger of exceeding the amount of electricity used in the region.

Next, another service provision form different from the content described above will be explained. In the system of this embodiment, there are multiple product supply routes (from wholesaler A_1102 in FIG. It was explained in Section 1.7 that there is a "dashed line" direct route to smart meter 1124 and a route via service provider A_1112-1. A specific example of a method for providing services by service provider A_1112-1 to domain 2_1122-2 or system α_1132 by taking advantage of this feature, and the unique effects resulting therefrom, will be described below. Here, we will take public consumption goods such as electricity, gas, water, and gasoline as examples of service-related products whose prices vary depending on the area of use and the date and time of use. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may also be applied to other services and products (for example, buying and selling general consumer goods, liquid assets, fixed assets, etc. using a network, distribution of specific information, etc.). For example, when public consumption goods are used within domain 2_1122-2 or system α_1132 when usage charges are high such as in summer/winter or during the day, an amount equivalent to the usage amount from wholesaler A_1102 measured by smart meter 1124 is stored in a specified amount. department 1154 (for example, storage batteries and water/gas tanks) and returned to wholesaler A_1102. On the other hand, public consumption goods are purchased from the wholesaler A1102 and stored in the predetermined product storage section 1154 when usage fees are low, such as when the air conditioning equipment is not needed or at night. This makes it possible to reduce usage fees paid by end users (users within domain 2_1122-2 or within system α_1132) for substantial public consumption items. At the same time, the service provider A_1112-1 can receive a portion of the price reduction (profit margin) of the public consumption material usage fee as a reward. Furthermore, by using the above method, the amount of public consumption materials used in a wide area (the amount of products (public consumption materials) supplied by wholesaler A_1102) is smoothed (the amount of public consumption materials used is temporarily adjusted depending on the season or time). A new effect is created that can reduce the amount of increase or decrease.

Then, when returning an amount equivalent to the usage amount of public consumption materials measured by the smart meter 1124 from the predetermined product storage section 1154 to the wholesaler A_1102 as described above, the charge/discharge amount control section or the storage/release amount control section High control accuracy is required. In order to achieve the high control accuracy, the system of this embodiment uses a charge/discharge amount monitor section or a storage/discharge amount monitor section (not shown in FIG. 1, but present in the predetermined product storage section 1154, , a charge/discharge amount control section or a storage/release amount control section based on detection information (detection signal) from an inflow amount monitor section 1218 and a section corresponding to a release amount monitor section 1216 (described later with reference to FIG. 9). Similarly, real-time feedback of the charge/discharge amount or storage/release amount is performed in the inflow amount control section 1214 and the portion corresponding to the release amount control section 1212). In addition, if necessary, the cumulative amount of charge/discharge or storage/release for each predetermined period is calculated as appropriate and compared with a predetermined target value, and the difference between the amount and the target value is calculated. The charge/discharge amount or storage/release amount in the next predetermined period may be fed back by an amount corresponding to the amount. Implementation of the above control method improves the accuracy of controlling the cumulative accumulated amount for each predetermined period, and has the effect of minimizing losses in the sale and purchase of public consumption goods (difference in trading profits due to insufficient control amount).

However, when applying a wide area network system to the social infrastructure field, one domain 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 shown in Figure 1 may correspond to the entire specific social infrastructure or the entire specific social system. . For example, the operation of railways, transportation, postal services, air traffic control, transportation business, public consumption goods production business, etc. for each specified group (specified corporation or specified corporation group), or the operation of status observation units, or any other social infrastructure or social system. And the unit for observing the state may be associated with each domain 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3. Furthermore, a large group of operations and status observations related to the activities of a specific community, a predetermined organization, or a predetermined corporation integrated by a network with distributed activities for each region may be associated with each domain 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3.

On the other hand, one system α/β_1132/1134 shown in FIG. 1 may correspond to one building or area. In other words, energy saving systems (Energy Management Systems) are called HEMS (Home Energy Management System), BEMS (Building Energy Management System), and CEMS (Community Energy Management System) depending on their size, but one system in this embodiment system is The systems α/β_1132/1134 may be associated with one management unit of the HEMS, BEMS, or CEMS.

Furthermore, an example of the relationship between the domain 1122 and the systems α/β_1132/1134 will be explained as a specific handling method other than the above. For example, if the domain 1122 corresponds to the operation and condition observation of a specific railway company, automatic ticket gate system, ticket issuing system, commuter pass issuing system, operation status management system for each train, automatic track damage status management system, in-train Damage management system, platform deterioration management system, power supply status management system for each train, abnormality warning system on the train/on the platform, on-board molester arrest system, crew/station staff work management/salary payment system, salary A payment/accounting system or the like may be made to correspond to each system 1132-4. In addition, when the domain 1122 corresponds to the operation and condition management of traffic and transportation businesses, it includes deterioration management systems for roads, railway bridges, and tunnels, road accident occurrence information management systems, congestion management systems, and damage to transportation means (trucks, etc.). A situation management system, a gate management system (for expressways, etc.) (including an ETC management system), an employee attendance and attendance management system, a payroll accounting system, etc. may correspond to each of the systems 1132-4.

On the other hand, in Section 1.7, when one system α_1132 corresponds to a specific area that is physically or geographically close, one domain 2_1122-2 corresponds to an area on the network that transcends the physical or geographical space. He explained that it would be possible to respond to Accordingly, when the entire deterioration management system for roads, railway bridges, and tunnels is made to correspond to one domain 2_1122-2, the deterioration management unit for roads, railway bridges, and tunnels set for each region is divided into individual systems α/β_1132/1134. It may be made to correspond to

Section 5.2.2 Example of Application of Composite Module to Social Infrastructure Field When the system of this embodiment is applied to social systems and social infrastructure, the sensor/communication module 1460 is installed at traffic lights, roads, entrance/exit gates of expressways, etc. The system controller α_1126 may be placed in or around a bulletin board (including an electronic bulletin board) so that the system controller α_1126 can grasp the traffic situation of people and cars and traffic congestion, and notify only the necessary information to the server n_1116-n. . The device 1450 in this case may correspond to a traffic light, an electronic gate, an electronic bulletin board, or the like. Further, in this case, the sections described later in Chapter 4 may correspond to a predetermined area around the traffic lights, electronic gates, and electronic bulletin boards, or to roads within a specific range.

In particular, the above-mentioned sensor/communication module 1460 has the characteristics of being lightweight, compact, and power saving (no external power supply required). Therefore, by taking advantage of this advantage, a large number of various sensor/communication modules 1460 are installed in roads, bridge girders, tunnels, or piping sections (such as water and sewage systems), and long-term monitoring of deterioration points in roads, bridge girders, tunnels, or piping sections is possible. becomes easier. From the various sense information obtained here, it is possible to extract only the necessary information, such as detecting only changing components, within the system controller α_1126, which facilitates analysis and data processing on the server n_1116-n side. .

Another example of applying the sensor/communication module 1460 to the social infrastructure field is to attach the sensor/communication module 1460 to a cart in a store such as a supermarket, convenience store, or department store, and collect behavioral history information of customers in the store. It's okay. Then, from the collected customer behavior history, for example, "departments where customers stay for a long time" and "the order in which customers go around" can be extracted and reflected in marketing (market research) such as in-store product display to improve store sales. An effect that can contribute is created.

On the other hand, for example, especially in large rooms such as offices, hospitals, and large stores, the heating and cooling effects are highly uneven, so the temperature and wind strength tend to vary greatly depending on the location. Therefore, as in Section 5.1.2, the sensor/communication module 1460, which has functions such as temperature sensors, wind sensors, sound sensors, optical sensors, or short-range human sensors, can be used everywhere in offices, hospitals, large stores, etc. By installing this, the imbalance in heating and cooling effects within a large room can be significantly reduced, which has the effect of increasing customer satisfaction for many customers.

Another application embodiment in which the composite module 1295 is specifically used will be described. As shown in FIG. 4A(a) or (b), every composite module 1295 includes a communication module 1660. Furthermore, as explained using FIG. 7B in Section 1.6, a self-attribute data storage area 1793 exists within the communication module 1660. The content of the self-attribute data 1793 of a product, product, or part equipped with the composite module 1295 is changed and/or switched depending on the usage situation. The use situation here refers to a change in the area in which the product, commodity, or part exists (that is, a change in the system in which the composite module 1295 is arranged as shown in FIG. 37B), a change in elapsed time, or a change in conditions. Including. When the composite module 1295 is used as the sensor/communication module 1460, it is possible to monitor surrounding conditions in various usage environments depending on the combination with sensors.

FIG. 37A schematically shows, for example, an in-store area 3501 of a supermarket, a cash register area 3502, and an exit area 3503 of the supermarket. Here, the inside of the supermarket corresponds to one independent system α_1132 (see FIG. 1). The cash registers 3511a and 2511b in FIG. 37A operate as the system controller α_1126. It is assumed that shoes 3505, milk 3506, and bag 3507 are sold as products in the system α_1132.

Here, a sensor/communication module 1460 as a composite module 1295 is mounted on each of the shoes 3505, milk 3506, and bag 3507. As a specific mounting method, sheet-shaped sensor/communication modules 1460 (composite module 1295) are individually attached using adhesive. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be inserted (or mixed) into shoes 3505, milk 3506, or bag 3507. It is assumed that a part of the self-attribute data 1793 has an anti-theft flag (for example, "1"). When the purchaser completes payment, the information on the anti-theft flag is erased under control from the cash register 3511a or 2511b in the cash register area 3502. Specifically, for example, when the cash register 3511a reads a barcode indicating the price of a product, it sends a reading completion signal to the composite module 1295 (or sensor/communication module 1460 or unit 1290) in the product. When the corresponding composite module 1295 (or sensor/communication module 1460 or unit 1290) receives the reading completion signal, it determines that the payment has been completed and erases the anti-theft flag, setting it to "0". Furthermore, the cash registers 3511a and 2511b can add supermarket identification data and payment date data to the self-attribute data storage area 1793.

Here, if the product passes through the exit area 3503 of the supermarket without the anti-theft flag being erased (without being settled), a warning is automatically output. That is, a monitoring device 3512 capable of outputting an alarm is installed in the exit area 3503 of the supermarket. As described in Section 4.4, in the system of this embodiment, the positions of all composite modules 1295 (or sensor/communication modules 1460) can be detected in real time. Therefore, when the composite module 1295 (or sensor/communication module 1460) passes through the exit area 3503 of the supermarket, information communication is automatically performed with the system controller α_1126 (cash registers 3511a, 2511b). When the anti-theft flag is "1", an alarm is output from the monitoring device. On the other hand, when the theft prevention flag is "0", the monitoring device 3512 does not output an alarm.

In the system example of the embodiment described above, a clerk is placed at the cash registers 3511a and 3511b, and an anti-theft flag is stored in the self-attribute data storage area 1793. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the sales price of the target product may be recorded in advance in the self-attribute data storage area 1793. Then, when the composite module 1295 (or sensor/communication module 1460 or unit 1290) in which the sales price has been recorded in advance passes through the exit area 3503 of the supermarket, the total amount paid by the purchaser is automatically displayed. On the other hand, a composite module 1295 (or a sensor/communication module 1460 or a unit 1290) is similarly installed in an accessory worn by a purchaser (such as a tie pin or necklace), and the purchaser can use an unattended cash register 3511a. , 3511b, the total payment amount will be automatically debited from the buyer's bank account. In order to make this possible, the purchaser's bank account number and password are stored in the self-attribute data storage area 1793 in the composite module 1295 (or sensor/communication module 1460 or unit 1290) installed in the purchaser's equipment. Recorded in advance.

The composite module 1295 (or sensor/communication module 1460 or unit 1290) in which billing information for the purchaser is recorded is not mounted in the attached product as described above, but as described later in Section 5.3.2. It may also be present in the purchaser's body by swallowing or other methods.

As described above, the use of the composite module 1295 (or sensor/communication module 1460) not only prevents theft but also enables automatic billing without the need for a clerk. This will lead to significant savings in labor costs and will have the effect of helping supermarkets improve their profits.

For example, FIG. 37D shows an example in which the composite module is used in a system that inspects the corrosion status of steel frames that support building walls, tunnel walls, bridges, etc. For example, steel frames 3541a, 3541b, 3541c, . . . support the back side of a wall 3540 to be inspected, such as a tunnel. Composite modules 3542 and 3543 are attached to the surfaces of steel frames 3541a, 3541b, and 3541c, respectively. In FIG. 37D, communication modules 3542 and 3543 attached to the steel frame 3541a appear on the drawing. If the wall 3540 to be inspected has a shielding effect against radio waves, an antenna 1480 is installed externally to the communication module 1660 in the composite module 1295 (FIG. 4A(a)). This external antenna 1480 is arranged at a position where it can transmit and receive radio waves. That is, in the example of FIG. 37D, antennas 3542a and 3543b of composite modules 3542 and 3543 are led out to the outer surface of the wall 3540 to be inspected via lead wires that penetrate the wall 3540 to be inspected.

The sensor module 1260 (FIG. 4B(a)) in the composite module (sensor/communication module) 3542, 3543 is closely attached to the surface of the steel frame 3541a, 3541b, 3541c via an insulating film. However, if the surfaces of the steel frames 3541a, 3541b, and 3541c rust and swell, the adhesive film is torn and the sensor module 1260 comes into direct contact with the rust. When the sensor module 1260 comes into contact with rust, the resistance value within the sensor module 1260 decreases. Therefore, by knowing the resistance value inside the sensor module 1260, the state of rust on the surface of the steel frames 3541a, 3541b, and 3541c can be determined.

In most of the embodiment system examples described so far, the system controllers 1126 and 3546 were installed in a fixed system, and the unit 1290 (or composite module 1295) was movable. In contrast, the system example of the embodiment shown in FIG. 37D (and FIG. 37E, which will be described later) is characterized in that the unit 1290 (or composite module 1295) side is fixed, and the system controllers 1126 and 3546 are movable. For example, there may be cases where it is desired to obtain sensor information from a very wide area at once, or where it is difficult to install the system controller α_1126 due to system circumstances. In this case, as described above, the unit 1290 (or composite module 1295) is installed in a fixed system, and the system controllers 1126 and 3546 are moved to collect sensor information of each unit 1290 (or composite module 1295). This has the effect of making it easier to obtain sensor information over a very wide area.

In the system of this embodiment, as explained in Section 4.5, the same unit 1290 (or composite module 1295) can be adapted to a plurality of different systems. Therefore, even in this case, whenever a plurality of different system controllers 1126, 3546 used for different applications are moved, the fixed unit 1290 (or composite module 1295) can operate properly for each application.

In the embodiment system example of FIG. 37D, a system controller 3546 is installed on a part of the inspection vehicle 3545 (in the diagram of FIG. 37D, the roof of the inspection vehicle 3545), and passes near the antennas 3542a and 3543b of the composite module. Each time the composite module passes near the antennas 3542a and 3543b, the system controller 3546 transmits a command request to each composite module (unit) 3542 and 3543 to "response to the resistance value in the sensor module 1260." In response to the request command, each of the composite modules (units) 3542 and 3543 appropriately responds to the system controller 3546 with the "resistance value within the sensor module 1260." Thereby, the system controller 3546 can inspect the rust state of all the steel frames 3541a, 3541b, and 3541c. In this way, periodic rust inspections can be easily and accurately performed. Note that the rust detection method described above is merely an example, and rust may be detected using other detection means.

If a decrease in the resistance value in the sensor module 1260 outside the allowable range is detected as a result of the rust inspection, the system controller 3546, 1126 sends a message to the server n_1116-n in FIG. Information on the predetermined steel frame 3541 is notified. In this case, the wholesaler B1_1104-1 in FIG. 1 corresponds to the government or the National Highway Corporation. The wall maintenance company commissioned by the government or road corporation corresponds to the service provider B_1112-2. Based on the information about the rusted and deteriorated steel frame 3541 stored in the server n_1116-n, the wall maintenance company formulates a repair plan and provides the road corporation (wholesaler B1_1104-1) with a repair budget. Apply for.

An example application of an embodiment system in which a composite module 1295 or unit 1290 is used to detect leaks in, for example, gas pipes, water pipes, fire hydrant pipes, etc., is shown in FIG. 37E. Gas pipes, water pipes, fire hydrant pipes, etc. are often placed underground along roads. Therefore, a composite module (unit) 3549 is attached on the surface of a pipe 3548 such as a gas pipe, water pipe, or fire hydrant pipe. Here, the sensor module 1260 built into the composite module (unit) 3549 and used for detecting leaks in gas pipes, water pipes, fire hydrant pipes, etc. is a combination of gas sensors, moisture (water) sensors, sound sensors, vibration sensors, etc. A combined sensor may also be incorporated.

Similarly to FIG. 37D, in FIG. 37E, a system controller 3546 is mounted inside the inspection vehicle 3545 (in FIG. 37E, the system controller 3546 is mounted on the bottom of the inspection vehicle 3545), and leakage inspection is performed periodically. Similar to FIG. 37D, detection data from the sensor module 1260 is returned to the system controller 3546 in response to a request command from the system controller 3546. The system controller 3546 can determine the location of gas leaks, water leaks, etc. by collecting and analyzing sensor information from each composite module (unit) 3549. Further, the embodiment system shown in FIG. 37E also has the effect of being able to discover a wide range of abnormalities in a very easy way, as in the case of FIG. 37D. Note that the system controller 3546 may be fixedly installed along the pipe installation line instead of being mounted on the inspection vehicle 3545.

An example in which a composite module (unit) is applied to a greenhouse cultivation device is shown in FIG. 37F. By the way, a greenhouse cultivation device is sometimes called a greenhouse house, a plastic greenhouse, etc., for example. Inside the greenhouse house 3550, for example, a system controller 3551 and a surveillance camera 3552 are installed. This surveillance camera 3552 can image the state of the plants in the greenhouse house 3550 and transmit the imaged video signal to a monitor owned by the grower (owner).

It is assumed that vegetables such as carrots, radish, or burdock are grown in the greenhouse house 2550, for example. In the case of such vegetables, it is impossible to judge how well they are growing underground just by looking at them from the outside. Therefore, in the embodiment system shown in FIG. 37F, bar-shaped monitoring devices 3553a, 3553b, 3553c, . . . containing a plurality of composite modules (units) are placed underground.

The right side of FIG. 37F shows an enlarged view of a typical bar-shaped monitoring device 3553c. Here, the pentagonal part inside the bar-shaped monitoring device 3553c is a mounting plate for the monitoring device 3553c, and has a sharp tip so that it can be easily inserted into the ground. A plurality of composite modules (units) FC1 to FC5 and FD1 to FD5 are installed in the longitudinal direction of this mounting plate. Furthermore, the composite modules (units) FC1 to FC5 are equipped with a sensor module 1260 that can measure the size of nearby substances by transmitting and receiving ultrasonic waves, for example. Furthermore, the composite modules (units) FD1 to FD5 are equipped with a sensor module 1260 that includes a humidity sensor that can measure humidity, for example. Then, the growth (length) information of neighboring vegetables (carrots or radish) is collected from the measurement results obtained from the composite modules (units) FC1 to FC5. Methods for collecting growth (length) information on vegetables (carrots or radish) that are close to each other are not limited to ultrasonic waves; for example, imaging using near-infrared rays with wavelengths in the range of 700 nm to 2500 nm is also possible. good. Furthermore, the humidity measurement data obtained from the composite modules (units) FD1 to FD5 are effective for monitoring the moisture situation underground. The measurement data obtained by the composite modules (units) FC1 to FC5 and FD1 to FD5 is transmitted to the system controller 3551 via the antenna ANT.

The output data of the above composite modules (units) FC1 to FC5 and FD1 to FD5 are aggregated by the system controller 3551. Since the results of this tally are displayed on the monitor as appropriate, the supervisor can easily determine the harvest time. Furthermore, the supervisor is not limited to this, and by monitoring the aggregate results of the humidity measurement data obtained from the composite modules (units) FD1 to FD5, the supervisor can determine the appropriate watering timing. In this way, good growth of vegetables can be monitored.

Further, inside the greenhouse house 3550, a composite module (unit) 3554 containing, for example, an infrared sensor and/or a high-frequency, high-sensitivity microphone is arranged. By operating periodically, this composite module (unit) 3554 can monitor the presence of pests and insects that attach to vegetables, for example.

As an application example showing another embodiment system, FIGS. 37G and 37H show an example in which a plurality of different types of composite modules (units) are combined and monitored. In particular, FIG. 37G is characterized in that it "detects combinations that are not normally possible." This produces the effect of being able to detect abnormalities with high accuracy and efficiency. Furthermore, the feature of FIG. 37H is that "association between a plurality of different identification data is detected." This has the effect of improving state detection accuracy. Simultaneously obtaining sensor information from a plurality of different types of composite modules (units) as described above has the effect of improving the accuracy of detecting state changes.

First, a method for "detecting combinations that are normally impossible" will be explained using FIG. 37G. For example, if a murder weapon is found in a hospital, school (elementary school, junior high school, high school, university), police station, or around the Imperial Palace (specifically, detecting a metal reaction using a metal detector), the system computer will detect an impossible object. can be detected as a combination of As a specific example, FIG. 37G shows a room in a hospital. This room is equipped with, for example, a patient bed 3560 and a box 3561 for medical instruments. Here, a composite module (unit) 3560a is installed inside the patient bed 3560. Similarly, a composite module (unit) 3561a is attached to the medical instrument box 3561. Identification data of the bed 3560 is stored as self-attribute data 1793 (FIG. 7B) in this composite module (unit) 3560a. In response to a request from a system controller 3562 installed externally, identification data of the bed 3560 can be sent as a response. On the other hand, identification data of the medical instrument box 3561 is stored as self-attribute data 1793 (FIG. 7B) in the composite module (unit) 3561a. In response to a request from an externally installed system controller 3562, the identification data of the medical instrument box 3561 can be transmitted in response. Based on this, the system controller 3562 can always grasp the combination of products that are present in the patient room. In this way, the system controller 3562 has a database of various products that are allowed to be present in the hospital room.

Assume that a murder weapon 3565 such as a knife is brought into the hospital room. A composite module (unit) 3565a is also built into the weapon 3565 such as a knife. When this composite module (unit) 3565a transmits pre-stored self-attribute data 1793 (product identification data), the system controller 3562 recognizes that a product that is not allowed to exist in the hospital room has appeared. As a result, the system controller 3562 can quickly report the abnormal condition to the security office, supervisory authority, or security company.

The above example is not limited to a hospital room, but the same idea can be applied to various areas such as the security range around the Imperial Palace, the Presidential Palace, the Prime Minister's Office, schools (elementary schools, junior high schools, high schools, universities, etc.), police stations, etc. It can be applied within the facility.

Another example in which multiple types of sense information obtained from multiple different composite modules 1295 (or units 1290) are combined and monitored is shown in FIG. 37H. Here, an example is shown in which a passenger 3570 moves from an airport 3567 to an airport 3568 by an airplane 3569. Here, for example, a composite module (unit) 3570a is built into the passenger's belongings such as a passport, bag, hat, shoes, etc., and a self-attribute data storage area 1793 (see FIG. 7B) within this composite module (unit) 3570a. Identification data corresponding to is recorded in advance. Similarly, a composite module (unit) 3573a is adhered to a carry bag 3573 owned by this passenger. Carry bag identification data is also recorded in advance in the self-attribute data storage area 1793 within this composite module (unit) 3573a.

Then, when the passenger 3570 boards the airplane 3569, the system controller 3571 collects identification data of the passenger's belongings (baggage) 3572 and carry bag 3573. These pieces of identification data (the identification data of the passenger's belongings 3572 and the identification data of the carry bag 3573) are associated and recognized by the system controller 3571 as essential combined identification data of the passenger 3570.

On the other hand, another system controller 3572 is installed in advance at the airport 3568 to which the passenger 3570 is traveling. When the passenger 3570 arrives at the destination airport 3568, a plurality of pieces of identification data associated with the passenger 3570 (identification data of the passenger's belongings 3572 and identification data of the carry bag 3573) are transferred via the Internet to the destination airport 3568. It is automatically transferred from the controller 3571 to the system controller 3572 installed at the destination. Then, the system controller 3572 independently accesses a composite module (unit) 3570a built in the passenger's belongings such as a passport, bag, hat, shoes, etc. and a composite module (unit) 3573a built in the carry bag 3573. Respective identification data (identification data of the passenger's belongings 3572 and identification data of the carry bag 3573) is acquired.

Next, the multiple identification data obtained from the composite modules (units) 3570a and 3573a are compared with the multiple identification data obtained from the movement source system controller 3571 (identification data of the passenger's belongings 3572 and identification data of the carry bag 3573). do. Thereby, the destination system controller 3572 can determine whether the passenger's 3570 belongings were normally transported from the airport 3567 to the airport 3568.

Section 5.2.3 Application example of section division method to social infrastructure field In this section 5.2.3, we will explain an example of section division when section division is applied to the social infrastructure field. The section division unit in this social infrastructure field tends to be larger than the scale explained in Section 5.1.3.

For example, if individual sections 1142 are made to correspond to each partition (room) in a building or to each floor, the average size of the partition area in the building will be larger than the average size of a room in a private residence. Further, each section 1142 may be assigned to each house in an apartment complex.

When section division is applied to the social infrastructure field, the section structure to be divided may have a hierarchy. For example, in the case of the above-mentioned apartment complex, upper section divisions may be made to correspond to each unit as the first upper hierarchy, and lower section divisions may be made to correspond to each unit according to the room allocation within each unit. Similarly, sections hierarchized by division scale may be made to correspond to a predetermined region. For example, in Japan, the country is divided into capitals, prefectures, and prefectures (higher sections correspond to the above units), and Tokyo is divided into multiple wards and cities. Also, some prefectures are divided into multiple cities and counties. Then, middle sections may be made to correspond to this division, and lower sections may be made to correspond to each address.

By the way, FIG. 35 is a diagram schematically showing a map of a specific area. As described above, individual sections 1142 may correspond to each address. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sections 1142 may be divided according to predetermined functions. An example will be explained. In Japan, water pipes and wired communication lines (telephone lines, optical fiber, etc.) are sometimes installed underground directly under major highways. There are also cases where power supply lines are installed in the sky along major arterial roads. In this way, the sections 1_1142-1 to 4_1142-4 may be divided 1900 for each region or at predetermined intervals along major arterial roads, water and sewage pipes, distribution power lines, and wired communication lines. In addition, in the system of this embodiment, a plurality of sensor modules 1260 or sensor/communication modules 1460 are arranged within the section 1142, and sensor information obtained therefrom is integrated or managed for each section 1142, so that the road in each section 1142 can be This makes it possible to extract areas where water has deteriorated, search for water leaks in water and sewage systems, and search for disconnections in distribution power lines and wired communication lines. As a result, it becomes easier to extract more detailed deterioration locations on roads, search for water leaks in water and sewage systems, and search for disconnections in distribution power lines and wired communication lines.

Furthermore, regarding the grasp of traffic congestion on major arterial roads such as expressways, division 1900 into sections 1_1142-1 to 4_1142-4 may be performed along the main arterial road for each area or for each predetermined interval in the same manner as described above. By displaying the traffic congestion situation for each section 1142, it becomes easy to accurately grasp the traffic congestion situation. As a relatively similar content, the division method of section 1142 may be used to grasp the congestion situation within a predetermined area. In other words, when an event such as a soccer or baseball game or a concert is held, dividing the area around the event venue into multiple sections 1142 and understanding the traffic congestion in each section will make guiding passersby and deploying police more efficient. It can be done accurately.

In this way, in the system of this embodiment, by integrating and managing the information collection results in units of sections 1142, it not only becomes easier to understand the situation in a wide area as a whole, but also has the effect of increasing the convenience of maintenance processing for social infrastructure systems. to be born.

Logistics management is an example of an application in the social infrastructure field that is somewhat similar to the above-mentioned understanding of traffic congestion on major arterial roads. For example, in order to transport seafood to a remote location while maintaining its freshness, there is an air transport method that reduces transportation time. However, from the perspective of reducing transportation costs, methods are being considered to ensure freshness for a long period of time by transporting food to distant locations by vehicle. As a result of this study, it has been found that temperature control during transportation is important to ensure the freshness of seafood, vegetables, and fruits.

That is, the oxidation reaction rate and corrosion rate inside seafood, vegetables, and fruits depend on the ambient temperature, so from this point of view, it is desirable to set the storage temperature of seafood, vegetables, and fruits at a low temperature. On the other hand, when fish are placed in a sub-zero environment, the blood in their bodies freezes and expands, resulting in a noticeable loss of freshness. Similarly, in the case of vegetables and fruits, the volume expansion due to the freezing of moisture adhering to the surface or moisture contained inside causes a clear decrease in freshness. Therefore, when transporting fish and shellfish, vegetables, and fruits to long distances by vehicle, it is necessary to maintain the temperature of seafood, vegetables, and fruits in the refrigerated vehicle within a range of 0±1°C.

For this reason, temperature sensors are installed inside packaging containers for seafood, vegetables, and fruits, and the air conditioning inside the refrigerated vehicle can be controlled based on temperature information obtained from each packaging container. The temperature sensor in this case corresponds to sensor/communication module 1460. Then, the section 1142 can be made to correspond to the "inside environment of each refrigerated vehicle".

However, the system of this embodiment is not limited to the above method, and other section division methods may be adopted. In the system of this embodiment, as described in Section 4.4, it is possible to detect the location of the source of the radio waves emitted by each sensor/communication module 1460. Therefore, by using position detection technology for the sensor/communication module 1460 that detects temperature, the transportation location of each packaging container of seafood, vegetables, and fruits can be tracked in real time. Furthermore, from the explanation in Section 2.3, it is possible to identify each packaging container using the IEEE extended address SEXADRS on the sending side (or the sending side IP address information SIPADRS explained in Section 2.4) in Figure 12A(e). Become. Therefore, by combining the above technologies, it is possible to not only manage the transportation route and required transportation time for each packaging container of seafood, vegetables, and fruits, but also to prevent transportation delays due to traffic congestion on the transportation route of the refrigerated vehicle storing the packaging container. can be managed in real time. As a result, the refrigerated vehicle may be instructed as to whether or not traffic congestion can be avoided, taking into consideration the pre-storage time of the packaging container before transporting the vehicle.

When the present embodiment system is applied to the above-mentioned physical distribution management, the method of selecting a physical communication medium to be used for the same system network line 1782 in FIG. 10A, which will be described later, becomes important. For example, according to the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 802.11n standard, which supports medium-range wireless, the effective cell radius is said to be several hundred meters. Therefore, when medium-range wireless is adopted as this physical communication medium, it is necessary to set the physical size of each system α_1132 and β_1134 to 1 km or less. On the other hand, the cell radius of IEEE802.16e-2005, which supports long-distance wireless, is 1 to 3 km. Therefore, when medium-range wireless is adopted as this physical communication medium, it is desirable to set the physical size of each system α_1132 and β_1134 to around 3 km.

Each of the systems α_1132 and β_1134 having the above size may be spatially divided into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m along the transportation route (for example, the main highway in FIG. 35). Managing the transportation locations for each packaging container of seafood, vegetables, and fruits in sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m in this way has the effect of being able to understand in detail the locations causing delivery delays due to traffic congestion along the transportation route, for example. . Then, by notifying other delivery vehicles of the results and instructing them to avoid traffic congestion areas, smooth transportation of other delivery vehicles becomes possible.

Another application example of the method of applying the system of this embodiment to the above-mentioned logistics management will be described below. This application example uses the "simple plug-in/plug-out method using composite module position detection" described in Section 4.2. In this case, short-range wireless is used as the physical communication medium of the same system network line 1782 (FIG. 10A).

Here, the inside of a large refrigerator in which packaging containers for seafood, vegetables, and fruits are stored before shipping, which has a built-in sensor/communication module 1460 that detects temperature, is made to correspond to the system α_1132. Furthermore, since the space within this space is divided into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, the storage location of this packaging container in the large refrigerator is automatically managed. When this packaging container is shipped, it is taken out of the large refrigerator. As a result, automatic plug-out processing from the system α_1132 is performed, and the shipping date and time are managed within the system controller α_1126.

Next, the loading space inside the refrigerated vehicle for transporting this packaging container is made to correspond to the system β_1134. Also, a section 1142 is defined in detail within the space. A system controller β_1128 installed therein collects temperature information from the sensor/communication module 1460 and controls the air conditioner inside the refrigerated vehicle.

However, in the method described in Section 4.4, only the location of the communication module 1202 that supports wireless communication is detected. The position of module 1270 has not been detected. Therefore, if the temperature control accuracy inside the refrigerated car is high and temperature control for each packaging container is not necessarily required, a standalone communication module 1202 compatible with short-range wireless communication may be used instead of the sensor/communication module 1460. good.

Then, the inside of the warehouse (large refrigerator) to which this refrigerated vehicle is delivered is made to correspond to the system γ. The system controller γ installed in this system γ shares information with the aforementioned system controllers α_1126 and β_1128, so information such as delivery delay information, pre-storage time in the warehouse before shipping, internal temperature during transportation, etc. The information can predict the freshness of seafood, vegetables, and fruits in packaging containers. In this way, the freshness after delivery can be predicted, which has the effect of improving the ease of pricing the corresponding seafood, vegetables, and fruits and the ease of selecting delivery destinations thereafter.

Furthermore, as another application example of the above-mentioned "simple plug-in/plug-out method using position detection of a composite module", it may be used for "automatic payment when passing through a gate or purchasing a product". Further, as a composite module used in this application example, a sensor/communication module 1460 that supports voice input may be used. Currently, in Japan, near-field wireless systems such as FeliCa (a coined word combining the words Felicity and Card), which is a contactless IC card standard, are used for entry/exit control at the entrances and exits of designated rooms and when passing through railway-related ticket gates. It is used for ticket gate processing and automatic payment when purchasing products. However, since near-field wireless communication is used for communication with the contactless IC card, it takes time and effort for the user to take out the contactless IC card from the storage location when carrying it each time the user uses it.

On the other hand, changing from near-field wireless communication to short-range wireless communication (or medium-range wireless communication) has the advantage that the user does not have to take the device out of a carrying (storage) location such as a bag, purse, or pocket when using it. The physical shape of the package in which the sensor/communication module 1460-5 is mounted here does not necessarily need to be a card, and can have any shape that is easy to carry, such as a necklace or a tie pin. Then, the system α_1132 area is set only in the vicinity of the entrance door of a predetermined room, the vicinity of the passage entrance of a railway-related ticket examination machine (gate), or the vicinity of the purchase counter of a vending machine or store. However, in the method described in Section 4.4, only the location of the communication module 1202 that supports wireless communication is detected. The position of module 1270 has not been detected. Therefore, for traffic management at a predetermined room entrance door or railway-related ticket gate (gate), the communication module 1202 capable of wireless communication may be used alone in place of the sensor/communication module 1460-5.

Then, when the user comes in front of a designated entrance door, just before the ticket gate, or when the user approaches a vending machine or store purchase counter, "plug-in processing" (Section 4.2) is automatically performed. ) is carried out. After that, when the user leaves the location, the "plug-out process" is automatically performed, but the user's history of passing through gates (entrance/exit doors and ticket gates) and purchase payment history is managed by the system controller α_1126. Further, by utilizing the position detection of this sensor/communication module 1460-5 (see Section 4.2), it is possible to automatically recognize an emergency situation such as an abnormal fall of the user from the platform onto the railway.

In particular, in front of a predetermined entrance door or at the passage of a ticket inspection machine (gate), a user passing through may hold his hand or place his finger at a predetermined place for personal verification. In this case, the personal authentication method is not limited to palm print verification or fingerprint verification, but may also be performed by imaging a vein pattern using near-infrared light reflected near the palm or finger surface. Furthermore, the identity verification may be performed by face recognition without using hands or fingers. Here, prior to the user's personal verification, the above plug-in process is performed when the user comes to a predetermined entrance door or just before a ticket gate. Immediately after this plug-in, the unique identification information of the sensor/communication module 1460-5 or the communication module 1202 (for example, the IEEE extended address EXADRS in FIG. 12A(e)) is used to connect the system controller α_1126 (see FIG. 8A or 8B). ) accesses the server n_1116-n and obtains information for personal verification (authentication) (palmprint/fingerprint/vein pattern/face pattern, etc.) in advance. Then, the information for personal verification (authentication) obtained in advance is compared with the information obtained in front of a predetermined entrance door or through a ticket inspection machine (gate). Here, only the users who match the verification information are allowed to pass through the entrance door or ticket inspection machine (gate), and the verification information is discarded. In this way, the system controller α_1126 obtains the information for personal verification (authentication) in advance immediately after plug-in, so there is an effect that quick personal verification (authentication) can be performed.

Furthermore, if user confirmation is required at the time of electronic payment, the user is asked to utter a voice indicating consent (such as a consent word). When the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 8B receives the voice (or generated word) information from the sensor/communication module 1460-5, "user's voiceprint verification" is performed using the information from the server n_1116-n. Then, personal authentication is performed by checking the voiceprint and the IP address information (FIG. 13(b)) possessed by the sensor/communication module 1460-5 or information corresponding to the IEEE extended address EXADRS. Next, this system controller α_1126 may estimate/determine whether the words uttered by the user indicate "an intention to agree to electronic payment" using voice recognition technology. When all of the above confirmations are completed, communication is performed between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n related to the user's bank account management, and the electronic payment is completed.

If this mobile system is applied to any of the above-mentioned "logistics management" / "gate passage management" / "electronic payment at the time of product purchase", the corresponding sensor/communication module 1460-5 can be manufactured at a very low cost. This has the effect of allowing it to be distributed in large quantities. Conventionally, GPS (Global Positioning System) related parts used for position detection are extremely expensive, making it difficult to distribute them in large quantities. In contrast, in this embodiment, the position is detected using the radio waves normally emitted by the sensor/communication module 1460-5, so there is no additional cost for detecting the position of the sensor/communication module 1460-5. Therefore, this sensor/communication module 1460-5 can be manufactured at a very low cost.

As an example of application in the field of social infrastructure, the explanation has mainly focused on the use of the sensor/communication module 1460. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the drive/communication module 1470 may be used for remote control of a mobile robot built into a movement control unit. For example, sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m are defined for each room in a hotel or an apartment complex. Using the position detection technology of the drive/communication module 1470, the system controller α_1126 controls the mobile robot to move it to the entrance of a predetermined room. This mobile robot may be made to clean inside a predetermined room or may be made to carry a predetermined baggage.

In addition to the above application examples, it can also be applied to agriculture. That is, within the plant factory, for example, the plants are divided into different systems α_1132 and β_1134 for each type of plant, and the plants are grown under different growth conditions. Furthermore, the area may be divided into sections 1142 for each growing location of plants of the same kind, and the amount of light, amount of water supply/replenishment, temperature, and humidity may be controlled for each section, as well as the growth state of the plants may be managed.

Section 5.3 Application example to the healthcare field Section 5.3.1 Application example of the wide area network system to the healthcare field As an example of the application of the wide area network system shown in Figure 1 to the healthcare field, for example, Commissioned by corresponding wholesaler B1_1104-1, service provider B_1112-2, which corresponds to a specific public institution, collects patient disease names, symptoms, and individual patient genetic information from system α_1132, which corresponds to hospitals and local medical institutions. It is possible to envisage ways to collect and organize information on diseases nationwide. In this case, this public institution (service provider B_1112-2) accesses the system controller α_1126 that manages the database within the hospital or local medical institution (system α_1132) via the network and automatically collects the necessary information. . The analysis results obtained will be reported to the state (wholesaler B1_1104-1) and will be made available to the public via the Internet or through news media such as newspapers/magazines.

Section 5.3.2 Example of Application of Composite Module to Healthcare Field The sensor/communication module 1460 having the structure shown in Figure 5 has many benefits such as being lightweight, small, power saving (no external power supply required), and low cost. It has the following advantages. Therefore, by taking advantage of these advantages, the sensor/communication module 1460 can be directly attached to the body of a moving user. As a specific mounting method, the sensor/communication module 1460 may be directly mounted on the human body using a mounting member such as a wristwatch, glasses, or a tie clip, or it may be fixed to clothing. . The sensor/communication module 1460, which is combined with a temperature sensor, pulse sensor, respiratory sensor (acceleration sensor), blood oxygen concentration sensor, etc., is then worn by patients and healthy people, which has the effect of being able to trace health conditions in real time. Yes. Furthermore, the system controller α_1126 installed in each hospital room or individual room analyzes the detection results in real time and notifies doctors and nurses only in the event of an abnormality, which has the effect of realizing efficient care for patients and healthy people. . Furthermore, since only necessary information can be selected and communicated to the server n_1116-n (FIG. 1) installed in each hospital, the efficiency of data management and data processing within the server n_1116-n has the effect of increasing.

The method described above describes how to attach the composite module directly to the human body. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the composite module (for example, composite module 7_1295-7 in FIG. 2) may be directly inserted/invaded or implanted into the human body. In this case, instead of being installed independently in the network system α_1132, the composite module 7_1295-7 takes the form of being built into the human body (specific user) and moving together with the human body (specific user). However, the above-described method of attaching the composite module to the human body places a mental burden on the user when attaching and detaching the composite module (the user feels it is troublesome). In comparison, as will be described later, by inserting/invading/embedding (embedding) the composite module into the human body in advance, the system controller α_1126 can obtain user-related information as appropriate without placing the burden on the user of attaching and removing the composite module. There is.

First, we will explain how to implant the composite module into the human body. There is a method of embedding a composite module 1295 shown in FIG. 4A(b) near a suture site immediately after an incisional surgery on a patient. As the progress progresses after the surgery, there is a risk that the incision site or the affected area removal (cut) site will become suppurated or internal bleeding will occur. Therefore, it is important for post-surgical treatment to detect suppuration and internal bleeding at the site where the affected part is removed (cut) as soon as possible and take appropriate measures. If bacteria enters the incision site or the site where the affected area is removed (cut) and causes suppuration, the pH value (hydrogen ion index) of the suppuration site changes. Therefore, as the composite module 1295 to be embedded in the suture site, a sensor/communication module 1460 having a built-in pH sensor module or blood sensor module that detects pH values may be used.

Moreover, in this case, the period for follow-up observation after surgery does not need to be so long. Therefore, as explained in Section 1.6, even if the sensor/communication module 1460 is controlled to operate only during the post-surgery follow-up period using the life management data 1794 or the operating period management data 1795 in FIG. 7B, good. In addition, the service life (battery life) of the power storage module (battery) 1554 in the sensor/communication module 1460 shown in FIG. Communication module 1460 may be rendered inoperable. This prevents unnecessary radio wave transmission from the composite module 1295 (sensor/communication module 1460) after the post-surgery follow-up period and reduces the burden on the system controller α_1126 that controls/manages network communication within the network system α_1132. An effect is produced.

Next, a method for inserting or invading the composite module into the human body will be explained. In this case, a composite module 1295 having the form shown in FIG. 4A(b) is enclosed in a capsule, and the user is asked to swallow the capsule along with water or a soft drink. For example, by lowering the selling price of soft drinks mixed with the capsules, the composite module 1295 can be introduced into the body while reducing the mental burden on the user. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a user with a chronic disease takes medicine regularly, the capsule may be swallowed together with the user. The capsule containing the composite module 1295 remains in the user's body until it is excreted in a toilet or the like, making it possible to continue transmitting user information. Further, as described above, by utilizing the life management data 1794, the operating period management data 1795, or the battery life of the power storage module (battery) 1554, unnecessary radio wave transmission from the composite module 1295 after excretion can be prevented.

Examples of the use of this method include user health management, early detection of disease onset/onset, and user's daily exercise status management. First, we will explain application examples for user health management and early detection of disease onset/onset. In this case, the sensor module 1260 in FIG. 4B(b) is used as the other function module 1440 having functions other than communication in FIG. 4A(b). As an example of this sensor module 1260, a temperature sensor module that measures body temperature may be used.

Conventionally, as a method for early detection of patients suffering from influenza, there is a method of installing a sensor that measures a user's body surface temperature using infrared rays at an airport gate, for example. However, if the user passes the installed temperature sensor before the temperature rises due to the onset of influenza (that is, immediately before the onset of influenza), there is a risk of missing an influenza patient. In comparison, tracking temperature changes over time using a capsule with a built-in temperature sensor module 1260 has the effect of improving the accuracy of detecting influenza patients.

Further, as another example of the sensor module 1260 built into the capsule, a sensor module capable of measuring blood glucose level may be used. This method measures the carbohydrate content in blood from the near-infrared light spectrum pattern obtained from the blood. Diabetic patients tend to have higher blood sugar levels (sugar content in the blood) than healthy people. When a diabetic patient's blood sugar level exceeds an acceptable range, prompt action such as medication is required. Therefore, by constantly monitoring the blood sugar level in the patient's body with a capsule containing a blood sugar sensor module, abnormal blood sugar levels can be detected quickly, which increases the effectiveness of treatment for diabetic patients.

Traditionally, in hospitals and facilities, nurses regularly measured the body temperature and blood sugar levels of hospitalized patients. In comparison, by having inpatients regularly take capsules with a built-in composite module 1295, not only can sudden changes in the patient's condition be treated immediately, but also hospital management can save on labor costs associated with measuring body temperature and blood sugar levels. It also has the effect of increasing the efficiency of facility management. Furthermore, by combining the position detection of the composite module 1295 with the method described in Section 4.4 using FIGS. 31 to 34, it is possible to detect wandering of a dementia patient within a hospital or facility.

Furthermore, as part of the self-attribute data 1793 in the composite module 1295, the "name of the person who took the medicine" may also be recorded together with the "name of the medicine" (see the relevant section in Section 1.6). Cameras installed at hospitals and facilities are constantly monitored to monitor when inpatients and residents take their designated medications. Then, when the inpatient or resident takes the specified medicine, the system controller α_1126 records the above information in the composite module 1295. This makes it possible to constantly monitor the medication status of inpatients and residents, which helps prevent forgetting to take doses.

Next, we will explain an example of its use in managing the user's daily exercise status. In this case, an acceleration sensor may be used as the sensor module 1260 built into the capsule. By combining the output of the acceleration sensor built into the body with the position detection information of the composite module 1295 described above, the user's exercise status can be successively monitored in real time. If the daily exercise amount of the managed user does not reach the predetermined target value, the user is presented with a countermeasure proposal from the user I/F unit 1234 in the system controller α_1126 or the display unit in the system controller β_1128. will be presented to you.

Further, an example of an embodiment system will be described below in which the "detection of combinations that are not normally possible" described using FIG. 37G is used to determine whether or not drugs can be taken together. Generally, patients are often prescribed a combination of multiple drugs. In this case, it becomes possible to automatically determine whether or not to take different drugs together. For example, a composite module 1295 (unit 1290) is mixed into each medicine tablet. As described above, the composite module 1295 (unit 1290) is enclosed in a capsule made of a material that is harmless to the human body. If the entire capsule is taken out of the body at the same time as the patient excretes in the toilet, the composite module 1295 (unit 1290) will not affect the human body. The capsule incorporating the composite module 1295 (unit 1290) mixed into the drug tablet in this way also stops emitting radio waves when it leaves the body in the same manner as described above.

However, the composite module 1295 (unit 1290) includes a communication module 1660, as shown in FIG. 4A. Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, self-attribute data 1793 is recorded in advance in this communication module 1660. In the system example of this embodiment, drug identification data is stored in this self-attribute data 1793.

As shown in FIG. 2, the memory unit 1232 of the drug testing system controller α_1126, which is dedicated to testing multiple prescribed drugs, contains a data table of drugs that can be combined in advance and drugs that may cause health problems. A data table showing the combinations is recorded. The moment the patient or the pharmacist who dispensed the medicine passes in front of the aforementioned drug testing system controller α_1126 with a plurality of prescribed medicines, it is possible to quickly and easily determine whether or not the medicines can be combined.

In the system of this embodiment, as explained in Section 4.4, the locations of all units 1290 or composite modules 1295 can be detected in real time. Therefore, when the composite module 1295 (unit 1290) mixed with the drug passes a predetermined location, the drug testing system controller α_1126 appropriately detects the situation. Then, by requesting a response from the self-attribute data 1793 (drug identification data) from the drug testing system controller α_1126 to the composite module 1295 (unit 1290) mixed in the drug, the drug testing system controller α_1126 determines the prescription. The contents of multiple drugs can be monitored accordingly. By referring the drug information collected by the drug testing system controller α_1126 to the data table described above, combinations of drugs that are incompatible with each other can be easily extracted. If an inappropriate combination of drugs is found, an appropriate warning is issued to the user or pharmacist via display or voice.

Conventionally, data tables showing combinations of medicines that pose health problems have been managed for each dispensing pharmacy or each medical office in a hospital. Furthermore, in Japan, each patient has their own ``medication notebook,'' which is a system that allows patients to see the history of medications they have taken in the past. Therefore, by using the medicine notebook, pharmacists can easily identify inappropriate combinations of medicines. Therefore, by referring to the data table and the medicine notebook, it is possible to easily confirm incompatible combinations of medicines. However, when dispensing pharmacies and hospital medical offices become extremely crowded and there are many patients waiting for medicine, pharmacists do not have time to refer to data tables each time. In this case, there are many opportunities for relying on the pharmacist's memory to determine inappropriate drug combinations. As a result, there is a risk that pharmacists may misremember and unintentionally prescribe an inappropriate combination of drugs.

When the application example of the system of this embodiment described above is used, it becomes unnecessary for the pharmacist to manually refer to the data table. As a result, not only the dispensing efficiency of the dispensing pharmacy is greatly improved, but also the effect of automatically checking drug combinations at extremely high speed and with high precision. Furthermore, in pharmacies and hospital medical offices, dispensing is done manually (pharmacists), so there is an inevitable risk of dispensing errors. On the other hand, by using the system application example of this embodiment, it becomes possible to detect dispensing errors with high accuracy. As a result, the patient's level of confidence in taking medication will also be significantly improved.

Note that in Section 5.3.2 of this book, a method of incorporating the composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) into a capsule has been described as a method for introducing the composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) into the body. However, the method is not limited to this, and any means may be used. For example, instead of being placed in a capsule, the composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) made up of one chip (or a hybrid chip) may be laminated (or coated) with a material that is harmless to the human body.

Section 5.3.3 Example of applying the section division method to the healthcare field As an example of applying the section division method to the healthcare field, as in Section 5.2.3, section 1142 is divided into each floor of a ward or each room. It may be divided, or the sections 1142 may be divided by medical department in the ward. In the system of this embodiment, various sensor information obtained from this may be integrated/managed for each section 1142. As a result, it is possible to grasp the situation for each hierarchical section, such as the frequency of nurse calls and the frequency of patients whose symptoms suddenly worsen. By reflecting the results in the staffing plan for nurses and other personnel, the quality of patient care services within the hospital can be improved.

On the other hand, as an example of application to the healthcare field, it may be divided into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m for each part within the human body. Here, sense information about the human body includes a wide variety of sense information, such as local body temperature, local sweat rate, local skeletal muscle tension rate, local intravascular oxygen concentration changes, and local pulse status. can get. By integrating/managing these various sense information for each section 1142, abnormal locations can be easily identified in real time, which has the effect of making it easier to extract locations where symptoms are rapidly worsening and to understand the patient's medical condition.

Although several embodiments of the invention have been described, these embodiments are presented by way of example and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention. These novel embodiments can be implemented in various other forms, and various omissions, substitutions, and changes can be made without departing from the gist of the invention. These embodiments and their modifications are included within the scope and gist of the invention, as well as within the scope of the invention described in the claims and its equivalents.

Chapter 6 Smart Home Appliance Automatic Control Method Section 6.1 Relationship between smart home appliances compatible with automatic control and smart home appliance related devices Figure 38 shows an example of the smart home appliance automatic control system in the system of this embodiment. A home gateway 10 (corresponding to system α_1132 in FIG. 2) exists within the home network system 1 (corresponding to system α_1132 in FIG. 2), and is connected to various devices via the same system network line 1782. . Further, this home gateway 10 is connected to the server n_1116-n via a broadband router 12 (corresponding to the battery built-in router (gateway) 1300 in FIG. 9).

Here, the server n_1116-n and the broadband router 12 are connected by an external network line 1788. Specific communication media for this outside-system network line 1788 include optical cables, wired cables, cellular communications (long-distance compatible wireless systems) such as 2G/3G/4G, and medium-range wireless systems such as Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity). You may use any of the following. On the other hand, a short-range wireless system such as Bluetooth or ZigBee may be used as a specific communication medium for the same system network line 1782. A medium-range wireless system such as Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) may be used for the inter-router line 780 between the home gateway 10 and the broadband router 12.

Therefore, the communication module 1202-3, which is responsible for the communication function within the home gateway 10 (corresponding to the system α_1132 in FIG. Communication protocol conversion is performed within the home gateway 10 (ie, within the communication module 1202-3).

In the example of FIG. 38, as a form of information communication using the network line 1782 within the same system, devices such as the robot cleaner 16, the LED lighting 58, and the camera unit 56 in the refrigerator (corresponding to the various devices 1 to 5_1250-1 to 5 in FIG. 2) ) are connected directly and connected via home automation (HA) adapters 1 to 4_14-1 to 4. By the way, although detailed description is omitted in FIG. 38, a communication module 202 connected to the network line 1782 in the same system is built in the LED lighting 58 and the camera unit 56 in the refrigerator as well as in the robot cleaner 16. .

Here, the above-mentioned LED lighting 58 refers to lighting equipment using LEDs, and is used for lighting an entire room or for lighting a local area such as a light stand or a flashlight (with a built-in communication function). Further, a portion of the LED lighting 58 that performs a communication function corresponds to the communication module 1666 with a built-in antenna in FIG. 4C(a), and a portion that performs a lighting function corresponds to the drive module 1670. In the embodiment system shown in FIG. 38, a camera unit 56 is built into the refrigerator, and items stored in the refrigerator can be automatically managed within the home gateway 10.

As already explained using FIG. 6D in Section 1.5, all you have to do is replace the conventional remote control for the air conditioner 42 or television 44 that does not have a communication function with a composite module 1295 (drive/communication module 1470) that has a communication function. This allows the conventional air conditioner 42 and television 44 to be managed/controlled within the home network system 1 (corresponding to system α_1132 in FIG. 2). Furthermore, in addition to this, Section 1.9 describes how to install a composite module 1295 in an existing device 1250 to expand the functionality of the existing device 1250. The composite module 1295 installed as a function expansion or communication function addition to the existing device 1250 corresponds to the home automation (HA) adapters 1 to 4_14-1 to 4 in FIG. 38. In addition, in FIG. 3A(c), the combination module 1295 and the device 1250 are combined to form one unit 1290, and the combination of the air conditioner 42 and home automation (HA) adapter 1_14-1 or the TV 44 is combined. A set of home automation (HA) adapter 2_14-2, a set of laundry 46 and home automation (HA) adapter 3_14-3, and a set of outlet or table tap 48 and home automation (HA) adapter 4_14-4 are all combined into one each. unit 1290 is formed.

In the description from FIG. 38 onward, the robot cleaner 16 is used as an example of a smart home appliance compatible with automatic control, and the air conditioner 42 and the television 44 are used as examples of smart home appliance-related equipment. However, this is not limited to this, and any device in the home that can be connected to a network and that automatically switches its operating state based on the estimation/judgment result of the user's actions and state may be made compatible with automatic control compatible smart home appliances. . Additionally, in this case, other network-connected devices in the home can be made compatible with smart home appliance-related devices.

As shown in FIG. 38, a device controller 240 is built into the robot cleaner 16, which is an example of a smart home appliance compatible with automatic control. This device controller 240 then performs control corresponding to the operation mode of the automatic control compatible smart home appliance. As a specific function, the robot cleaner 16 can be automatically set to a non-operating state or a silent mode state, as will be described later. Further, the device controller 240 may also be referred to as a smart home appliance automatic control device here. That is, the smart home appliance automatic control device (device controller 240) that automatically sets the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) to a non-operating state or silent mode state is configured to automatically set the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) to a non-operating state or a manner mode state. ) is contained within. Further, as shown in FIG. 38, a memory section 242 is built into the robot cleaner 16, and information necessary for estimating/judging the user's actions and conditions (Step 75 in FIG. 39) is recorded in advance in this memory section 242. ing.

The cleaning function section in the robot cleaner 16 corresponds to the drive module 270 shown in FIG. Further, a location that implements the obstacle detection function and the automatic cleaning location determination function using the built-in camera in the robot cleaner 16 corresponds to the sensor module 260 in FIG. 38.

On the other hand, the home gateway 10 (corresponding to the system α_1132 in FIG. 2) also has a built-in processor 1230, which can also perform control corresponding to the operation mode of the automatic control compatible smart home appliance. Similarly to the device controller 240 described above, the processor 1230 can automatically set the robot cleaner 16 to a non-operating state or a silent mode state. Therefore, this processor 1230 can also be regarded as a type of smart home appliance automatic control device described above. Therefore, when the processor 1230 in the home gateway 10 controls the robot cleaner 16, the smart home appliance automatic control device (processor 1230) is placed outside the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16). There is. Similarly, a memory section 1232 is built into the home gateway 10, and information necessary for estimating/judging the user's behavior and state (Step 75 in FIG. 39) is recorded in advance in the memory section 1232.

When the home gateway 10 specifically takes the form of a personal computer, a display and a keyboard correspond to the user I/F section 1234. On the other hand, when the home gateway 10 specifically takes the form of a tablet or a smart phone, a display screen on which input can be made corresponds to the user I/F section 1234.

Although not shown in FIG. 38, a large number of single composite modules 1295 are installed in the home network system 1 (system α_1132). Then, as a sensor/communication module 1460, which is a type of composite module 1295, a human sensor, a light sensor, and a wind sensor each having a communication function are installed individually (or in hybrid form), as will be described later with reference to FIG. It is possible to obtain human sensor information 602, light sensor information 606, and wind sensor information 608.

Section 6.2 Overview of the control method for smart home appliances that support automatic control The state or request can be estimated/judged, and based on the estimation/judgment result, the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (and the smart home appliance-related equipment, if necessary) can be controlled to an optimal operating state. This makes it possible to provide high-quality services to users. In addition, the first step is to automatically select various sensors and related devices from which to collect information based on the basic functions of smart home appliances that support automatic control and their installation location (however, the installation location may be constantly moving). do. Next, using determination information (determination table) (described later with reference to FIG. 43) stored in advance in the memory unit 242 or memory unit 1232 in FIG. 38, the user's behavior, state, or request is estimated/determined. . Then, based on the estimation/judgment result and the information obtained from the smart home appliance-related equipment, the operating state of the smart home appliance-related equipment may be changed and controlled in advance. In that case, after the automatic control compatible smart home appliances have finished operating, the changed operating state of the smart home appliances is restored to its original state.

The above concrete detailed method will be explained using FIG. 39. By the way, the device controller 240 (FIG. 38) in the robot cleaner 16 may execute the processing sequentially according to the steps in FIG. ) but that's fine. Furthermore, the task is not limited to this, and the task may be performed by a device controller (not shown) in another smart home appliance, or may be carried out by cooperative work (or division of roles) between the device controller 240 and the processor 1230.

Here, a method for controlling the robot cleaner 16 will be described as a specific example of a smart home appliance compatible with automatic control. However, the present embodiment system (smart home appliance automatic control system) is not limited to this, and the control shown in FIG. 39 may be performed on all smart home appliances connected to the network.

First, in Step 71, the user presets control conditions for the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) from the user I/F section 1234 in the home gateway 10. The screen that the user sees at this time is shown in FIG. Only when the user sets the "automatic cleaning setting" item to On, automatic control of the smart home appliance (robot cleaner) as shown in FIG. 39 is started. On the other hand, if the "automatic cleaning setting" item is set to Off, the user will manually operate the smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16). In the system of this embodiment, the user can estimate/judge the user's behavior and state and set detailed conditions for automatically controlling the operating state to the optimum state.

In this embodiment, the specific control conditions include: ○ Is cleaning while sleeping (manner mode) supported? ○ Whether or not to support cleaning while the user is working (manner mode)? ○ Will you be able to clean while you are out? Each can be set in detail by specifying On/Off. Here, the "manner mode" refers to an operating state in which the exhaust volume of the robot cleaner 16 is lowered to lower the wind force at the outlet, or the rotational speed of the intake motor is lowered to lower the volume during operation. Further, if the user sets "cleaning while going out (prohibited (not supported)"), cleaning while the user is out corresponds to a non-operating state. As described above, in this embodiment, as a control method corresponding to the operation mode of an automatic control compatible smart home appliance having a communication function, it is possible to automatically set the automatic control compatible smart home appliance to a non-operating state or a manner mode state. As a result, the automatic control compatible smart home appliances (robot cleaner 16, etc.) automatically switch to the optimal operating state according to the user's actions and conditions, so when the automatic control compatible smart home appliances (robot cleaner 16, etc.) operate This has the effect of providing a comfortable living environment to the user. However, the information required to estimate/judge the user's behavior and state differs depending on the above-mentioned control conditions.

When the user instructs the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) to start operating in Step 72 of FIG. The location will be confirmed. Here, as a method for checking the current location of the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner), this automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) may be provided with a GPS (Global Positioning System) function. Furthermore, the method is not limited to this, and the method described in Section 4.4 using FIGS. 31 to 34 may be used.

Then, as in Step 74, other smart home appliances related to the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) (network connection compatible devices other than the robot cleaner 16, such as the air conditioner 42 and television 44 in FIG. 38) and the necessary related sensors (combined modules such as the human sensor, light sensor, wind sensor, etc. mentioned above) are selected, and the necessary information is collected from the smart home appliances and information from the related sensors (compound modules). (The aforementioned human sensor information 602, optical sensor information 606, wind sensor information 608, etc.) is collected. Here, information described later using FIGS. 41 and 42 is communicated from the other smart home appliance-related devices and related sensors (composite modules) mentioned above.

However, collecting information from all the smart home appliances and sensors (composite modules) installed in the home in the processing stage of Step 74 takes time and effort. In contrast, in the system of this embodiment, only other smart home appliance-related devices and related sensors (composite module) are required to automatically set the current operating state of the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16). The system of this embodiment is characterized in that it automatically selects (selects) and collects information only from the selected devices and composite modules. Based on this, it is possible to shorten the time and improve the efficiency of collecting necessary information.

In the system of this embodiment, in particular, the automatic control collected in advance in Step 73 is used to select other smart home appliances and related sensors (composite modules) related to the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16). Information on the current location of the control-compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) may be used. That is, a general household is often divided into a plurality of sections 1142 (rooms), and it is more efficient to provide services for each section 1142 (room) as described in Chapter 4. Therefore, based on the information of the section 1142 (room) where the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) checked in Step 73 currently exists, other smart home appliances and sensors installed in that section 1142 (room) Only (composite module) is defined as smart home appliance-related equipment and related sensors (composite module). Necessary information is then collected only from the smart home appliances and related sensors (composite modules) mentioned above.

After collecting necessary information from other smart home appliance-related devices and related sensors using the above method, user behavior and user status are estimated/determined as shown in Step 75. At this time, the information (control table) shown in FIG. 43 that specifies the optimal operating state of the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) for each control condition selected by the user is used, and the explanation of FIG. 43 will be described later. Based on the estimation/judgment result regarding the user's behavior and state obtained in Step 75, the optimal operating state of the automatic control compatible smart home appliance and related equipment is automatically determined in Step 76. Note that instead of using the information in FIG. 43, an algorithm may be created in advance to automatically determine the optimal operating state from information obtained from smart home appliance-related devices and related sensors, as will be described later using FIG. 45.

By the way, the robot cleaner 16 has characteristics such as ``making noise during operation'' and ``blowing out exhaust air.'' Therefore, when the robot cleaner 16 operates when the television 44 is playing or the audio player is playing, the sound coming from the television 44 or the audio player is drowned out, causing a problem that the user feels uncomfortable. As a countermeasure, if the user sets the manner mode for cleaning while the user is working (while watching the TV 44 or audio player), a) the volume generated by the robot cleaner 16 will be reduced during cleaning while the user is watching. lower,
b) User discomfort can be alleviated by providing automatic services such as temporarily increasing the volume of the playback device being used. Similarly, while the air conditioner 42 is operating, a) lower the exhaust volume from the robot cleaner,
b) An automatic service that lowers the wind power of the air conditioner (prevents dust from flying up) can reduce user discomfort. The operation (b) above corresponds to the change control of the operating state of the smart home appliance-related equipment described in Step 78 of FIG. 39. Further, the operation (a) above corresponds to the operation control of the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) described in the first half of Step 79 under optimal operating conditions.

On the other hand, we will explain another form of service provision in the case where the user's preset mode is set to "permit cleaning while out." For example, if the user returns home very late, a situation may occur in which the automatically controlled smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) automatically operates (cleans) at night when it is dark outside. At this time, if the lights in the room where the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) is operating (cleaning) are off, the message "Despite the room lights being off, the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) A situation arises in which the operating sound of the cleaner 16) is heard. In this situation, there is a risk that neighbors or people in the next room may misunderstand that a thief is in the room. As a way to prevent such misunderstandings, while the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) is operating, the LED lighting 58 (FIG. 38) corresponding to the smart home appliance-related device may be turned on automatically. .

As another embodiment, a case will be described in which "cleaning allowed while sleeping (manner mode)" is set as the user's preset mode. When a user goes to bed at night, the LED lighting 58 in the room is often turned off. Therefore, if the LED lighting 58 is off during the night, it may be automatically determined that the user is sleeping, and the operating state of the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) may be automatically set to the silent mode state. .

However, if "prohibition of cleaning while sleeping" is set as the user's preset mode, if the LED lighting 58 is off during the night, it will automatically be determined that the user is sleeping, and the smart home appliances that support automatic control ( The operating state of the robot cleaner 16) is set to a non-operating state.

As described above, in the system of this embodiment, the automatic control compatible smart home appliance corresponds to a robot cleaner, the smart home appliance related device corresponds to an air conditioner, a television, or a lighting device,
When the smart home appliance-related device is in operation, the automatic control compatible smart home appliance is automatically set to a non-operating state or a silent mode state. In this way, the operating state of the automatically controlled smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) changes depending on the operating state of the smart home appliance-related equipment (air conditioner, television, or lighting equipment), so this operating state is always the same as the user's behavior or state. Optimal for This has the effect of providing the user with a comfortable living environment.

Here, in accordance with the order of Steps 78 and 79 in FIG. 39, after controlling the operating state of the smart home appliances (TV 44/audio player and air conditioner 42), the automatic control compatible smart home appliances (robot cleaner 16) are controlled. It is desirable to start the operation. The lag period between the time when the change in the operating state of the smart home appliance-related equipment is completed and the time when the automatic control compatible smart home appliance starts operating is very important. Because the human brain has an after-hearing effect (the lingering effect of a sound remaining in the brain), some people may experience temporary interference when switching at exactly the same time. However, after the sound generated from smart home appliances such as TVs and audio players enters the human ear, the time it takes for the audio signal to be transmitted to the brain and completed in the brain is 0.05 seconds. It is said that it takes about 1 second (0.2 to 3 seconds depending on the person). Therefore, in this embodiment, the time from completion of Step 78 to the start of the next Step 79 is set to 0.05 seconds or more, preferably 0.2 seconds or more. On the other hand, if there is too much time between the completion of Step 78 and the start of the next Step 79, there is a risk that the user will feel uncomfortable. In the audio/video world, there is a term called the "0.5 second rule." According to this rule, it is said that the general public will not feel any discomfort if the switching period of the sound source is within 0.5 seconds. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the time from the completion of Step 78 to the start of the next Step 79 is preferably set to 0.5 seconds or less. Furthermore, since some people can wait up to 2 seconds or 5 seconds, the time in this embodiment needs to be set to 5 seconds or less at worst. By setting the time lag between the completion time of the change in the operating status of smart home appliances and the start time of the automatic control compatible smart home appliances as described above, you can avoid temporary sound source crosstalk and the feeling of a lag in time. This has the effect of preventing the user from feeling uncomfortable and providing a comfortable living environment for the user.

On the other hand, smart home appliances (robot cleaners) that support automatic control may stop operating due to running out of battery or internal trouble. In this embodiment, the abnormality processing (the second half of Step 79) is performed using the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126) at home or a mobile terminal such as a tablet or smart phone on the go, where the user has preset the control conditions in Step 71. (This is also included as a type of home gateway 10 (system controller β_1128)) is notified of the abnormal state.

As mentioned above, since the robot cleaner 16 can move between different rooms (section 1142), the processes from Step 73 to Step 79 can be performed while grasping the current position of this automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16). Needs to be repeated. When the operation of the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) is completed, in Step 80, the operating status of the smart home appliance related equipment whose operating state was changed last time is returned to the original state, and then the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) is returned to its original state. ) to notify the user of the end of the operation (Step 81).

Here, the robot cleaner 16 was used as a specific example of an automatic control compatible smart home appliance that executes the process shown in FIG. 39. However, the present embodiment system is not limited thereto, and smart home appliances with other communication functions such as alarm clocks and flashlights may be applied as specific examples of smart home appliances compatible with automatic control. For example, when an alarm clock is used, the operation of the related equipment changed in STEP 78 may be "increase the volume of the television 44 or audio equipment" or "operate the air conditioner 42". In this case, in Step 80, instead of "returning the operating state of the related equipment (air conditioner 42 and television 44)" to "continue the operating state of the related equipment (air conditioner 42 and television 44)" or "returning the operating state of the related equipment (air conditioner 42 and television 44)" The operating state may be continued or changed again, such as by changing the set temperature of the air conditioner 42).

By the way, the automatic control compatible smart home appliances that require advanced operations for the robot cleaner 16 have an internal device controller 240 corresponding to a processor and a memory section 242, and this device controller 240 can perform the control shown in FIG. 39. . However, for smart home appliances that support automatic control (for example, alarm clocks) that have only a very single function, incorporating the device controller 240 and the memory section 242 becomes expensive. As a method to solve this problem, in the system of this embodiment, only a drive/communication module 1470 (see FIG. 4C(a)) is used, which is a combination of a drive module 1670 that generates only an alarm sound in an alarm clock and a communication module 1666. may be provided, and the processor 1230 in the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126) may perform control as shown in FIG. In this case, information (table) for estimating/judging the user's behavior and state as shown in FIG. Information (control table) specifying the optimal operating state of home appliance-related equipment (television 44/audio player and air conditioner 42) is stored in advance in the memory unit 1232 in the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126). By adopting this method, smart home appliances compatible with automatic control can be provided to users at a very low cost, and the system of this embodiment can be easily disseminated.

Section 6.3 Communication Information with Smart Home Appliance Related Devices An example of the communication information transmitted by the smart home appliance related devices in Step 74 of FIG. 39 will be explained using FIGS. 41 and 42. The data structures shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 show detailed information contents based on the E-format already explained using FIG. 15A. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and information may be collected from smart home appliance-related devices in accordance with the A-format described in FIG. 15B or the G-format having a data structure similar to this.

Here, as an example of smart home appliance-related equipment, an example of communication information from a television 44 and an air conditioner 42 placed in the same room will be described. That is, as examples of communication information from the air conditioner 42 shown in FIG. 41, the air conditioner operation information 422, sleeping mode setting information 424, and start/end timer reservation information 426/428 will be explained. On the other hand, the example of communication information from the television 44 shown in FIG. 42 includes screen display/audio output information 442, volume setting value 444, recording availability information 446, and program information 448 being played/displayed.

The program information 448 being played/displayed here means a number that is automatically incremented and added to the programs that the user views (plays/displays on the television) during one day. This number is incremented by 1 every time the user changes the television channel and is added to the individual exchange information EDT in the program information 448 being played/displayed in FIG. 42(e). Additionally, program switching timing on the broadcasting side can be automatically identified from program information obtained via the Internet. Each time the program changes, this number is automatically incremented by 1 and rewritten in the same location. In this way, the timing at which a predetermined program ends can be determined. In this embodiment, by providing the program information 448 being played/displayed as communication information from the television 44, the timing at which a predetermined program ends (including channel switching by the user during program broadcasting) can be automatically determined. can. As a scene showing this effect, consider a case where the user sets "cleaning prohibited only during a specific program display period" (cleaning is resumed immediately after a specific program display is completed) at Step 71 in FIG. 39. Then, the moment when the value of the program information 448 being played/displayed changes can be automatically recognized as the timing at which the display of the program ends. As a result, the user can be provided with a service that resumes cleaning immediately after the display of a specific program is completed.

However, in Step 74 of FIG. 39, in order to obtain the necessary communication information from smart home appliances (TV 44, air conditioner 42) or composite module 1295 (with built-in human sensor, light sensor, or wind sensor), multiple Detailed information communication steps are required. Specifically, first, 1) an information communication request for smart home appliances and composite module 1295;
2) Communication of response information from the smart home appliance-related equipment and the composite module 1295 is performed as a response to the request.

First, an information communication request is issued (communication) to the air conditioner 42 and the television 44, which are smart home appliance-related devices. In this case, unlike FIGS. 41(c) and 42(c), 62h (h means hexadecimal indicating hexadecimal notation, and 62h indicates "read request" as the setting value of the communication access control information ESV) Information in which the robot cleaner 16 or the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126) is set is transmitted to the air conditioner 42 or the television 44.

Then, the information returned from the air conditioner 42 to the issuing (communication) side of the request is shown in FIG. 41, and the information answered from the television 44 is shown in FIG. In this case, since it is a "read request response" to the above-mentioned "read request", the setting value of the communication access control information ESV is 72h (01110010 in binary notation).

As shown in FIG. 41(d), the information indicating the operating state of the air conditioner 42 that is answered first is "air conditioner operating information 422", so as shown in FIG. 41(f), the type identification information EPC of the exchange information is 80h. is set. When the air conditioner 42 is in operation, 30h is written in the individual exchange information EDT, and when the air conditioner 42 is not in operation, 31h is written and answered.

Since the next information to be answered is the sleep mode setting information 424, 8Fh is set in the exchange information type identification information EPC. When the air conditioner 42 is in the sleeping mode, 41h is written in the individual exchange information EDT, and when the air conditioner 42 is in the non-sleeping mode, 42h is written and answered.

As shown in FIG. 41(d), the information answered after that is start/end timer reservation information 426/428, so 90h and 94h are respectively set in the type identification information EPC of the corresponding exchange information. If the start or end timer of the air conditioner 42 has been reserved, 41h is written in the corresponding individual exchange information EDT. On the other hand, when there is no reservation, 42h is set and answered.

Here, only the air conditioner operation information 422 indicating the basic function has a different ON/OFF setting value in the individual exchange information EDT, and for information indicating other states, the ON/OFF setting value in the individual exchange information EDT is different. are all common. By making all the ON/OFF setting values in the individual exchange information EDT common, there is an effect that the information reading speed on the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) side can be increased.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 42(d) to (f), "screen display/audio output information 442" (corresponding exchange information type identification The value of the information EPC is 80h), the "volume setting value 444" (the value of the type identification information EPC of the corresponding exchange information is B8h), and the "recording availability information (the value of the type identification information EPC of the corresponding exchange information is C1h)" ” and “program information being played/displayed” (the value of the type identification information EPC of the corresponding exchange information is BCh) are transmitted in this order. Here, the value described in the column of individual exchange information EDT in the volume setting value 444 is set as a relative value when the maximum volume is 100%/zero audio output is 0%, and the value when the maximum volume is 100%. is set to 64h/the value when there is no output sound is set to 00h. The ON/OFF setting values in the individual exchange information EDT regarding the screen display/audio output information 442 (indicating whether the television 44 is operating or turned off) indicating the basic functions are 30h/31h, which is the same as in FIG. We are doing so.

In this way, the ON/OFF setting values for basic functions are matched regardless of the type of smart home appliance-related equipment, thereby increasing the information reading speed on the side of the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16). Similarly, the ON/OFF setting values in the individual exchange information EDT (related to recording availability information) are set to 41h/42h regardless of the type of smart home appliances, and the smart home appliances that support automatic control ( The information reading speed on the robot cleaner side has been increased.

Section 6.4 Method for Estimating/Judging User Behavior and Status FIG. 43 shows an example of the relationship between the information necessary to estimate/judgment the user behavior and status described above and the control conditions. Each control condition is divided in the column direction (vertical direction) in FIG. 43, and the operating state information of the smart home appliance-related equipment and the composite module (sensor) is described in each row on the left side.

In addition, the extent to which each control condition and the state information are related to each other is described in the cell where each control condition intersects with the state information. Therefore, the blank spaces (cells with no description) extending from the center to the right in FIG. 43 indicate that the operating state corresponding to the material for estimation/judgment related to the control conditions is not used. As a specific example, information related to "human sensor information 602" and "timer reservation information 426/428 for starting or ending the air conditioner" is used to determine the control conditions for "cleaning while the user is working (manner mode)" do not.

What is important here is that the information required to estimate/judge the user's behavior and state differs depending on the control conditions selected by the user, and the information collected from smart home appliances and related composite modules (sensors) differs. It's where things change. In addition, depending on the basic functions of smart home appliances that support automatic control (e.g. cleaning, freezing storage, air conditioning, information gathering or entertainment?), the targets of smart home appliances and composite modules (sensors) that collect information also change. do.

In particular, when the robot cleaner 16 is targeted as a smart home appliance compatible with automatic control, care must be taken that the location of the robot cleaner 16 changes automatically. In other words, the robot cleaner 16 is movable across different rooms in a home or office (sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m in FIG. 1). The location of the robot cleaner 16, which changes from moment to moment, is important for estimating/judging the user's behavior/state. Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, when the robot cleaner 16 moves from an unoccupied room to a room where the user is working (when moving the section 1142), the robot cleaner 16 automatically detects this and moves the robot cleaner 16 to another smart device installed in the next room. It is necessary to re-collect information from home appliances and related composite modules (sensors). Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, a composite module (sensor) related to other related smart home appliances is activated depending on the type of automatic control compatible smart home appliance (its basic functions and location) or control conditions selected by the user. Automatically reselect as appropriate.

Until now, there has been a method for obtaining information from smart home appliances such as the air conditioner 42 and television 44 that is used to estimate/judge the status of sleeping/working/absent (vacant room status), which are control conditions set by the user. I explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 43, human sensor information 602, optical sensor information 606, and wind sensor information 608 may be used. For example, if a light sensor (a composite module incorporating a light sensor) detects light in a room at night, there is a possibility that the user is working. Conversely, if the optical sensor information 606 indicates that the room is dark, there is a high possibility that the person is absent (vacant room) or sleeping. Furthermore, since the human sensor information 602 detects the movement of the user, there is a high possibility that the output from the human sensor is small when the user is absent (in an empty room) or asleep.

When estimating/judging the user's behavior and status using the information (table) in Figure 43 (Step 75 in Figure 39), the correspondence between control conditions and the operating status of smart home appliances/complex modules (sensors) is Converted to a number. For example, a relatively large positive value is assigned to “applicable” written in the cell (corresponding column) in Figure 43, a relatively small positive value is assigned to “possible”, and a relatively large negative value is assigned to “not applicable”. Preassign values. Then, among the information sent from the air conditioner 42, the television 44, or the human sensor, light sensor, and wind sensor (combined module with built-in sensors), individual The exchange information EDT is converted and set to the numerical value assigned in advance above.

Next, in FIG. 40, the addition value of the above-mentioned assigned value is calculated for the column corresponding to the control condition selected by the user is On. Then, in Step 75 of FIG. 39, it is determined whether the added value is within a predetermined range, and the user's behavior and state are automatically estimated/judged. By the way, the table information in FIG. 43 is stored in advance in the memory section 242 or the memory section 1232 in FIG. Make estimates/judgments using

In the above description, a method of collectively estimating/judging each control condition selected by the user using the table information in FIG. 43 has been described. However, it is not limited to this; for example, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, the corresponding control conditions (the operating state of the automatic control compatible smart home appliances to be set) can be determined from the information collected from smart home appliances and composite modules (sensors). An algorithm (determination rule) may be set in advance.

As another example of application, as explained in Section 4.3, the estimation/judgment collation table shown in FIG. You may do so.

Section 6.5 Other Embodiments Regarding Automatic Control Between Smart Home Appliances With regard to the series of processing steps in this smart home appliance automatic control system, FIG. It has been written in a form that can also be applied to smart home appliances that support automatic control. On the other hand, with regard to detailed operations when the automatic control compatible smart home appliances are limited to robot cleaners, another embodiment will be described using FIG. 44.

The "automatic cleaning setting ON" process shown in Step 1 of FIG. 44 corresponds to Step 71 of FIG. 39. Settings for the robot cleaner 16 and smart home appliances (such as the air conditioner 42 and television 44) can be made from a remote location using the home gateway 10 (personal computer, tablet/smartphone). In this way, the user can set the operating state of the robot cleaner 16 while the user is sleeping or working (for example, should it be in the non-operating state as shown in FIG. 40? Should it be allowed to clean and photograph in silent mode?, etc.).

The steps after the determination step of "Is the lighting on?" in Step 2 correspond to the processing after Step 74 in FIG. 39. In FIG. 44, the process of Step 73 in FIG. 39 is intentionally omitted for ease of reading. Similarly, in order to make it easier to understand the processing within the automatic control compatible smart home appliance, FIG. 44 will be described using a processing method that does not use the table information of FIG. 43. In this way, if the process is performed according to the flow shown in Figure 44 (preset processing procedure) without using the table information in Figure 43, the process can be simplified and the price of smart home appliances compatible with automatic control can be reduced. There are effects that can be achieved.

If the lighting with the network function is on in Step 2 of FIG. 44, it is assumed that there is a person in the room. In this case, the robot cleaner 16 is either not operated (set to a non-operating state) or the robot cleaner 16 is cleaned and photographed in silent mode. On the other hand, if the lighting is off, it is assumed that the person is absent (vacant room) or sleeping, and the process moves to Step 11 to determine which condition the person is in.

In the next step 11 in FIG. 44, it is determined whether the timer of the air conditioner 42 is valid. Here, as information regarding the operating state of the air conditioner 42, communication information having the data structure shown in FIG. Send. If the air conditioner timer is disabled (the timer is not set) as a result of the determination in Step 11, it is assumed that there is no one in the room (vacant room state) and cleaning is started (Step 13). Conversely, if the determination result in Step 11 is that the air conditioner timer is enabled (the start timer reservation information 426 in FIG. 43 is ON or the end timer reservation information 428 is ON), it is assumed that the user is sleeping, and the timer is set. The robot cleaner 16 is not operated in that room for several hours (Step 12). Further, as another processing method in Step 12, instead of not cleaning (setting to a non-operating state), cleaning may be performed in a manner mode state. Here, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the robot cleaner 16 is in the silent mode operation state or the normal operation state, while the robot cleaner 16 is operating, the imaging device (camera) built into the robot cleaner 16 simultaneously photographs the surrounding situation, so that the user can always monitor the cleaning situation. I am making it possible to confirm. Further, the video shot at this time is displayed in real time on the user I/F unit 1234 (FIG. 38) in the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126).

On the other hand, if it is determined in Step 2 that "the lighting in the room is on", it is automatically estimated/determined that there is a person in the room. Next, in Step 3, it is determined whether or not there is any sound-emitting device (device related to smart home appliances such as the television 44) that is in operation. If even one device that produces sound (such as the television 44) is operating, it is assumed that the user is in the room and the robot cleaner 16 does not operate (sets it to a non-operating state) or cleans in silent mode.・Have them take pictures. Steps 4 and 5 in FIG. 44 correspond to steps 76 to 79 in FIG. 39. Further, Step 10 in FIG. 44 corresponds to Step 80 in FIG. 39. In other words, as shown in Steps 4 and 5 in FIG. 44, when a smart home appliance-related device that produces sound, such as the television 44, is in operation, the automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) is caused to clean and take pictures in silent mode; Increase the volume of the related smart home appliance related device (TV 44). After cleaning and photographing the room, the volume of the smart home appliance (TV 44) is returned to its original level (Step 10).

In the system of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, the robot cleaner 16 and the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126) can be connected to the Internet (outside system network line 1788) via the broadband router 12. There is. Therefore, TV program information can be obtained from the Internet. Therefore, both the robot cleaner 16 and the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126) can independently acquire program information that is being operated/displayed on the television 44. Then, according to the user's advance settings, the operation/non-operation of the robot cleaner 16 is automatically switched in accordance with the designated program. Here, the automatic operation/non-operation switching process of the robot cleaner 16 and the control (volume change, etc.) of related smart home appliances such as the television 44 may be performed by the robot cleaner 16 alone, or by the home gateway. 10 (system controller α_1126) may perform integrated control.

However, if the user presets ``not to have cleaning when a specific program is broadcast'', during the period when this specific program is being displayed (during the period when this program is being broadcast, or when the user changes the displayed channel). The robot cleaner 16 is held in a non-operating state during the period (until switching). After this program display ends, cleaning starts again.

Although not shown in FIG. 44, in the system of this embodiment, it is also possible to determine whether the air conditioner 42 is set to the sleeping mode based on the individual exchange information EDT in the sleeping mode setting information 424 shown in FIG. 41(f). . Not only that, it can be seen that other smart home appliances related to the robot cleaner 16 are set to sleep mode using a similar method. If the estimated/determined result is that the user is sleeping, the robot cleaner 16 may be caused to clean in a non-operating state or in a silent mode.
Furthermore, as shown in Steps 6 to 8 in FIG. 44, in the system of this embodiment, abnormality processing (corresponding to Step 79 in FIG. 39) during the operation of the robot cleaner 16 is possible. In other words, if the robot cleaner 16 stops for some reason (Step 6), "abnormal stop of the robot cleaner 16" is notified to the smart home appliance related equipment (display screen and audio) located closest to the stop position of the robot cleaner 16. do. Specifically, when the robot cleaner 16 stops in Step 6, the location information of smart home appliance-related equipment related to the robot cleaner 16 itself (located in the room (section 1142) where the stopped robot cleaner 16 currently exists) Collect. As a means of collecting this placement position information, the GPS function possessed (built-in) within the robot cleaner 16 body and each smart home appliance-related device may be used, or the 4. The method described in Section 4 may also be used. After identifying the smart home appliance related device that is closest to the stop position of the robot cleaner 16 (Step 7), in Step 8, the status of "Abnormal stop of the robot cleaner 16" is displayed on the display screen of the corresponding smart home appliance related device. and notify the user. By the way, the method of notifying the user of "abnormal stop of the robot cleaner 16" is not limited to the above-mentioned screen display, but may also be audible notification by voice output. Furthermore, the device that notifies the user is not limited to the smart home appliance related device that is located closest to the stop position of the robot cleaner 16, but can also be used, for example, by the robot cleaner 16 itself or the user I/F section 1234 of the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126). good. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited thereto, and any smart home appliance may be responsible for notifying the user.

In Section 6.4, a method using the table information in FIG. 43 was described as a method for estimating/judging the user's behavior and state in Step 75 in FIG. 39. Another application embodiment of the method is shown in FIG. 45. That is, if the user has not set automatic cleaning in Step 21, the process of estimating/judging the user's behavior and state is stopped in Step 22.

Conversely, if the user sets automatic cleaning in Step 21, first, in Step 23, it is determined whether or not the display operation of the television 44 is being executed. When the television 44 is performing a display operation, a user (person) is often present in the room where the television 44 is installed. When the display operation of the television 44 is in progress, the presence or absence of operating current in the outlet is checked in step 27. In addition, the detection target is not limited to the operating current in a wall outlet, but may also measure the current value flowing in an extension cord or power strip (in this case, the sensor module that measures the current value flowing in the extension cord or power strip) and its Extension cords and power strips have a composite module structure consisting of a communication module that communicates measurement results). If a current exceeding the specified level is flowing through the wall outlet or extension cord/table tap in the room where the robot cleaner 16 is located (section 1142), some equipment may be It means operation. Therefore, in that case, it is automatically estimated/determined that "the user is working". If the user sets "cleaning while working (manner mode)" in Step 71 of FIG. 39 using the display screen shown in the example of FIG. Perform cleaning. Conversely, if "cleaning while working (manner mode)" is not set in Step 31, it is set to a non-operating state (Step 41).

On the other hand, if the wall outlet or extension cord/table tap in the room where the robot cleaner 16 is located (section 1142) does not have a current exceeding the specified level (Step 27), there is a high possibility that the user is sleeping. . If the user sets "cleaning while sleeping (manner mode)" in Step 71 of FIG. 39 using the display screen shown in the example of FIG. Perform cleaning. Conversely, if "cleaning while sleeping (manner mode)" is not set in Step 32, the device is set to a non-operating state (Step 41).

If the television 44 is not in operation (Step 23), then in Step 24 it is determined whether the LED lighting 58 (FIG. 38) is on. If the LED lighting 58 in the room (section 1142) is on during the night, it is predicted that a user (person) is present in the room (section 1142). Then, in Step 27, the current value flowing through the wall outlet (or extension cord/table tap) is checked, and the process proceeds to the same process as above.

If the LED lighting 58 (FIG. 38) is not lit in Step 24, the wind sensor information 608 obtained from the wind sensor (combined module 1295 in which it is built) is checked in Step 25. If the wind is blowing in the room (section 1142), it is because the air conditioner 42 is operating or the user has opened the window to let in the wind from outside. Often located in

If it is found that wind is blowing in the room (section 1142), it is checked in step 26 whether or not the air conditioner 42 is operating. When the air conditioner 42 is in operation, it is assumed that a user (person) is present in the room (section 1142) in the same way as above. Then, in Step 27, the current value flowing through the wall outlet (or extension cord/table tap) is checked, and the process proceeds to the same process as above.

Further, if the air conditioner 42 is not operating as a result of Step 26, the optical sensor information 606 is collected from the optical sensor (a composite module incorporating the optical sensor) according to Step 28. If the inside of the room (section 1142) is dark, there is a high possibility that it is night, so the process proceeds to Step 32, which determines whether cleaning is possible at bedtime. On the other hand, if the inside of the room (section 1142) is bright, there is a possibility that it is daytime, so the process proceeds to Step 29, which determines whether a human sensation is detected.

On the other hand, if there is no wind in the room (section 1142) in Step 25, in Step 29, the room (section 1142) is It is determined whether there is a user (person) inside (Step 29).

Here, when the robot cleaner 16 determines that there is a user (person) in the room (section 1142) based on the human sensor information 602, the robot cleaner 16 can either set the non-operating state or set the cleaning operation in the silent mode. ” will be automatically determined. Therefore, check whether it is possible to clean during bedtime in Step 32.

On the other hand, if no human presence is detected in Step 29, it is determined that there is no user (person) in the room (section 1142), and it is checked in Step 33 whether or not cleaning is possible while out.

Note that in the robot cleaner 16 of this embodiment, if wind is detected in the wind force detection in Step 25 or if air conditioner operation is detected in Step 26, dust may fly up when the robot cleaner 16 performs the cleaning operation. , it may become inactive or the cleaning route within the room may be changed. Examples of changed cleaning routes include a route that skips cleaning the room where wind was detected and cleans other rooms, and a route that focuses on areas on the leeward side of the room where wind was detected than the normal cleaning route. One possible route is to clean the area. That is, in this case, in wind force detection, not only the presence or absence of wind but also the wind direction may be detected.

1 Home network system (system α)
10 Home gateway (system controller α)
12 Broadband router 14-1~4 HA (home automation) adapter 1~4
(compound module)
16 Robot cleaner 40 Single composite module 42 Air conditioner 44 Television 46 Laundry 48 Outlet or table tap 56 Refrigerator camera unit 58 LED lighting 202 Communication module 240 Device controller 242 Memory unit 260 Sensor module 270 Drive module 780 Router line 422 Air conditioner operation information 424 Bedtime mode setting information 426 Start timer setting information 428 End timer setting information 442 Screen display/audio output information 444 Volume setting value 446 Recording availability information 448 Program information being played/displayed (playback/display program number information within the same day)
488 Operating current value flowing through the outlet 602 Human sensor information 606 Light sensor information 608 Wind sensor information 1102 Wholesaler A
1104-1~-2 Wholesaler B1~B2
1112-1~-3 Service provider A~C
1114 Information sharing or resource coordination 1116-1~-n Servers 1~n
1118-1~-n Database 1122-1~-3 Domain 1~3
1124 Smart meter
1126 System controller α
1128 System controller β
1132 System α
1134 System β
1142-1~-m Section 1~m
1152 Predetermined product generation section 1154 Predetermined product storage section 1202-1 to 10 Communication module 1206 Release amount monitor section 1208 Inflow amount monitor section 1212 Release amount control section 1214 Inflow amount control section 1216 Release amount monitor section 1218 Inflow amount monitor section 1220 (car ) battery 1222 sensor module 1226 display module 1230 processor 1232, 1242, 1244, 1246 memory section 1234 user I/F section 1240-1 to -3 device controller (processor)
1242 Memory section 1244 Memory section 1246 Memory section 1248 Memory section 1250-1 to -5 Device
1260-1 to -9 Sensor module 1270-1 to -4 Actuator module 1290-1 to -7 Unit 1295-1 to -7 Composite module 1300 Router (gateway) / Built-in battery 1330 Processor 1406, 1416 Emission amount monitor /Communication module 1408, 1418 Inflow rate monitor/Communication module 1412 Release rate control/Communication module 1414 Inflow rate control/Communication module 1440 Other function modules (functions other than communication)
1444 Remote collaboration 1450-1 to -4 Device
1460-1~-5 Sensor/Communication Module 1465 Processor/Communication Module 1470-1~-2 Actuator/Communication Module 1475 Memory/Communication Module 1478 Display/Communication Module 1480 Antenna 1490 Bus Line 1552 (Solar) Power Generation Module 1554 Energy storage module (battery)
1560 Near field communication module 1602 Input terminal 1604 Output terminal 1606 Voltage output terminal 1608 Infrared light emitting element 1610 Variable resistance section 1614 Continuity/disconnection switching section 1618 Predetermined voltage generation section 1620 Set resistance value storage section 1624 Set state storage section 1628 Set voltage storage section 1644 Format conversion unit 1648 Infrared light emission drive circuit 1660 Communication module 1660-1 Insulating substrate on which a communication module is formed 1666 Communication module with built-in antenna 1670 Actuator module 1680 Processor module 1690 Memory module 1700 Communication control unit 1710 Interface unit 1734 Processor 1736 Processor 1738 Processor 1740 Management information (table) related information recording area 1742, 1744, 1746, 1748 Management information (table)
1752 Communication module compatible within the same system 1758 Communication module compatible with outside the system 1764 Communication module 1766-1 to n Other functional modules 1768 Communication module 1770 Wireless 1772 Antenna section 1774 Antenna connection section 1776 Power supply section 1778 External module connection section 1780 Signal processing section 1782 Network line within the same system 1788 Network line outside the system 1790 Memory unit 1791 Application change software 1792 Application storage unit 1793 Self-attribute data 1794 Life management data 1795 Operating period management data 1796 Sensor module management data 1797 Drive module management data 1799 Security target data 1810 Exchange Information (table)
1830, (ESV) Communication access control information 1840, (EPC) Exchange information type identification information 1852 Command (command issue)
1854 Results report (status)
1872 Response request (request)
1874 Response
1894 Periodic/non-periodic reporting 1900 Zoning status of main roads or water and sewage pipes, distribution power lines, wired communication lines, etc. 1914 Physical layer frame generation section 1918 Physical layer frame analysis section 1924 Address information generation section 1928 Address information Extraction unit 1934 Content setting unit 1938 Content extraction unit 1940 Address information I/F (interface) unit 1950 Content information I/F (interface) unit 1960 Processor 2002 Communication module 2030 Processor 2032 Memory unit 2082 Network line within the same domain 2100 Radio wave source 2310 Elapsed time 2320 Status item 2330 Status probability 2340 User action item 2350 User action probability 2360 User request item 2370 User request probability 2600 Unit management pseudo drive 2610 List data folder 2612 Device corresponding folder 2614 Complex Module compatible folders 2616-1 to -m Section unit management folders 2622 Sensor/communication module compatible folders 2624 Drive/communication module compatible folders 2626 Processor/communication module compatible folders 2628 Memory/communication module compatible folders 2630 Other functions/communication module compatible folders Folder 2634 Folder compatible with binary data 2638 Folder compatible with multivalued data 2710 Antenna 2720 Amplifier and signal processing circuit 2730 Stealth board 2734 Metal plate layer with a fine uneven structure on the surface 2738 Weakly conductive organic material with a fine uneven structure on both the front and back sides Layer 2760 Polar antenna 2800 Incident radio wave 2920 Resistor 2940-1, -2 Voltage differentiator 2960 Adder 3010 Processor (hardware part)
3012 Bus line 3014 Recording medium (hardware part)
3015 Information and communication execution unit for connection within the system 3016 Information and communication execution unit 3017 Information and communication execution unit for connection outside the system 3018 Connection unit 3020 BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) control area 3022 Device driver area 3021 Communication control unit for connection within the system 3024 Recording medium control unit 3025 Communication driver area for internal system connection 3026 Communication driver area 3027 Communication driver area for external connection 3028 Communication control unit 3029 Communication control unit for external connection 3030 OS (Operating System) layer 3034 Management of units within the system/ control area
(Virtual device driver area)
3040 API (Application Programming Interface) command passage boundary line 3045 API (Application Programming Interface) command 3050 Application software 3120 JVM (Java Virtual Machine)
3140 Unit management/control related method group 3144 Instance method group in file class 3148 Main method 3150 System unit management/control class 3154 File class 3158 Application class 3160 Class group 3170, 3174 Incorporation (import)
3188 Program steps 3190, 3194 Reference 3501 Supermarket store area 3502 Supermarket cash register area 3503 Supermarket exit area 3505 Shoes 3506 Milk 3507 Bags 3511a, 3511b Cash register 3512 Monitoring device 3521 Refrigerator 3522 System controller 3523 Composite module (unit)
3525 Display unit 3531 Composite module (unit)
3532 System controller 3533 Smartphone 3540 Wall to be inspected 3541a, 3541b, 3541c Steel frame 3542, 3543 Composite module (unit)
3542a, 3543b Composite module (unit) antenna 3545 Inspection vehicle 3546 System controller 3548 Pipes such as gas pipes, water pipes, fire hydrant pipes, etc. 3549 Composite module (unit)
3550 Greenhouse house 3551 System controller 3552 Surveillance camera 3553a, 3553b, 3553c Bar-shaped monitoring device with built-in composite module (unit) 3554 Compound module (unit)
3560 Patient bed 3561 Medical equipment box 3560a, 3561a, 3565a Composite module (unit)
3562 System controller 3565 Weapon such as a knife 3567, 3568 Airport 3569 Airplane 3570 Passenger 3570a, 3573a Composite module (unit)
3571, 3572 System controller 3573 Carry bag 3581 System controller 3581a Internet connection section 3581b Protocol recognition section 3581c Communication standard recognition section 3581d Data processing section 3581e Data detection section 3581f Communication standard compatible format setting section 3581g Internet compatible data output section 3583 Composite module 3584a Access Point 3584b Base station 3585 Internet ADRSIEEE IEEE802.15.4 compliant chip-specific address
(8 bytes)
APL02, APL06 Communication middleware layer APLDT Communication middleware data CEDT Extended transmission data CM-1 First control/processing information CM-n Nth control/processing information CMI Control/Management Information
CMTID Composite module type identification information (6 bits)
(Complex Module Type Identifier)
CMST Composite module structure information (1 bit)
CRC Erroneous check CT2DT Binary transmission data section CTMDT Multi-level transmission data section DEXADRS IEEE extended address on receiving side
(Destination IEEE Extension Address)
DEOJ Receiving device identification information (3 bytes)
DIDC Device identification code within the same type (1 byte)
(Device Identification Code among the same Device Type)
DIPADRS Receiving side IP address (16 bytes)
(Destination Internet Protocol Address)
DPANID PAN-specific identification information on the receiving side
(Destination Personal Area Network Identifier)
DTC device type code (1 byte)
DTGC device type group code (1 byte)
(Device Type (Class) Group Code)
E-DT E-format data (exchange information 1810)
E-HD E-format header [1X81h]
EDT individual exchange information (PDC specified size)
EPC, (1840) Exchange information type identification information (1 byte)
ESV, (1830) Communication access control information (1 byte)
EXADRS IEEE Extension Address
EXDT Extended data EXEXADRS Extended IEEE extended address (1 byte)
(Expanded IEEE Extension Address)
EXL06 Extended application layer FC1 to FC5, FD1 to FD5 Composite module (unit)
HPLMT Remaining number of nodes that can be passed through (Hop Limit) (1 byte)
IPADRS IP address IPCLS Communication class information (1 byte)
IPLBL Communication type label information (2.5 bytes)
IPPKT IP packet related information (8 bytes)
IPv6 Internet Protocol Version 6 Layer IPv6DU IPv6 Data/Payload IPv6HD IPv6 Header IPVRS Version Information (4 bits)
LIPv6DU IPv6 data/payload length information (2 bytes)
(Length of Internet Protocol Version 6 Data/Payload)
LPSDU Physical layer data/payload length information (1 byte)
MAC02, MAC06 Media access layer MACHD MAC layer header MACNTL MAC layer frame control information (2 bytes)
MADRS Address information MASQNM MAC layer sequence number (1 byte)
MPDU MAC layer frame MSDU MAC layer data/payload
(Medium Access Layer Data/Payload)
MST module structure information (1 bit)
NCM Number of Control/Management (1 byte)
Header type identification information immediately following the NXHD IPv6 header (1 byte)
(Next Header Information to identify the type of header
immediately following the IPv6 header)
PANID PAN-specific information (PAN-specific identification information)
Data size of PDC individual exchange information (1 byte)
PHY02, PHY06 Physical layer PHYHD Physical layer header PPDU Physical layer frame PRM Preamble (4 bytes) [00000000h]
PSDU Physical layer data/payload SEOJ Sending device identification information (3 bytes)
SEXADRS IEEE extended address on sender side
(Source IEEE Extension Address)
SFD physical layer frame start information (1 byte) [A7h]
SIPADRS Sender IP address (16 bytes)
(Source Internet Protocol Address)
SIPHD Leading information SPANID PAN-specific identification information on the sending side
(Source Personal Area Network Identifier)
SYNC Synchronization Header (5 bytes)
TCPDU TCP data/payload
(Transmission Control Protocol Data/Payload)
TCPHD TCP header (Transmission Control Protocol)
TID Identification information for association between request transmission and response reception (2 bytes).

Claims (8)

a first system controller and a second system controller located in a first local network and a second local network, respectively;
A server located in a wide area network,
The electronic unit management method allows the server, the first system controller, and the second system controller to communicate with each other via the first local network, the second local network, and the wide area network. hand,
The first system controller and the second system controller are
Each section is set in each local area network, and the first section information at the first time of the electronic units existing in the section is written for each memory, and the describing second section information of the electronic unit at a time of 2;
The first system controller and the second system controller share information in the memory by mutual communication or communication via the server,
The electronic unit includes a communication function, an application storage section, and a software storage section for changing the application,
The software storage section stores an application to be executed that is sent from the first system controller or the second system controller in response to movement of the electronic unit,
The electronic unit acquires information representing the operating status of this equipment from surrounding equipment placed in the section to which it has moved, and controls the operation of the electronic unit itself according to the content of the information. An electronic unit management method characterized by: 2. The electronic unit management method according to claim 1, wherein the electronic unit is included in a movable electronic device, and the device indicates the operating status by one of sound, light, or wind. 3. The electronic unit management method according to claim 2, wherein the movable electronic device is a robot cleaner, the device is an air conditioner, and the movement route is changed in accordance with information representing the operating status from the air conditioner. 2. The electronic unit management method according to claim 1 , wherein the electronic unit includes a light sensor that reacts to light . a first system controller and a second system controller located in a first local network and a second local network, respectively;
A server located in a wide area network,
The electronic unit management system is capable of communicating between the server, the first system controller, and the second system controller via the first local network, the second local network, and the wide area network. hand,
The first system controller and the second system controller are
Each section is set in each local area network, and the first section information at the first time of the electronic units existing in the section is written for each memory, and the means for describing second section information of the electronic unit at a time of 2;
means for the first system controller and the second system controller to share information in the memory by mutual communication or communication via the server;
The electronic unit includes a communication function, an application storage section, and a software storage section for changing the application,
The software storage section stores an application to be executed that is sent from the first system controller or the second system controller in response to movement of the electronic unit,
The electronic unit is configured to acquire information representing the operating status of this equipment from surrounding equipment located in the section to which the electronic unit has moved, and to control the operation of the electronic unit itself according to the content of the information. An electronic unit management system that is characterized by: 6. The electronic unit management system according to claim 5, wherein the electronic unit is included in a movable electronic device, and the device indicates the operating status by one of sound, light, or wind. 7. The electronic unit management system according to claim 6, wherein the movable electronic device is a robot cleaner, the device is an air conditioner, and the movement route is changed in accordance with information representing the operating status from the air conditioner. 6. The electronic unit management system according to claim 5 , wherein the electronic unit includes a light sensor that responds to light .

Images